You are on page 1of 254

7

C at alogue
All around the load hook
ACCESSORIES DIRECT FROM THE
HOIST AND CRANE MANUFACTURER
Subsidiaries

Austria India Spain


Steyregg Chennai Madrid
Tel +43 732 6411110 Tel +91 44 43523955 Tel +34 91 4840865
Fax +43 732 64111133 Fax +91 44 43523957 Fax +34 91 4905143
office@stahlcranes.at indiasales@stahlcranes.in info@stahlcranes.es

China Italy Switzerland


Shanghai S. Colombano Däniken
Tel +86 21 62572211 Tel +39 0185 358391 Tel +41 62 8251380
Fax +86 21 62541907 Fax +39 0185 358219 Fax +41 62 8251381
service_cn@stahlcranes.cn info@stahlcranes.it info@stahlcranes.ch

France Portugal United Arab Emirates


Paris Lisbon Dubai
Tel +33 1 39985060 Tel +351 21 4447160 Tel +971 4 8053700
Fax +33 1 34111818 Fax +351 21 4447169 Fax +971 4 8053701
info@stahlcranes.fr ferrometal@ferrometal.pt info@stahlcranes.ae

Great Britain Singapore USA


Birmingham Singapore Charleston, SC
Tel +44 121 7676400 Tel +65 6271 2220 Tel +1 843 7671951
Fax +44 121 7676485 Fax +65 6377 1555 Fax +1 843 7674366
info@stahlcranes.co.uk sales@stahlcranes.sg sales@stahlcranes.us

Sales partners

You will find the adresses of over 100 sales partners on the
internet at www.stahlcranes.com under ›Contact‹.
STAHL CraneSystems Lifting technology | Drive technology | Control technology
STAHL CraneSystems _
innovative and pioneering
> Consulting

> Project planning

> Production

> Quality assurance

> Erection

> Accessories

> Information

> Seminars

STAHL CraneSystems
Enthusiasm for innovation and continual growth
have been features of STAHL CraneSystems in
past years. As one of the world’s leading
manufacturers of hoisting and crane technology
and the leading manufacturer of explosion
protected material flow technology, we continue
to offer our customers technically pioneering,
revolutionary solutions. The development and
manufacture of individual off-standard solu-
tions, the successful customer care and the
decades-long availability of original parts are
always our fundamental principle. 12 subsidia-
ries and over 100 partners all around the world
mean that STAHL CraneSystems is represented
on all important markets.
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars
1

The history
The long history of STAHL CraneSystems begins in August 1876. Rafael Stahl founds the
mechanical workshop ›Stahl and Weineck‹. The first products relate to the textile
industry. The company grows and in the mid-eighties of the century before last, circular
spring needle knitting machines are exported abroad. At the end of the 19th century
the founder’s sons introduce new, innovative ideas. The first lift is built and the promising
era of material handling begins. The first electric lifting block is being manufac-
tured in 1903 already. From 1921 onwards, the company is engaged in the explosion-
protection of electrical apparatus and material handling equipment, and systemati-

3 4 5
1 The founder Rafael Stahl, 1845--1899
2 Circular spring needle knitting machine, 1893 3 First electric
lifting block, 1903 4 The Elektus: The first portable miniature
electric hoist in the world, 1950 5 First explosion-protected
electric hoist, 1953 6 AS wire rope hoist, 1978
7 SH wire rope hoist, 1998 8 STD Vario dual chain hoist, 2008
2

History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

cally and successfully intensifies this development. Right up to the present day,
STAHL CraneSystems has always been a pioneer and one of the world’s leading suppliers
of explosion-protected electric hoist and crane technology. From 1945 onwards, the compa-
ny’s expansion continues at breakneck speed. STAHL CraneSystems develops into one of
the leading manufacturers of wire rope and chain hoists and overhead material flow tech-
nology. Again and again, brilliant technical achievements succeed in all fields. From 1975
on, the sales organisation is expanded on a national and in particular international level. Today,
STAHL CraneSystems is represented on all continents by 12 subsidiaries and over 100 partners.

6 7 8
1

4
> Single girder overhead travelling cranes

> Double girder overhead travelling cranes

> Single girder suspension cranes

> Special cranes

Crane technology
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

STAHL CraneSystems supplies all crane components for overhead material


flow technology from a single source. Everything is possible, from simple work-
place solutions to interconnecting systems with complex automation. The safe
working load ranges from 125 kg to 160,000 kg. Is the ambience hot, cold, damp,
hazardous, or simply standard? No problem, STAHL CraneSystems has the right
solution for all areas. Modern manufacturing techniques and sophisticated
certified processes guarantee the consistently high quality of crane components
from STAHL CraneSystems.

STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please ask


for our brochure ›Crane technology‹ for more
information on our cranes.

1 Maximum hook height _ A single girder overhead travelling crane in a plastics moulding plant transports casting tools for retooling the
machines. Maximum hook paths are possible even in low buildings with the special chain hoist with ›extra short headroom trolley‹
2 Three bridge cranes of 40,000 kg S.W.L. each in operation. Two hoists with motor-driven rotating hooks work on each crane
3 In particular in buildings with a low noise level, the particularly quiet technology of cranes from STAHL CraneSystems is a welcome
advantage 4 The three cranes with 51 m span have room to move in the large shop measuring 52 m x 85 m. If required, all six load hooks
can be operated in synch from a single radio remote control
1

3 4

5
> Chain hoist

> Extra short headroom trolley

> Dual chain hoist

> Off-standard solutions

Chain hoists
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

The ST chain hoist programme from STAHL CraneSystems


ranks among the most distinctive and comprehensive on offer.
In use in thousands of applications for many decades, modern-
ised and optimised over and over again, the STAHL chain hoist is
a classic. Powerful, reliable and undemanding as regards main-
tenance and power consumption. The ST series is available in
13 S.W.L. ranges, from 125 kg to 6,300 kg. It can be used as a
stationary hoist with suspension hook or eye, with rigid moun-
ting, or with a push or electric trolley. In addition to the standard
designs, off-standard versions and individual solutions for
customers are available. The STAHL ST chain hoist programme
is also available in explosion-protected design for Zone 1, Zone
21 and Zone 22.

STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please


ask for our brochure ›Chain hoists‹ for more
information on our chain hoists.

1 The › short headroom trolley‹ with its headroom reduced by 33 % provides greater flexibility 2 The › extra short headroom trolley‹
permits maximum hook paths with its headroom of a mere 210 mm (5,000 kg) or 185 mm (3,200 kg) 3 The ST 05 chain hoist with S.W.L. of
up to 630 kg 4 The single-fall design of the ST 05 chain hoist permits fast hoisting speeds for S.W.L.s up to 2,500 kg 5 Perfect team-
work of dual chain hoists with crane technology from STAHL CraneSystems
1 2

4 5

6
> SH wire rope hoist

> AS 7 wire rope hoist

> SHW 8 winch

Wire rope hoists


& winches
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

The adaptable wire rope hoists from STAHL CraneSystems are designed as
an uncompromisingly modular system and calculated for an S.W.L. range from
500 kg to 160,000 kg. The versatile SH series is available for the S.W.L. range
from 500 kg to 25,000 kg. The upper S.W.L. range up to 100,000 kg is covered by
the tried-and-tested AS 7. The SHW 8 winch programme extends the area of
application into the heavy load range up to 160,000 kg. A compact, sturdy
construction is concealed behind the attractive design of STAHL Crane-
Systems’ wire rope hoists. They are extremely reliable, extremely powerful
and have above-average service life. The particularly smooth, precise starting
and braking characteristics are common to all. All wire rope hoists and winches
from STAHL CraneSystems are also available in explosion-protected design
for Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22.

STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please ask for our


brochures ›Wire rope hoists‹ and ›Winches‹ for more
information on our wire rope hoists and winches

1 The AS 7 wire rope hoist supplements the SH series of wire rope hoists in the upper S.W.L. range up to 100,000 kg 2 KE monorail
trolleys with SH series wire rope hoists are available for S.W.L.s up to 25,000 kg 3 SH 6 wire rope hoist with UE monorail trolley, true
vertical lift, lifting height of 25 m 4 TDC – twin drive concept, wire rope hoists on the twin drive concept are equipped as standard with
two motor-gear units 5 AS 7 wire rope hoist with a double girder overhead travelling crane, SH wire rope hoists in combination with
single girder overhead travelling cranes 6 The winch SHW 8 is used for loads from 32,000 kg
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8
> Universal

> Flexible

> Reliable

> Your choice

> Maintenance-friendly

> Field-proven

> Compact

Wheel block
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

The modern, optimised SR wheel block system with its six frame sizes can be
used universally. It is suitable both for manufacturing cranes and crabs and for
off-standard applications. The wheels, guided by flanges on both sides, guaran-
tee quiet, runway-preserving travel, and can in addition be equipped with guide
rollers. The reliable drive options are pole-changing hollow shaft drives, SFD
frequency inverters or slimline pancake gears. Five standard configurations are
available for mounting them on the customers’ structures.

STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please ask


for our brochure ›SR wheel blocks‹ for more
information on our wheel blocks

1 Affixed connection Type A _ A connecting flange is used to weld the wheel block end to a steel structure, the connection can be
dismantled 2 Screwed connection Type S 3 Welded connection Type W _ the wheel block end is welded directly to the supporting
structure without any intermediate flange 4 Head connection Type H _ the wheel block is bolted on at the top 5 Inserted connection
Type I _ the wheel block is plugged into a hollow profile and secured with bolts 6 The guide rollers are positive locking and securely
mounted, and can be used even on relatively flat rails 7 As an option, the wheel blocks can be equipped with slimline pancake gears
8 The wheel blocks form the basis of the AS 7 wire rope hoist crab
1 2

3 4
> Lifting technology

> Drive technology

> Control technology

Crane kits
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

With crane kits from STAHL CraneSystems, you can profit


from the outstanding quality of our lifting technology, drive
technology and control technology. We supply the various
high-tech crane components and the fundamental data for
erecting the crane. As regards lifting technology, we have the
world’s most comprehensive, complete range of products.
Choose from ST chain hoists in 13 S.W.L. ranges between 125 kg
and 6,300 kg, from 26 SH wire rope hoist variants in 5 frame
sizes up to 100,000 S.W.L. or SHW winches up to 160,000 kg.
Our accurate, high-performance drive technology too offers a
convincing variety of components: endcarriages for suspension
cranes and for overhead travelling cranes, and the modular
SR wheel block system for universal use offer the appropriate
solution for every travel function. Reliable control technology
with a wide selection of innovative, technically mature crane
electrics round off STAHL CraneSystems’ crane kit programme.

1 Crane endcarriages 2 Innovative, compact SFD 1 frequency inverter


3 KSG crane control 4 Portable joystick transmitter
1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8
> Crane technology

>
>
Hoists
Explosion protection Accessories
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

> Load suspension equipment

> Slings

> Sling accessories

> Weighing and measuring

> Material conveying and handling equipment

> Hydraulics

> Fork-lift truck attachments

As global experts with many years of experience on hoists and crane systems, we know the
needs and requirements all around overhead material handling. STAHLplus, the direct marketing
organisation all around the load hook from STAHL CraneSystems, offers a detailed range of high-
quality yet cost-effective products. Profit from our experience, know-how and the advantage of
being able to purchase everything you need for your material handling from a single supplier.

Internet
www.stahlplus.com
stahlplus@stahlcranes.com

1 ST chain hoist with electric trolley, see page 43 2 360 ° manual chain hoist, see page 51 3 TRU round stock grab, see page 100
4 SRS round slings, see page 175 5 Workshop crane, see page 200 6 Calibrated digital load cell up to 10 t, see page 196
7 Rotating sling-attachment collar, screw-on or weld-on, see page 188 8 MB work platform for fork-lift truck, see page 208
1 2

3 4
> SLE motor management

> SMC Multicontroller

> SBC brake controller

> SSC cumulative load controller

> ALC automatic load display

> Radio transmitter with feedback from crane

Condition monitoring
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

Condition monitoring systems are in use wher-


ever production processes need to be monitored
and controlled. A wide range of crane compo-
nent data are recorded and monitored with
these high-quality electronic systems. This
minimises the possibility of complications and
avoids subsequent damage. Analysing the
recorded data enables individually adapted,
optimised maintenance intervals to be deter-
mined and the necessity of important repairs to
be ascertained. Condition monitoring systems
from STAHL CraneSystems prevent unexpected
downtimes, improve process and operational
reliability and thus increase cost-effectiveness.

1 SMC Multicontroller 2 SMC Multicontroller 3 Large-figure load display up to 150 mm


4 micron 6 radio transmitter with feedback
1

3 4
> Crane systems

> Wire rope hoists

> Chain hoists

> Manual chain hoists

Explosion protection
History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

STAHL CraneSystems is pioneering, dynamic and uncompro-


mising when the safety of persons and machines in areas
subject to gas and explosion hazards is at stake. All around
the world, STAHL CraneSystems is regarded as a specialist
for explosion protection. STAHL CraneSystems occupies a
prominent position in this field with our many decades of expe-
rience and know-how, our own fundamental research and
development, with approvals from the Federal Physico-Technical
Institute (PTB) and other test institutes in many countries. All
components of a crane or hoist without exception come from our
own production, from motor and brake to controls and control
pendant. This ensures maximum and high-quality explosion
protection. The stringent ATEX regulations on mechanical ex-
plosion protection are met. STAHL CraneSystems was the first
manufacturer of overhead material flow technology to implement
the ATEX 100 a directive 94/9 in the full range of production and
is today the world’s leading manufacturer of explosion-protected
hoist and crane technology.

1 Single girder suspension crane with 1,600 kg S.W.L. 2 SH ex wire rope hoists are available for gas explosion protection Zone 1 and
Zone 2, and dust explosion protection Zone 21 and Zone 22 3 The ST chain hoist in explosion-protected design is available in two frame
sizes up to a safe working load of 5,000 kg 4 Single girder overhead travelling crane with 5,000 kg safe working load and radio remote
control in the hazardous area of a chemical plant
> Product seminars

> Technical seminars

>
Seminars Individual customer seminars

History _ Crane technology _ Chain hoists _ Wire rope hoists & winches _ Wheel block _ Crane kits _ Accessories _ Condition monitoring _ Ex plosion protection _ Seminars

Invest in the qualification of your staff. In STAHL CraneSystems you have a


competent partner at your side. For the knowledge you gain from us comes
directly from a manufacturer of lifting, drive and control technology. We convey
practical and theoretical knowledge to support you in your everyday work.
The programme of seminars comprising single-subject, basic and advanced
courses covers all the main product groups. We would also be pleased to
offer courses orientated on your individual specifications and requirements.
The following product and technical seminars are on offer at present: chain
hoists, wire rope hoists, combined wire rope and chain hoists, load suspension
equipment, material handling equipment, crane operators, and safety instruction
for chain and fork-lift truck operators. Each seminar concludes with a certificate.

STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please ask


for our brochure ›Seminar programme‹ for more
information on our seminars

Organisation and registration


Tel. + 49 7940 128 -2354
Petra Rückgauer
Fax + 49 7940 128 -2300
petra.rueckgauer@stahlcranes.com
Flexible, robust and high-powered _ The widest variety of hoists in the world, that’s what
STAHL CraneSystems offers you. Adaptable wire rope hoists and winches are designed for
lifting capacities from 125 kg up to 160,000 kg, robust chain hoists cover the lifting capacity range
from 125 kg to 6,300kg. The attractive design of the wire rope and chain hoists from STAHL
CraneSystems masks a compact, low-maintenance construction. All hoists are highly reliable,
extremely powerful and indestructible. Would you like to have all the details? We would be
pleased to give you information on the whole range and on our innovative system solutions.
STAHL CraneSystems GmbH, 74653 Künzelsau, +49 7940 128-0 or marketing@stahlcranes.com

Lifting technology | Drive technology | Control technology


Crane systems, jib cranes, gantry and mobile cranes,
small crane technology, radio remote controls, runway endstops, Crane technology 3
suspension, control and handling equipment, wheel blocks

Chain hoists, wire rope hoists, winch, lever hoists, push trolleys,
reel-type trolleys, adjustable beam clamps, cable winches, lubricants, Hoists 35
rope sheaves, balancers, cable reeling drums, cable pullers

Ex electric chain hoists, Ex wire rope hoists, Ex crane technology,


Ex crane components, Ex manual chain hoists, Ex pneumatic chain hoists,
Ex crane load cells, Ex manual cranes, Ex manual winches, Ex pneumatic Explosion protection 79
winches, Ex balancers, Ex mini-manipulator, Ex small crane systems

Grabs, clamps, barrel tongs, suction lifters, Load suspension


vacuum lifters, permanent lifting magnets, spreader beams, 97
C-hooks, loading forks, coil turning hooks equipment

Chain slings, chain sling components, endless chain slings,


chain sling accessories, rope slings, round and web slings,
wear protectors, chain slings for forestry application, chain slings Slings 141
for hot dip galvanising plants, suspension systems, sling rack

Weld-on hooks, swivel transport slings, eye bolts,


lifting eye nuts, transport ring, carbine hooks, shackles, Sling accessories 185
anti-twist guard, clevis hook, sling attachment points

Weighing
Load cells, calibrated load cells, load indicators, digital load cells 193
and measuring

Trolleys, scissor-type lifting tables, flat lifting tables, Material conveying


pallet lifting trucks, scissor-type pallet lifting trucks, 199
machinery lifters, shifting skates, workshop cranes equipment

Hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps,


toe jacks, hydraulic lifters, spreaders, pullers Hydraulics 205

Dump and stacking dump containers, working platforms, hinged Fork-lift truck
bottom skips, telescopic crane jibs, Big Bag transport equipment, 207
gas cylinder cabinets, collection troughs, drum transport equipment attachments

Glossary, Alphabetical index,


Fax Order Form Information 211
New development: lever hoist for the
low load range _ light and convenient
Safe working load from 250 kg – 500 kg

> fast _ the freewheeling facility permits the


chain to be pulled through or the load attached
quickly
> safe _ forged suspension and load hooks open
without breaking if the hoist is overloaded
> user-friendly _ short and ergonomically
All around the load hook

shaped lever with rubber handle makes the


hoist easy to use
> long-lived _ all components of the load
pressure brake are made of high-quality
material and are corrosion-protected
> tested _ standardised surface-protected
(galvanised) high-tensile round steel chains
meet current national and international
regulations
> compact _ extremely low deadweight and
exceedingly compact con-
struction enable it to be
operated in restricted spaces
> protected _ enclosed design
protects internal components
from dust

Each lever hoist is


factory tested with
overload and supplied
with a test certificate
with serial number,
est
and operating instruc-
price on requ
tions with integrated S pecial
EC declaration of
conformity.

STAHLplus Info
See page 64
for more details
Cranes from STAHL CraneSystems are
the ideal solution for standard
applications. They are easy to install
and simple to use, and make
working on machines in production
bays and warehouses easier.

Crane technology

3
Crane technology

Overhead travelling and suspension cranes

What a good thing it is when the "classics under the roof" come from A range of cranes to suit all requirements
STAHL CraneSystems. Then the tried-and-tested functions required • Our engineers provide on-site consultation
are achieved with an intelligent design and the most up-to-date • Easy-to-assemble components ensure minimum assembly and
technology. For example, minimum approach dimensions and maintenance time and thus low costs
comfortably large hook paths. • Optimised component modules and certified quality assurance in
accordance with DIN ISO 9001/EN 29001 guarantee consistent high
quality and short delivery times
Technical features (standard range) • And after delivery: Our qualified maintenance team will carry out the
• Single girder suspension cranes up to 10,000 kg legally stipulated inspections on your behalf.
• Single girder overhead travelling cranes up to 16,000 kg • Secured spare parts availability even after many years
• Double girder overhead travelling cranes up to 160,000 kg
• Also for use in hazardous areas:
We are the experts in explosion protection!

Certification _ As a certified company it is your responsibility to engage companies


for the accident prevention regulation test and maintenance of your material hand-
ling systems who are themselves certified and whose staff are qualified persons as
defined by the Decree on Safety in Operation.

Single girder overhead travelling crane with wire rope hoist.

STAHL CraneSystems

is the experienced and creative


partner for implementing indivi-
dual material flow concepts right
up to automatic cranes, special
cranes and complex system solu-
tions.
01_08EN.FM

Overhead travelling crane with 2 wire rope hoists for single and tandem operation, with integrated load measuring system and
large format display for monitoring loading of lorries.

4
Innovative crane technology

Cable harness reduced by 80% thanks to radio signal transmission.

As of now, STAHL CraneSystems GmbH is offering single girder


overhead travelling cranes up to a safe working load of 16,000 kg with
an innovative control concept achieving a new level of safety and
operator-friendliness.
The technology has been developed in collaboration with system
partners who play leading roles in their particular fields.

Technical features
• Single girder overhead travelling cranes up to 16,000 kg with radio
control as standard
• Wireless signal transmission replaces cable-bound control pendants
• A choice of three radio transmitters:
- quadrix compact transmitter, a mere 330 g in weight
- micron 6 pushbutton transmitter
- spectrum 1 joystick transmitter Suspended cables and mechanical fixtures for the hoist power supply are dispensed
(detailed information on page 25) with completely.
• Main power supply with four-pole conductor line
• Low-maintenance: no cables susceptible to wear
• No cable loops mean space gains
• Plug-and-socket connections for all electrics as standard
01_08EN.FM

The new crane technology in operation with an SH 30 wire rope hoist and an S.W.L. of 5,000 kg.

5
Crane technology

Single girder suspension cranes

The optimum up to 10,000 kg S.W.L. and spans up to 20 m

The single girder suspension crane from STAHL CraneSystems needs


very little space. It runs on the lower flange of the crane runway which
is mounted directly on the ceiling and achieves the greatest utilisation
of space possible. In particular in the case of restricted production
areas, this permits optimum utilisation of the width of the room.

Suspension cranes in neighbouring bays can be connected; the crane


interlock functions completely free of jolts and knocks. The hoist can
be moved onto the neighbouring crane together with its load and can
reach any destination in the interlocked system.

Assembly of electrical components _ In particular in buildings with a low noise level,


the particularly quiet technology of the cranes is a welcome advantage.

Fitters’ shop _ The single girder suspen-


sion crane with 3,200 kg S.W.L. is in con-
tinuous operation here.

Technical features
• Compact _ minimum approach dimensions and efficient utilisation
of the available ceiling height
• Long-lived _ robust rolled steel sectional girders or welded box
girders for the crane bridge, optionally in EH-A or EH-B version
(sketch)
• Convenient _ quiet travel, smooth starting and braking
• Wide-ranging _ Crane interlocks free of jolts or knocks for overhead
material transport across bays
• Choice _ of flexible flat cable or contact-free conductor line as
power supply to the hoist
• Lifting _ optionally with chain hoist up to 6,300 kg or wire rope hoist
up to 10,000 kg S.W.L.

Railway construction _ The 12 suspension cranes ensure that the overhead transpor-
tation in the production processes runs smoothly.

STAHLplus Info _ Please ask for dimensions, prices


and detailed literature on wire rope and chain hoists.
You will find more off-standard crane solutions on
page 9.
01_08EN.FM

EH-A EH-B

6
Single girder overhead travelling cranes

Adaptable up to 16,000 kg S.W.L. and spans up to 30 m

The single girder overhead travelling crane from STAHL CraneSystems


is flexible and astonishingly adaptable. It runs on the top flange of the
crane runway. Its use enables rational, economical material flow solu-
tions to be achieved even in low or small buildings. The existing space
can be utilised to the full by using various installation variants. The
crane bridge girder can be individually adapted either "flush at top"
(EL-A), "flush at bottom" (EL-B) or "raised up" (EL-C). A clearance of
approx. 100 mm to the ceiling is specified for single girder overhead
travelling cranes. Particularly in low-ceilinged rooms, this permits
minimum headrooms and optimum adaptation to the building profile.
The height of lift can be increased even further by using a cantilever
crab from STAHL CraneSystems.
Plastics moulding _ A single girder overhead travelling crane transports the moulding
tools for retooling the machines. The off-standard chain hoist with "extra short
headroom trolley" permits maximum hook paths even in low rooms.

EL-A

EL-B

EL-C
Three "hermaphrodite cranes" were de-
signed partly from suspension and partly
from overhead travelling components.
The cranes were designed as overhead
travelling cranes, but due to the wide
span of 51 m were equipped with an
extra suspended trolley in the centre.
The three-point suspension permitted a
crucial reduction of the weight and
headroom of the crane bridges. The
three off-standard cranes can be opera-
ted synchronously from a single radio
control if required. Combined in synchro-
nous operation, they can transport up to
45,000 kg.

Technical features
• Perfect _ extremely adaptable thanks to various installation versions
• Resilient _ drives calculated for the rugged conditions of crane duty
• Computer-optimised _ sturdy rolled steel sectional girders or welded
box girders for the crane bridge
• Convenient _ low noise generation, smooth starting and braking
characteristics
• Choice _ of flexible flat cable or guarded conductor line as power
supply to the hoist The offset crane girder design enabled the maximum effective hook path to be
achieved in spite of the very low ceiling.
• Accurate _ laser measurement of wheel axles for smooth running
characteristics and low wear
01_08EN.FM

7
Crane technology

Double girder overhead travelling cranes

Double strength up to 160,000 kg S.W.L. and spans up to 30 m

STAHL CraneSystems is the specialist for high-performance cranes in


the upper S.W.L. range. This naturally includes the double girder
overhead travelling crane with an S.W.L. of up to 160,000 kg and a span
of up to 30 m. Large, unwieldy loads can be handled extremely safely
and accurately. This is particularly true when several hoists equipped
with a precise electronic synchro control are used in tandem opera-
tion. The double girder overhead travelling crane can be integrated
into planned or existing buildings utilising special installation variants.
The top hook position brings particular advantages on a double girder
overhead travelling crane. The load hook is lifted between the crane
girders. Additional requirements such as maintenance platforms on
crab or crane, cabins or higher crane travel speeds can be achieved
quickly and easily.
Motor industry _ Crane technology
around the clock. The toolmaking shop
has been fully equipped with double
girder overhead travelling cranes from
STAHL CraneSystems. The cranes are
easily accessible from integrated
maintenance catwalks.

Technical features Example: double girder overhead travelling crane in paper manufacture
• Computer optimised _ robust rolled sectional steel girders or
torsion-resistant welded box girders for the crane bridge
• Convenient _ quiet running characteristics, smooth starting and
braking
• Choice _ flexible flat cable or contact-free conductor line for the
power supply to the hoist
• Accurate _ laser measurement of wheel axles for smooth running
characteristics and low wear
• Lifting _ optionally with wire rope hoist or winch

STAHLplus Info _ Everything from one supplier? Just


ask us! We provide on-site advice, plan projects and
provide you with tailor-made solutions to suit your
specific needs.

Paper manufacture _ Three wire rope hoists are mounted on the double girder
01_08EN.FM

overhead travelling crane with 30,000 kg S.W.L. The outer hoists ensure that the reels
are handled without swinging, the centre hoist with a single hook is used for turning
the paper reels if required.

8
STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Off-standard cranes

Practical experience
STAHL CraneSystems enjoys every customer-specific challenge. Only
when your individual solution needs to be planned, from a single hoist
to custom-built cranes to computer-controlled automation, do we
really have to extend ourselves. Then all our flexibility and dynamism
are brought to bear. The highly motivated, experienced engineers and
technicians at STAHL CraneSystems combine their comprehensive
know-how with your specifications and ideas. Economical standard
components from the whole range of products are used as well as
economically optimised off-standard components and automation
components. With your input, in a constructive process a solution is
achieved that is practical, individual and precisely adapted to your
application.
Handling paper reels _ With a total of five axes of motion, paper reels up to 18,000 kg
Competent are reloaded quickly and safely.
Numerous examples both in Germany and abroad prove the compet-
ence of STAHL CraneSystems in the field of custom-built solutions.
These projects are described in detail in separate reference leaflets.
Just ask for them at www.stahlcranes.com.

Technical features
• High-performance _ experience and know-how from more than
70 years of crane manufacture and centralised production
• Innovative _ continuing development of the hoists and crane
components
• Individual _ customer-specific system solutions
• Partnership _ joint planning in consultation with our customers
• Safe _ top quality ensured by certified processes
• Rigorous _ statics and engineering to the latest DIN and EN
standards

Waste reloading station _ Multi-hook operation, automatic load positioning and loads
up to 38,000 kg: STAHL CraneSystems supplied the whole system including the free-
standing crane runway.

Aircraft engine maintenance _ State of the art crane systems from STAHL CraneSystems with safe working loads between 500 and 12,500 kg transport the valuable aircraft
01_08EN.FM

engines and their individual components to any point desired. All the cranes are equipped with frequency-controlled drives in order to be able to move the delicate engines
extremely slowly and with minimum load swing. Wire rope hoists of the SHF 30 to SHF 60 series are used, some of the hoists were designed with true vertical lift. The
cranes with two trolleys and separate joysticks for the individual hoists are particularly useful when rotating the engines.

9
Crane technology

Crane components

Modular
The perfect complement to STAHL CraneSystems hoists are crane
components from our own production. Forward-looking, high quality
components complement each other in the system and offer safety and
economical use. With the aid of the modular components, the crane
system is individually adapted to customer-specific wishes

Technical features
• Optimised crane endcarriages_ KEL for single girder overhead 1
travelling cranes: 5 wheel diameters and 5 wheelbases
KZL for double girder overhead travelling cranes: 5 wheel diameters
and 6 wheelbases
KEH single girder suspension cranes: 4 wheel diameters and
3 wheelbases
• Versatile SF crane travel drives _ Supplied as standard with two-
step speeds 20/5 or 40/10 m/min, other speeds available on request.
Stepless speed control as an option
• Flexible operation _ Cable-connected STH manual control pendant
micro and quadrix pushbutton transmitters
spectrum joystick transmitter
• Power supply along crane bridge _ conductor line
(in conjunction with radio technology)
festoon cables (in conjunction with control pendants)
• Crane control _ Panel box with plug connections
(in conjunction with radio technology)
Panel box with terminal connections 2 3

1 Main power supply _ When a con-


ductor line is used, no moving cables
need be installed on the crane

2 STH manual control pendant _ The


cost-effective solution, with load
display on request

3 Radio remote controls _ Three


ergonomic radio transmitters are 5
avail-able: the micron and quadrix
pushbutton transmitters and the 5 KZL endcarriage _ For double girder overhead travelling cranes. Safe transmis-
spectrum joystick transmitter sion of forces from the crane bridge thanks to high-strength friction grip bolts

4 KEL endcarriage _ For single girder 6 Crane control _ In combination with radio technology, the control is clearly
overhead travelling cranes up to arranged in a panel box on the crane bridge with plug connections as standard.
16,000 S.W.L. Safe transmission of
forces from the crane bridge thanks 7 SF crane travel drives _ Low maintenance and with 2 speeds as standard.
to high-strength friction grip bolts Integrated centrifugal masses ensure smooth starting and braking
4
01_08EN.FM

6 7

10
Crane equipment

Performance-enhancing
In addition to the crane components, a great deal of additional
mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment is available from
STAHL CraneSystems. This increases the performance of the crane
system still further and makes working with it particularly convenient.
More important however, is the fact that state-of-the-art equipment
improves process reliability and safety at work. The wide spectrum of
crane equipment permits practical, safe solutions with extremely high
cost-effectiveness.

The 10 most frequently ordered features


• Cross and long travel limit switches
• Radio remote control with pushbutton or joystick transmitter
1
• Load monitoring and lifetime calculation with SMC for wire rope
hoists
• Stepless speed control
• Off-standard corrosion protection systems
• Maintenance platforms along crane bridge
• Anti-collision devices with light barriers
• Equipment for outdoor use
• Large-format LCD load display
• Spreader beams and sling equipment

1 SFD1 frequency inverter _ For


stepless speed control, mounted
directly on cross and long travel
drives

2 Reflection light barriers _ Cranes


reliably "keep their distance"
2
3 LCD display _ Optional signal
feedback to crane operator

4 SSC load summation _ Adds up the


loads suspended on a maximum of
four hooks and disconnects hoisting
motion when the permissible limit
load is exceeded
3

5 SMC Multicontroller _ When precise operating data and maximum safety are
required

6 Large-format four-figure load display _ Installed here on two hoists. The inte-
grated load summation monitors the total load on both hooks

7 Crane catwalk _ with grating, railing on both sides and electrically monitored
access doors at both ends 4 5
01_08EN.FM

6 7

11
Crane technology

SR wheel block system

The components of the SR modular wheel block system derive from


STAHL CraneSystems’ field-proven series programme. A number of
different mounting methods guarantee universal and extremely flexible
use.

Technical features
• Universal _ can be used for wheel loads from 5,000 to 30,000 kg in six
frame sizes
• Flexible _ five standard configurations for connection to customer’s
supporting structure
• Reliable_ SF drives for every requirement, as low-maintenance
direct drives
• Choice_ on request, drives with innovative SFD frequency inverter
mounted directly on motor
• Maintenance-friendly _ wheel can simply be rolled out to the front
• Field-proven _ series components with maximum performance
• Compact _ on request with space-saving pancake gear a
• Safe _ as an option, available in explosion-protected design in
compliance with ATEX

Head connection H Inserted connection I Affixed connection A


The wheel block is The wheel block is A connecting flange is
bolted on at the top. plugged into a hollow used to weld the wheel
profile and secured block end to a steel
with bolts. structure, the connec-
tion can be dismantled.

Welded connection W Screwed connection S With pancake gear


The wheel block end is A connecting flange is As an option, the wheel
welded directly to the used to bolt the wheel block can be supplied
supporting structure block end to a steel with space-saving
without any interme- structure. pancake gear.
diate flange.

L2 L1 L3
d4
h1

With guide rollers


h2

The guide rollers are


mounted securely with
positive-locking and can
be used even with rela-
tively flat rails.
k
to SR 200 > 30 mm,
b1
up to SR 250 > 40 mm.

Model Wheel Wheel Dimensions Rail Item Price *


load Ø width No. version
without
L1 L2 L3 h1 h2 Ø d1 b1 k drive
[kg] [mm] [mm]
SR 125 5000 125 273 100 135 165 100 100 50, 60 40, 50 35 710 52 10 0
SR 160 7000 160 345 125 172 190 100 125 52, 62, 40, 50, 36 710 52 10 0
72 60
SR 200 10000 200 408 125 189 235 100 125 54, 64, 40, 50, 37 710 52 10 0
74 60
SR 250 16000 250 437 160 208 295 100 160 54, 64, 40, 50, 38 710 54 10 0
74, 84 60, 70
SR 315 22000 315 500 160 230 350 100 160 64, 74, 50, 60, 39 710 52 10 0
84, 94 70, 80
SR 400 30000 400 658 200 322 440 155 200 75, 85, 60, 70, -
01_08EN.FM

95, 105 80, 100 The wheel blocks are suitable for universal use. Here they
* Prices for versions with drive right / left on request. form the basis for the crab of an AS70 wire rope hoist.

12
Jib cranes

Jib cranes offer many functional and economic advantages to


facilitate efficient and safe lifting and moving of loads at the
workplace.
Jib cranes from STAHL CraneSystems offer even more:
Their modular design ensures quick and easy operation. Together with
hoists from STAHL CraneSystems, they provide a tailor-made solution
for every workplace

Pillar jib cranes

This catalogue presents only a selection from the wide range, for safe
working load ratings from 125 to 1,000 kg.
If you cannot find the pillar jib crane you require, please enquire
(enquiry form for jib cranes on page 19). Other jib cranes with square
footplate and articulated jib can be supplied on request. We will send
you a quotation free of charge without delay.

STAHLplus Info _
Also available in explosion-
protected design.

PS pillar jib crane


Technical features

Pillar jib crane:


• Steel structure designed in compliance with
DIN 15018:
-Hoisting class H2
-Stress group B2
• Slewing range: 270°
• Slewing by hand
• Complete with cross travel endstops
• Complete basic electrical equipment
• Complete documentation including crane
test logbook
• Anchor bolts and template available against
surcharge
• Shear connector system available as an
option against surcharge

Model Safe Jib Head- Flange Founda- Shear Weight Item Electric chain hoist:
PS working length room width tion connector No. • Quality chain hoist type ST
load Plate • Main and creep hoisting speed
size
P (GK) A B F … G Ø VP [kg] • Standard height of lift = 3 m
[kg] [mm] • Push trolley (electric trolley on request)
1,25-3,0 125 3000 3290 55 900 680 259 810 517 0 • Contactor control
1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 3290 55 1000 680 272 810 518 0 • IP 55 protection
1,25-5,0 5000 3290 64 1100 680 298 810 519 0
• Control pendant incl. approx. 1.8 m control
2,5-3,0 250 3000 3290 55 1050 680 260 810 521 0
2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 3290 82 1200 850 308 810 522 0 cable
2,5-5,0 5000 3290 82 1300 850 420 810 523 0 • Chain box
5-3,0 500 3000 3290 82 1300 850 334 810 525 0 • Technical data for hoist on page 43
5-4,0 (55) 4000 3290 82 1450 1050 400 810 526 0
5-5,0 5000 3290 100 1550 1050 534 810 527 0
10-3,0 1,000 3000 3290 100 1600 1200 404 810 529 0
10-4,0 (90) 4000 3760 120 1800 1450 567 810 530 0
01_08EN.FM

10-5,0 5000 3760 120 1950 1450 699 810 531 0


Detailed dimensions on request.

13
Crane technology

AS pillar jib cranes

Technical features

Pillar jib crane:


• Steel structure designed in compliance with
DIN 15018:
-Hoisting class H2
-Stress group B2
• Slewing range: 270°
• Slewing by hand
• Complete with cross travel stops
• Complete basic electrical equipment
• Complete documentation including crane
test logbook
• Anchor bolts and template available against
surcharge
• Shear connector system available as an
Model Safe work- Dimensions Weight Item option against surcharge
AS ing load No.
P (GK) A UK B F … G Ø VP
[kg] [mm] [kg] Electric chain hoist:
1,25-3,0 125 3000 2500 2790 91 900 680 259 810 533 0 • Quality chain hoist type ST
1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 2500 2790 91 1050 680 280 810 534 0 • Main and creep hoisting speed
1,25-5,0 5000 2500 2790 91 1100 680 342 810 535 0
2,5-3,0 250 3000 2500 2790 91 1050 680 259 810 537 0
• Standard height of lift = 3 m
2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 2500 2845 120 1250 850 403 810 538 0 • Push trolley (electric trolley on request)
2,5-5,0 5000 2500 2845 120 1350 850 437 810 539 0 • Contactor control
5-3,0 500 3000 2500 2845 120 1300 850 370 810 541 0 • IP 55 protection
5-4,0 (55) 4000 2500 2845 120 1450 1050 403 810 542 0 • Control pendant incl. approx. 1.8 m control
5-5,0 5000 2500 2945 150 1650 1200 597 810 543 0
10-3,0 1,000 3000 2500 2845 120 1600 1200 433 810 545 0 cable
10-4,0 (90) 4000 2500 2945 150 1800 1450 623 810 546 0 • Chain box
10-5,0 5000 2500 3005 170 1950 1450 759 810 547 0 • See page 43 for technical data for hoist
Detailed dimensions on request.

PR pillar jib crane

Technical features

Pillar jib crane:


• Steel structure designed in compliance with
DIN 15018:
-Hoisting class H2
-Stress group B2
• Slewing range: 360°
• Slewing by hand
• Complete with cross travel stops
• Complete basic electrical equipment
• Complete documentation including crane
test logbook
• Anchor bolts and template available against
surcharge
• Shear connector system available as an
option against surcharge
Model Safe work- Dimensions Weight Item
PR ing load No.
P (GK) A B F … G Ø VP Electric chain hoist:
[kg] [mm] [kg] • Type ST quality chain hoist
1,25-3,0 125 3000 2710 82 950 680 253 810 805 0 • Main and precision hoisting speed
1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 2710 82 1050 680 270 810 806 0 • Standard height of lift = 3 m
1,25-5,0 5000 2750 100 1150 680 325 810 807 0
2,5-3,0 250 3000 2730 91 1100 680 263 810 808 0 • Push trolley (electric trolley on request)
2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 2730 91 1250 1050 444 810 809 0 • Contactor control
2,5-5,0 5000 2790 120 1400 1050 533 810 810 0 • IP 55 protection
5-2,0 500 2000 2730 91 1200 680 243 810 811 0 • Control pendant incl. approx. 1.8 m control
5-3,0 (80) 3000 2750 100 1400 1050 436 810 812 0
cable
5-4,0 4000 2790 120 1550 1050 499 810 813 0
• Chain box
01_08EN.FM

10-2,0 1,000 2000 2790 120 1450 1050 432 810 814 0
10-3,0 (150) 3000 2850 150 1700 1200 506 810 815 0 • See page 43 for technical data for hoist
Detailed dimensions on request.

14
Wall-mounted jib cranes

This catalogue presents only a selection from the wide range, for safe
working load ratings from 125 to 1,000 kg.

If you cannot find the wall-mounted jib crane you require, please
enquire (enquiry form for jib cranes on page 19). We will send you a
quotation free of charge immediately.

Inside running jib cranes (the trolley is protected, running in a hollow


profile) are also available and suitable for low S.W.L.s. Price on
request.

STAHLplus Info _ STAHLplus Info _


Please ask for dimensions, prices and Also available in explosion-
detailed literature on our chain hoists. protected design.

PW wall-mounted jib crane


Technical features

Wall-mounted jib crane:


• Steel structure designed in compliance with
DIN 15018:
-Hoisting class H2
-Stress group B2
• Slewing range: 180°
• Slewing by hand
• Complete with cross travel endstops
• Including standard bearing brackets
• Complete basic electrical equipment
• Complete documentation including crane
Bracket test logbook
sub-assembly • Wall bracket and bracket for supporting
pillar available against surcharge
Model Safe Jib Bracket Head- Flange Weight Item
PW working length sub- room width No.
load assembly
P (GK) A B F [kg] Electric chain hoist:
[kg] [mm] • Quality chain hoist type ST
1,25-3,0 125 3000 A 940 55 70 810 501 0 • Main and creep hoisting speed
1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 940 55 93 810 502 0
1,25-5,0 5000 940 64 110 810 503 0 • Standard height of lift = 3 m
2,5-3,0 250 3000 A 940 55 70 810 505 0 • Push trolley (electric trolley on request)
2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 940 64 95 810 506 0 • Contactor control
2,5-5,0 5000 940 82 140 810 507 0 • IP 55 protection
5-3,0 500 3000 A 940 82 90 810 509 0
5-4,0 (55) 4000 940 82 120 810 510 0
• Control pendant incl. approx. 1.8 m control
5-5,0 5000 940 100 205 810 511 0 cable
10-3,0 1,000 3000 A 940 100 123 810 513 0 • Chain box
10-4,0 (90) 4000 940 100 170 810 514 0 • See page 43 for techjnical data of hoist
01_08EN.FM

10-5,0 5000 B 1430 120 320 810 515 0


Detailed dimensions on request.

15
Crane technology

AW wall-mounted jib cranes

Technical features

Wall-mounted jib crane:


• Steel structure designed in compliance with
DIN 15018:
-Hoisting class H2
-Stress group B2
• Slewing range: 180°
• Slewing by hand
• Complete with cross travel endstops
• Including standard bearing brackets
• Complete basic electrical equipment
Bracket • Complete documentation including crane
sub-assembly
test logbook
• Wall bracket and bracket for supporting
Model Safe Jib Bracket Head- Flange Weight Item pillar available against surcharge
AW working length sub- room width No.
load assembly
P (GK) A B F [kg]
[kg] [mm] Electric chain hoist:
1,25-3,0 125 3000 A 940 91 115 810 549 0 • Type ST quality chain hoist
1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 940 91 140 810 550 0 • Main and precision hoisting speed
1,25-5,0 5000 940 91 160 810 551 0
2,5-3,0 250 3000 A 940 91 115 810 553 0 • Standard height of lift = 3 m
2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 940 91 140 810 554 0 • Push trolley (electric trolley on request)
2,5-5,0 5000 940 120 240 810 555 0 • Contactor control
5-3,0 500 3000 A 940 120 170 810 557 0 • IP 55 protection
5-4,0 (55) 4000 940 120 205 810 558 0
• Control pendant incl. approx. 1.8 m control
5-5,0 5000 B 1430 150 355 810 559 0
10-3,0 1,000 3000 B 1430 150 265 810 561 0 cable
10-4,0 (90) 4000 1430 150 310 810 562 0 • Chain box
10-5,0 5000 1430 150 355 810 563 0 • See page 43 for technical data for hoist
Detailed dimensions on request.

WK1 mobile pillar jib crane

No foundation or anchorage required, this jib crane can be used


wherever it may be needed.

Advantages
• Ready for use right away wherever it is needed
(simple extension lead)
• Can be transported by bridge crane, fork-lift truck or trolley
• Ideal for use in rented buildings (no damage to floor)
• Extremely stable

Technical features
• Slewing range: with rigid jib 270°, with articulated jib 310°
• Designed in compliance with DIN 15018, 15019, 4132
• Classification: hoisting class H2, stress group B2
(B3 with vH 12 m/min)
• Paint: crane RAL 7043 (traffic grey), jib RAL 3003 (ruby red) with
warning stripes
• Complete basic electrical equipment Safe work- Model L GH Fill Crane Item
• Complete documentation including crane test logbook ing load weight weight* No.
[kg] WK 1 ... [mm] [kg] [kg]
• User-friendly with easy-running trolley and jib
100 100-4,715 4715 3635 2850 685 810 824 0
• Belt brake prevents jib after-running under load 160 160-4,065 4065 677 810 825 0
• Many options adapted to users’ requirements 200 200-3,665 3665 660 810 826 0
• Robust, maintenance-free and extremely safe design 250 250-3,215 3215 650 810 827 0
320 320-2,600 2600 640 810 828 0
400 400-2,215 2215 625 810 829 0
500 500-1,750 1750 615 810 830 0
Fill weight 2,850 kg for foundation pillar 810 831 0
STAHLplus Info _ You will find matching hoists on Trolley for WK 1 ... 810 832 0
page 43 ff. Other mobile crane designs for low Prices without hoist and erection. For this crane disposable transport package is required
for which we will charge you EUR 105.00.
01_08EN.FM

S.W.L.s (lighter and lower base requirement) Off-standard heights and articulated jib on request.
available on request. * without hoist, without fill weight.

16
WK3 mobile pillar jib crane

No foundation or anchorage required, this jib crane with integrated


counterweight can be used wherever it may be needed.

Advantages
• Ready for use right away wherever it is needed
(simple extension lead)
• Can be transported by bridge crane, fork-lift truck or trolley
• Ideal for use in rented buildings (no damage to floor)
• Extremely stable

Technical features
• Slewing range: 360°
• Designed in compliance with DIN 15018, 15019, 4132
• Classification: hoisting class H2, stress group B2
(B3 with vH 12 m/min)
• Paint: crane RAL 7043 (traffic grey), jib RAL 3003 (ruby red) with
warning stripes
• Complete basic electrical equipment
• Complete documentation including crane test logbook
• User-friendly with extremely easy-running trolley and jib
• Belt brake prevents jib after-running under load
• Many options adapted to users’ requirements
• Trolley with steel wheels with Vulcolan coating
• Robust, maintenance-free and extremely safe design

Rotary cranes for sewage farms available on request.

STAHLplus Info _
Jib cranes and WK 1 mobile jib cranes with
articulated jib (mobile design also available)
on request.

Safe working load Model L GH Crane Item


with counterweight weight* No.
[kg] WK 3 ... [mm] [kg]
200 200-5,500 4500 3600 1200 810 833 0
320 320-4,000 4000 1185 810 834 0
400 400-3,600 3600 1160 810 835 0
500 500-3,100 3100 1150 810 836 0
600 600-2,750 2750 1140 810 837 0
800 800-2,200 2200 1125 810 838 0
1,000 1000-1,750 1750 1120 810 839 0
Fill weight 2,850 kg for foundation pillar 810 831 0
Trolley for WK 3 ... 810 840 0
Prices for mobile crane incl. counterweight, without hoist and erection.
For this crane disposable transport package is required for which we will charge you
EUR 105.00.
Prices for mobile crane without counterweight on request. In this case the safe working
load is halved.
Off-standard heights on request.
* without hoist, without fill weight.

STAHLplus Info _ You will find suitable hoists on


page 43 ff.
01_08EN.FM

17
Crane technology

STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Off-standard jib cranes

In this catalogue, we show you a selection of our wide range of


jib cranes. Apart from these, we can offer you jib cranes with wire rope
hoists for higher safe working loads and jib cranes for particular
applications and requirements.

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Fig. 1:
Pillar jib crane for loading and unloading repair ships,
S.W.L. of 5,000 kg with a free jib length of 16.5 m.
Equipped with an inside-mounted slewing gear and a
wire rope hoist from STAHL CraneSystems it defies
wind and weather outdoors. Convenient operation both
from the land and from the ship by radio remote control.

Fig. 2:
Boat crane with counterweight, S.W.L. 70,000 kg,
jib length 7.0 m

Fig. 3:
Maintenance crane as articulated crane in off-standard
design

Fig. 4:
Boat crane on Brombach Lake

Fig. 5:
Boat crane at Rammelmayr’s yacht wharf
01_08EN.FM

Fig. 5

18
Fax enquiry for jib cranes Simply copy - fill in - fax

Were you not able to find the jib crane you require in this standard range?
No problem - we can still help you!

Please photocopy this page and fill in the required data and dimensions, then fax it to us.

We’ll be pleased to advise you and send you a quotation immediate

Wall mounted jib cranes g g

Please tick
basic type ......kg
desired

......kg
180°
e

C
e
a
180°

hH
0
C
hH

a
0

c0780v06

c0780v05

Pillar jib cranes d d


......kg

......kg

a
b
b

C
~270°

hH
0
C
hH

~270°

c0779v06 c0779v07

Jib crane Hoist


................................... [kg] Safe workingn load … Chain hoist with push trolley
hH............................ [mm] Hook position … Chain hoist with electric trolley
a .............................. [mm] Jib length/distance from joint for articulated jib
Operating conditions
b .............................. [mm] Headroom
… Indoor use
c .............................. [mm] Bottom edge of crane girder
..................................... °C Ambient temperature
d .............................. [mm] Length
................................V, Hz Supply voltage, frequency
… round / … square ... Floor plate
… Wall bracket
… Bracket on supporting pillar Other

................................. [mm] Wall thickness/pillar dims./I beam type ..............................................................................................................................

… Anchor plate ..............................................................................................................................

................................. [mm] Floor thickness/concrete quality (e.g. B25) ..............................................................................................................................

… I require a consultation Company/name/customer No...................................................................................................................................................................

… I require a quotation Street/P.O. Box ............................................................................................................................................................................................

Post code/town...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Contact person............................................................................................................................................................................................

Department/job title ...................................................................................................................................................................................


01_08EN.FM

Telephone ..................................................................................... Fax........................................................................................................

19
Crane technology

New
KTlight

simple, light, fast

Thanks to its low deadweight and high degree of accuracy in manu- STAHL CraneSystems offers you
facturing processes, the new aluminium light crane system KTlight the complete range for overhead
from STAHL CraneSystems guarantees optimum free running in compa- material handling in the lower to
rison with classic steel suspension crane profiles. medium S.W.L. range up to
KTlight thus ranks among the most successful ideas in lifting and con- 2,500 kg.
veying technology.
Prices of the crane systems on
The deadweight is up to 50% lower compared with conventional light request.
crane systems. The crane system can thus also be used in buildings
with ceilings or upper structures which cannot support heavy loads.

The base element is a closed, dust-insensitive runway profile that is


available in three different sizes. This permits individual solutions up to
2,500 kg S.W.L. to be implemented.
The individual elements are both practical and cost-effective and can
be combined and used exactly as required. The modular system is
designed to permit simple pin and bolt assembly on site.

Powerful chain hoists from STAHL CraneSystems or complex handling


equipment from ACS complement your KTlight small crane system per-
fectly, safely and economically.

AL06 profile AL10 profile AL14 profile

EB suspended monorail

• Free-running _ precise manufacturing processes guarantee low


rolling resistance over the whole length of the runway
• Quiet _ shock-free travel characteristics and perfectly smooth-
running thanks to high-quality travel unit solutions
• Modern _ visually attractive and intelligent profile geometry with
all-purpose system slots
• Innovative _ minimum deadweight combined with max. flexural rigidity
• Modular _ choice of various power supply systems
• Durable _ non-corrosive thanks to anodised surface
• Compact _ raised designs for space-saving solutions

Safe work- 63 80 125 250 320 500 630 1,000 1,250 1,600 2,000
ing load [kg]
Profile type Max. suspension spacing [mm]
AL06 6250 5750 4850 3600 3200 - - - - - -
AL10 10000 9550 8500 6650 6000 4950 4450 3550 3200 2850 2550
AL14 10000 10000 10000 8450 7700 6450 5850 4700 4250 3800 3400

Customer-specific solutions in the motor and


aviation industry with the aluminium light
crane system

STAHLplus Info _ We will


find a solution for your indi-
vidual specifications too.
Please enquire!
01_08EN.FM

Cockpit assembly in the motor industry Safe handling of aircraft engine shells by
means of suction lifter
20
EH single girder suspension crane

• High capacity _ designed for loads of up to


2,000 kg
• Ergonomic _ easy to move by hand
• Safe _ negligible load swing as the trolley's
centre of gravity automatically finds the
correct hoisting position
• Practical _ suspension spacings of up to
10 m with a max. load of 125 kg permit it to
be mounted on existing building trusses and
save on auxiliary structures

S.W.L. [kg] 63 80 125 250 320 500 630 1,000 1,250 1,600 2,000
Profile type Max. suspended clearance [mm]
AL06 6250 5750 4850 3600 3200 - - - - - -
AL10 10000 9550 8500 6650 6000 4950 4450 3550 3200 2850 2550
AL14 10000 10000 10000 8450 7700 6450 5850 4700 4250 3800 3400
STAHLplus Info _ You will
find suitable hoists on page
43 ff.
Raised single and double gir-
der suspension crane
designs available on request.

ZH double girder suspension crane

• High capacity _ designed for loads up to


2,500 kg, spans over 10 m are possible
• Ideal _ utilisation of the full height of lift as
the hoist is suspended between the bridge
girders
• Safe _ negligible load swing as the trolley's
centre of gravity automatically finds the
correct hoisting position

S.W.L. [kg] 63 80 125 250 320 500 630 1,000 1,250 1,600 2,000
Profile type Max. suspended clearance [mm]
AL06 6550 6050 5100 3800 3350 - - - - - -
AL10 10000 10000 8950 7000 6300 5200 4650 3750 3350 3000 2700
AL14 10000 10000 10000 8850 8100 6750 6150 4950 4450 4000 3550

Examples of off-standard solutions


01_08EN.FM

Short headroom double girder suspension crane Double girder suspension crane with triple runway

21
Crane technology

KT 2000

versatile, automation-friendly, cost-effective

STAHL CraneSystems’ KT 2000 is a small crane


system that will hold its own indefinitely
whatever your requirements and your growth.
This system lifts and transports loads up to
2,000 kg particularly easily and economically.
Whether overhead monorails for linear
transport or suspension cranes for wide-
ranging overhead transportation are needed,
this modular system makes anything possible,
right up to complex automated material flow
solutions.

• Versatile _ up-to-the-minute technology,


top quality in a modular system for
application-oriented flexibility with S.W.L.s
up to 2,000 kg
• Automation-friendly _ all material flow
applications can without exception be
automated and extended
• Cost-effective _ fast project planning,
speedy delivery, assembly and commission-
ing, extremely maintenance-friendly,
modular, flexible, and always extendable

STAHLplus Info _ You will


find suitable hoists on page
43 ff.

Safe working Track length Max. suspended


load clearance *
[kg] [mm] [mm]
125 as required 8750
250 8750
500 6950
1,000 4300
1,250 3850
1,600 1600
2,000 750
* Multiple section girders

KT 2000

Tractor assembly line


Direction of motion
ha649en


Circular monorail runway with a total length of 93 m
in a radiator assembly line.
The loads of 250 kg are lifted synchronously at two
points in trolleys with STD 10 electric chain hoists. Example:
Monorail runway for 250 kg S.W.L., runway length 14000 mm, suspended on I girder, with
electric chain hoist, hoisting speed 2/8 m/min, height of lift 3 m and push trolley. Festoon power
supply.

Price on request
01_08EN.FM

22
KT-EH suspension cranes

Single and double girder suspension cranes


with or without electric drives are particularly
suitable for moving loads above floor level
over wide areas. The available room height
can be utilised to the full thanks to the particu-
larly low headroom of our system.

Safe Crane Crane runway


working Max. crane Length Max. suspend-
load girder length ed clearance*
[kg] [mm] [mm]
125 11000 as required 8750
250 10000 8200
500 6550 6150
1,000 4200 4150
* Multiple section girder

STAHLplus Info _ Raised Single girder suspension crane loading a panel saw in a joinery shop.
single and double girder
suspension cranes are
available on request.

KT-ZH double girder suspension crane

The double girder construction permits the


hoist to be raised up between the crane gir-
ders. Thus the available room height can be
utilised even more efficiently than with single
girder suspension cranes.

Safe Crane Crane runway


working Max. crane Length Max. suspend-
load girder length ed clearance*
[kg] [mm] [mm]
500 11000 as required 5950
1,000 8800 4100
1,250 7500 3500
1,600 6200 1000
2,000 5300 750
* Multiple section girder Double girder suspension crane with electric drive for lifting, cross and long travel, in a toolmaker’s shop.

Example: Example:
Single girder suspension crane for 500 kg S.W.L., push design, crane Double girder suspension crane for 1,250 kg S.W.L. with electric drive,
girder length 6000 mm, crane runway 12000 mm long, suspended on crane girder length 7000 mm, crane runway 15000 mm long, suspended
I girder, with electric chain hoist, hoisting speed 1/4 m/min, height of lift on I girder, with electric chain hoist, hoisting speed 1/4 m/min, height of
3 m and push trolley. Festoon power supply. lift 3 m and electric trolley. Cross and long travel both 2-speed at a ratio
of 1:4. Festoon power supply.
01_08EN.FM

Price on request Price on request


23
Crane technology

Fax enquiry for light crane systems Please quote me the following KT 2000 system without obligation:

Simply copy - fill in - fax Type of system:


… Monorail runway … Single girder suspension crane … Double girder suspension crane
Normally, a monorail conveyor or a
suspension crane cannot simply be ordered
from the catalogue with an order number.
There are some points that have to be taken
into consideration when selecting the parts,
as experts in this field we will be pleased to do
this on your behalf.

Please fax us some data so that we can gain a


rough idea of what you expect from your Technical data:
system.
Safe working load ............................................ kg; Runway length ............................................... mm
Our specialist in your area will advise you Crane span* ...................................................... mm; Crane girder length........................................ mm
without obligation and help you find the Dimension from ground to underside suspension structure ......................................................... mm
optimum solution on site. You will incur neither
advance costs nor any obligation!
Suspension structure on:
We will then send you a non-binding quotation … Profile girder … Concrete ceiling … Concrete truss … Wooden truss/joist
fully meeting your expectations as regards
technical features and price!

Dimensions b:.......................................... b1:........................................h: ............................................. mm


Concrete truss: … A, … B, … C, spacing between trusses/girders: ............................. mm

Hoist:
Electric chain hoist with … 1 or … 2 hoisting speeds: .............................................................m/min
Height of lift .................................m

Travelling speeds:
Trolley: ........................................... … manual; … electrically powered, v = ..........................m/min
Crane: ............................................ … manual; … electrically powered, v = ..........................m/min

Power supply:
Trolley: ........................................... … festoon cable with cable trolleys; … conductor line
Crane: ............................................ … festoon cable with cable trolleys; … conductor line

Voltage:
* Dimension centre to centre runway rails (span) Operating voltage ........................V, ....................... Hz, Control voltage .................................. VAC

Notes / sketch: enclosed

Name/customer No.
................................................................................................................................
Company
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Street/P.O. Box
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post code/town
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contact person
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Department/job title
01_08EN.FM

.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telephone Fax
.................................................................................................................................................................................................

24
Radio remote controls for cranes

Increasingly the control pendants commonly used for floor-controlled cranes are being replaced by radio remote controls. The advantages of a
radio remote control are not merely its increased ease of operation, but also in improved performance and increased safety of the crane system.
Please note: these radio remote control systems are only possible in conjunction with a contactor control for the hoist or crane.

There is a choice of three ergonomic radio transmitters: STAHLplus Info _ You will find information on
• "quadrix" compact transmitter with belt clip for STAHL CraneSystems’ new radio crane on page 5, or ask
single hand operation for detailed literature. Other radio systems on a radio crane
• "micron 6" pushbutton transmitter with graphic display (e.g. multi-receiver concept) and
• "technos" joystick transmitter for maximum convenience feedback systems are available.
even in harsh conditions
The radio remote control systems are adapted to your wishes and
requirements. Let us know your application, we will work out a detailed
"FSE 736 radiobus"
quotation.
receiver
The components shown below will give you a rough idea of the possibili-
The receiver for hoist
ties.
applications and other
stationary or mobile
applications in industry.
"FSE 516" receiver "FSE 508" receiver
• Commands: 36 digital Ideally suitable for small Standard receiver,
or 28 digital + hoists. ideal for chain hoists,
8 analog monorails or as part of a
• Commands: 16 digital + multi-receiver concept.
• Output: relay 4 A /
1 analog + infrared
250 VAC
relay
• HF quality: -115 dBm /
• Output: relay 4 A /
BER = 10 -2
250 VAC • Commands: 8 (digital)
• Receiving aerial:
• H quality: -115 dBm / • Output: relay 4 A / 250 VAC
external
BER = 10 -2 • HF quality: -95 dBm / BER = 10 -2
• Power supply: 42-115, 100-240 VAC
• Receiving aerial: internal • Receiving aerial: internal
• Dimensions: approx. 270x160x115 mm
• Power supply: 42-240 VAC • Plastic case of 6PA 45/1 GF30
(LxWxD)
• Dimensions: approx. 269x202x60 mm (fibreglass reinforced), standard shade:
• Operating temperature: -25°C to +70°C
(LxWxD) with plastic case orange, IP 65 protection
• Plastic or aluminium case,
• Operating temperature: -25°C to +70°C • Power supply: 42-240 VAC
type of protection IP 65
• Plastic or aluminium case, • Weight approx. 1000 g
• Weight approx. 3500 g
type of protection IP 65 • Dimensions: approx. 145x145x72 mm
• Various serial and analog interfaces,
• Weight approx. 1300 g or 3500 kg (LxWxD)
CAN-Bus and Profibus-DP
• CAN-Bus interface • Operating temperature: -25°C to +70°C

Matching transmitters: Matching transmitters: Matching transmitters:


micron 6, technos micron 6, quadrix, technos quadrix, technos (for MRC only)

"micron 6" pushbutton "quadrix" compact "technos"


transmitter transmitter joystick
The ideal radio control transmitter
• Up to 22 commands (digi- transmitter for chain hoists, The all-
tal) + emergency stop suspended monorails and round
• Transmission frequency: crane systems, suitable for
multi-receiver concept (MRC). talent for
400-475; 868-928 MHz highly
• Internal rechargeable • Up to 8 commands (digital) demanding industrial use. Ergonomically
NiMH battery, 3.6 V / + emergency stop designed for convenience and always ready
2100 mAh • Transmission frequency: at hand in hip or shoulder holster.
• Operating time approx. 400-475; 868-928 MHz • Commands: up to 32 (digital) or up to 24
12 h/100% DC • Rechargeable NiMH (digital) + 8 (proportional) + emergency stop
• Case in ABS plastic, battery, 3,6 V / 650 mAh • Transmission frequency: 400-475; 868-928 MHz
impact resistant, standard • Operating time ap. 16 h/100% DC • Rechargeable NiMH battery FuB 05 AA,
shade orange, IP 65 protection • Plastic case, type of protection IP 65 6 V / 600 mAh
• Weight approx. 450 g • Weight approx. 330 g (incl. battery) • Operating time approx. 12 h/100% DC
• Dimensions: approx. 240x68x58 mm • Dimensions: approx. 180x65x43 mm • Plastic case, type of protection IP 65
(LxWxD) (LxWxD) • Weight approx. 1500 g (incl. battery)
• Operating temperature: -20°C to +70°C • Operating temperature: -25°C to +70°C • Dimensions: approx. 236x140x165 mm (LxWxD)
01_08EN.FM

• Operating temperature: -20°C to +70°C

25
Crane technology

STH 1 and STH 6 control pendants for contactor control

The STH 1 is a robust control pendant for hoists and cranes. The STH 6 is a particularly compact
control pendant if only one direction of motion needs to be controlled. The switch elements are
two-step. Single-step control pendants and other switching functions on request.
Model Item No. Price

op. hoist limit switch


With test switch for

With horn switch


without

No. of wires
control
cable

required
[kg]
x STH 1202-021 8 17 390 71 21 9
x x STH 1206-021 9 17 390 70 21 9
0.8
x x STH 1215-021 9 17 390 69 21 9
STH 1

x x x STH 1216-021 10 17 390 68 21 9


x STH 1302-022 11 17 390 55 21 9
x x STH 1306-022 12 17 390 54 21 9
1.1
x x STH 1315-022 12 17 390 53 21 9
x x x STH 1316-022 13 17 390 52 21 9
STH 6

x STH 6102-009 5 0.4 17 390 84 21 9 STH 12..- STH 13..- STH 6...

Technical data
Rated operating data ~AC-15: A600 =DC-13: Q600 Switch elements
Ue = 600 V, ie = 1.2 A Ue = 600 V, ie = 0.1 A
Ue = 240 V, ie = 3 A Ue = 250 V, ie = 0.27 A =
Conventional thermal current I the 10 A
Rated insulation voltage Ui 600 V; pollution degree 3 in acc. with IEC 947-1
Contact operation: Emergency stop button: positive opening =
other: "n.c." or "n.o." without spring action
=
Connection: min. 1x 0.5 mm²; max. 1x 2.5 mm² or 2x 1.5 mm²
Short-circuit protection: fuse max. 10 A STH 1... STH 6...
Ø of connection cable STH1: 8...26 mm; STH6: 7...15 mm
Type of protection in acc. with IEC 529 IP 65 Symbols for switch elements
Approvals UL, CSA
Case Polypropylene RAL 3000 = Emergency stop
Operating temperature Operation: -25°...+70° C; storage: -40°...+70° C
Applied standards IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1, IEC 337-1, VDE 0660-200, NF C 63-146 = 2 speeds

STH 2 control pendant for direct control Switch elements

Robust control pendant for direct control without contactors of hoist


and travel motions of chain hoists up to a motor output of 1.6 kW. The =
switch elements are two-step. Single-step control pendants and other
switching functions on request.
Model Item No. Price
No. of wires
required

without
control =
[kg] cable
x STH 2109-08 8 0.5 17 390 48 21 9
x STH 2209-00 12 1.6 17 390 46 21 9

Technical data
Rated operating data
Category of use in acc. with IEC 947-3, annexe A AC 3, AC 4; 1.6 kW - 240 V; 1.6 kW - 400 V
Conventional thermal current I the 12 A
Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V; pollution degree 3 in acc. with IEC 947-1
Contact operation: with spring action
Connection: 1x 2.5 mm² oder 2x 1.5 mm²
Short-circuit protection: fuse max. 10 A
Ø of connection cable 10...22 mm
Type of protection in acc. with IEC 529 IP 65
Case Fibreglass-reinforced polyester, RAL 3000
Operating temperature Operation: -25°...+70° C
Storage: -40°...+70° C
Applied standards IEC 947-3, EN 60947-3, VDE 0660-107, NF C 63-130 STH 21... STH 22...
01_08EN.FM

Control cable
Surcharge per metre control cable, wired, incl. strain relief and STAHL plug on request.

26
KPK gantry cranes

KPK gantry cranes are suitable for use indoors and outdoors in combi-
nation with a manual or electric hoist. They are easy to move on flat, firm
ground. The clear width LB can be variably adjusted by means of the clamp
connection between supports and girder. The crane is easy to dismantle.
Technical features
• Steered wheels equipped with 4-fold direction locks
• Wheel brakes fitted on 2 wheels
• Up to 1,000 kg safe working load: wheel Ø 200 mm with Vulkolan coating
• Above 1,000 kg safe working load: wheel Ø 250 mm with polyamide wheels
• Can also be moved under load on flat, firm surfaces
• Painted orange, RAL 2000
• Scope of supply: crane with crane test book with pre-acceptance
and in-process inspection, operating instructions, without hoist
• Accessories: hoist, electric/manual, power supply on request
Safe work- Model L GH LH LB R Flange Weight Item
ing load width No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 KPK 0,5-2,5 3535 2662 2500 3000 1500 73 205 810 326 0
KPK 0,5-3,0 3535 3162 3000 3000 1500 73 225 810 327 0
KPK 0,5-3,5 4535 3682 3500 4000 2000 82 250 810 328 0
1,000 KPK 1,0-2,5 3535 2702 2500 3000 1500 91 285 810 329 0
KPK 1,0-3,0 3535 3202 3000 3000 1500 91 310 810 330 0
KPK 1,0-3,5 4535 3722 3500 4000 2000 100 350 810 331 0
2,000 KPK 2,0-3,0 3650 3242 3000 3000 1500 110 365 810 332 0
KPK 2,0-3,5 3650 3742 3500 3000 2000 110 410 810 335 0
KPK 2,0-4,0 4650 4262 4000 4000 2000 120 450 810 336 0
3,200 KPK 3,2-3,0 3650 3292 3000 3000 1500 135 440 810 337 0
KPK 3,2-3,5 3650 3792 3500 3000 2000 135 550 810 338 0
KPK 3,2-4,0 4650 4322 4000 4000 2000 150 600 810 339 0
Off-standard versions: other heights and widths, height adjustment with/without rack-and-pinion
jacks, other wheels, support spindle on request. STAHLplus Info _ You will
find suitable hoists on
page 50 ff.
V gantry cranes

V gantry cranes are suitable for use indoors and outdoors together
with a manual or electric hoist. The pin connection ensures that the
cranes are quick and easy to assemble. They are easy to move on flat,
firm ground.
Technical features
• Steered wheels equipped with 4-fold direction locks
• Wheel brakes fitted on 2 wheels
• With steel wheels as standard,
rubber wheels, ratchet drive against surcharge
• Can traverse under load
• Painted orange, RAL 2000
• Scope of supply: crane with crane test book with pre-acceptance
and in-process inspection, operating instructions, without hoist
Safe work- Model L GH LH R S Beam Weight
ing load PE
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 V-103 3000 4000 3785 2100 2090 200 500
V-104 4000 3785 3090 200 530
V-105 5000 3785 4090 200 580
V-106 6000 3765 5090 220 650
2,000 V-204 4000 5000 4740 2600 3090 240 630
V-205 5000 4710 4090 270 700
V-206 6000 4710 5090 270 780
V-207 7000 4680 6090 300 900
3,200 V-304 4000 5000 4680 2600 3100 300 750
V-305 5000 4680 4100 300 850
V-306 6000 4650 5080 330 950
V-307 7000 4620 6080 360 1100
5,000 V-505 5000 5000 4615 2600 4100 360 1000
V-506 6000 4575 5090 400 1100
V-507 7000 4525 6090 450 1180
01_08EN.FM

V-508 8000 4525 7090 450 1300


Please note: A crane acceptance test is necessary from 1,000 kg S.W.L.

27
Crane technology

Aluminium gantry cranes

They are available in many different versions.


Please enquire separately for suitable accessories
and other designs!

Technical features
• The crane to take along with you
• Easy to transport
• Height adjustable
• Only plug connections, no bolt connections
• Quick to erect
• Low deadweight
• For lifting in inaccessible places

The scope of supply comprises: 2 trestles, 1 aluminium profile girder,


1 lockable push trolley, without hoist (see page 50 ff).

STAHLplus Info _ Subject to technical and


dimensional modifications to the gantry cranes
(pages 27-29).

Version Safe work- L a c Weight Item


ing load No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
With hinged 1,000 4000 1360-2360 1295 95 810 859 0
trestles 1750-3000 1743 105 810 354 0
2325-4025 2238 166 810 352 0
1,500 4000 1360-2360 1295 102 810 860 0
1750-3000 1743 126 810 361 0
2325-4025 2238 172 810 358 0

Version Safe work- L a c Weight Item


ing load No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
With hinged 1,000 4000 1735-2735 1295 177 810 571 0
trestles 6000 1735-2735 1295 225 810 572 0
and 1,000 4000 2124-3374 1743 187 810 861 0
double girder 6000 2124-3374 1743 235 810 862 0
1,000 4000 2709-4409 2238 237 810 573 0
6000 2709-4409 2238 285 810 574 0
2,000 4000 2227-3477 1752 225 810 863 0
6000 2227-3477 1752 273 810 864 0
3,000 4000 2645-3795 2222 267 810 865 0
6000 2645-3795 2222 351 810 866 0

Accessory: movable trestles With heavy-duty polyurethane


tread
Enables the unloaded gantry crane to be
For moving the unloaded crane
moved after erection. indoors.

The "forks" on the feet allow the trestles to For gantry Item
remain in place during erection and dismant- crane No.
All stationary 810 575 0
ling. cranes
When under load, the spring-loaded casters
are pushed in. The trestles then rest directly With heavy-duty polyurethane
on the feet. foam tyres

For moving the unloaded crane


The feet can be individually height-adjusted. indoors and outdoors.

1 set movable trestles = 4 "forks" For gantry Item


crane No.
01_08EN.FM

All stationary 810 576 0


cranes

28
Version Safe work- L a c Weight Item
ing load No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
Can be moved 1,000 4000 1720-2120 1504 166 810 847 0
under load 2160-3010 2012 192 810 848 0
with hinged 2490-3790 2328 214 810 849 0
trestles 1,500 4000 1720-2120 1504 172 810 850 0
2160-3010 2012 198 810 851 0
2490-3790 2328 220 810 852 0

STAHLplus Info _ You will


find suitable hoists on page
50 ff.

Version Safe work- L a c Weight Item


ing load No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
Can be moved 1,000 4000 2100-2500 1504 237 810 565 0
under load 6000 2100-2500 1504 285 810 566 0
with double 1,000 4000 2540-3390 2012 263 810 567 0
girder and 6000 2540-3390 2012 311 810 568 0
hinged trestles 1,000 4000 2875-4175 2328 285 810 569 0
6000 2875-4175 2328 333 810 570 0
1,500 4000 2100-2500 1504 237 810 868 0
6000 2100-2500 1504 285 810 853 0
8000 2100-2500 1504 321 810 856 0
1,500 4000 2540-3390 2012 263 810 869 0
6000 2540-3390 2012 311 810 854 0
8000 2540-3390 2012 347 810 857 0
1,500 4000 2875-4175 2328 285 810 870 0
6000 2875-4175 2328 333 810 855 0
8000 2875-4175 2328 369 810 858 0

Accessory: Cables/power supply Double girder Single girder


Power supply with Power supply with
The aluminium gantry crane is supplied ready energy chain PUR helical con-
for connection and use. ductor
• Three-phase AC current 400 V/16 A, 50 Hz
• Plug connection for electric chain hoist,
type of protection IP 66
• All electrical components are suitable for
indoor and outdoor use under normal
operating conditions
Price on request.

Off-standard aluminium cranes and accessories

Here is a small cross-section of what we can offer. Please enquire!


01_08EN.FM

Off-standard aluminium gantry crane for use in maintenance work in pumping stations, e.g. Off-standard aluminium gantry crane, can be moved under load, with four independently
sewage farms. extendable and retractable feet. Particuarlly suitable for restricted spaces.

29
Crane technology

Aluminium derrick

Serves to lift loads in particular in places


which are inaccessible for conventional
equipment.
The aluminium derrick can be folded up
(2000 mm long).
• Enormous adjusting range thanks to
telescopic supports
• Stability guaranteed
• Non-slip rubber-metal discs on the
bottom of the adjustable supports
Safe working load Weight Item
[kg] [kg] No.
Standard
1,000 54 810 369 0
Aluminium derrick With manual winch
with manual winch 1,000 74 810 867 0 STAHLplus Info _ You will find
suitable hoists on page 50 ff.

Derrick type P/PL for passenger


Aluminium derrick type D transport available on request.

The aluminium derrick type D is collapsible and can easily be transported when folded up.
It is equipped with a rotating suspension ring for attaching a hoist. The supports consist of
aluminium sections.

Standard design: collapsible, with pointed tips, without hoist.


Other designs on request.
Accessories: On request, the derrick can be equipped with rubber discs and/or chain guards
instead of pointed tips. (Price on request).

Safe working Model L H *2 Spread Weight Item


load min./max. min./max. min./max. No.
*2
[kg] [mm] [kg]
250 D-250 1180/1880 940/1580 950/1500 10 810 422 0
500 D-500 1500/2500 1150/2050 1200/1950 17 810 423 0
500 D-500/EN795*1 1500/2500 1150/2050 1200/1950 17 810 424 0
1,000 D-1000 1780/3000 1380/2540 1650/2350 27 810 425 0
*1 Approval for transport of persons up to 150 kg in acc. with EN 795. Equipped with rubber discs and chain guards.
*2 At max. spread (25°).

Aluminium derrick type DW Foot designs


for D und DW
The aluminium derrick type DW is equipped
with a manual winch with load pressure brake Standard with pointed tip
which holds the load securely in any position.
The supports consist of aluminium sections.
with rubber disc and chain
Standard design: collapsible, with pointed guard
tips, with manual rope winch and load hook.
Other designs on request.
Accessories: On request the derrick can be
equipped with rubber discs and/or chain with pointed tip and chain
guards instead of pointed tips. guard
(Price on request).

Safe working Model L H *2 Spread Overall Weight Item


load min./max. min./max. min./max. lifting No.
*2 height
[kg] [mm] [m] [kg]
200 DW-200 1180/1880 940/1580 950/1500 5 20 810 426 0
01_08EN.FM

500 DW-500 2100/2500 1700/2100 1500/2000 5 35 810 427 0


1,000 DW-1000 2400/3000 1900/2400 1900/2500 7 45 810 428 0
*2 At max. spread (25°).

30
WAMPFLER festoon power supply

Item
1 C-rail 7 Track support bracket
The festoon system is supplied complete. 2 End stop 8 Towing arm
It is suspended from the beam by means of 3 Cable trolley 9 End clamp
support arms and girder clips. 4 Collector trolley 10 Cable
5 630 mm support arm 11 Terminal box
+2 girder clips 12 Rising mains (by others)
6 Rail coupler 13 Main isolator
Technical features
• C-rail section, Sendzimir-galvanised
• Cable loop: 0.8 m Item
No.
• 1 PVC flat cable 4x2.5 mm²
Basic package 810 070 0
• Max. permissible travelling speed 100 m/min Items 2, 4, 8, 9, 11, 13
• Max. suspended clearance 1600 mm Length-dependent components (price per metre) 810 070 9
• Cable length = 1.1 x rail length + 3 m installation allowance Items 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 10
• 630 mm support arm with girder clips (standard)

VAHLE plastic conductor line power supply

Item
The 4-pole "KBSL 4/40" plastic enclosed 1 End cap 6 600 mm support arm
conductor line is supplied complete with 2 40 A enclosed conductor line +2 girder clips
mounting and connection accessories, 3 Rail holder 7 End feed
4 40 A conductor trolley 8 Rising mains (by others)
support arms, conductor trolley and towing incl. 1 towing arm 9 Main isolator
arm. 5 Rail coupler

Technical features
• Rated current 40 A, 100% DC Item
• Max. voltage 600 V, 50 Hz No.
• Number of poles: 4 (3-phase + PE) Basic package 810 384 0
Items 1, 4, 7, 9
• Max. travelling speed 100 m/min
Length-dependent components (price per metre) 810 384 9
• Max. suspended clearance 2000 mm Items 2, 3, 5, 6
• 600 mm support arm with girder clips (standard)
01_08EN.FM

• Weight: 2 kg/m
• Standards: DIN EN 60204 - 32

31
Crane technology

T80 radio remote control for chain hoists Technical features


• High standard of safety thanks to micropro-
The economical small control for optimised cessor technology and 4 bit addressing with
operating cycles ensuring a high standard of over 16 million possibilities. Unintentional
safety. activation is thus reliably prevented
• Active EMERGENCY STOP system in
T80 radio remote controls offer an economical compliance with EN 945-1 CAT. 3 with
and convenient solution, not just in 2 EMERGENCY STOP relays
combination with hoists, conveyor belts, crabs • Transmitter disable time programmable 0-12 min.
and pumps. • Transmitter for 2 receivers available on
request. Receivers can be controlled inde-
pendently of one another or simultaneously
In this catalogue we also offer you a (tandem operation)
mounting kit for fitting the control to • Can be used with contactor control only
STAHL CraneSystems chain hoists. • Display for battery charge
N.B.: The battery integrated into the portable
transmitter must be recharged as necessary.
No separate replacement battery is available.

General system data Model Item


No.
Frequency 433-434 MHz (69 channels) Radio system
Range max. 50 / 200 m (Transmitter + Receiver)
Operating temperature approx. -20° C ... +70° C 12/24 V: T80S-06A-10B-002 810 579 0
Aerial integrated 48 V: T80S-06C-10B-002 810 580 0
230 V T80S-06B-10B-002 810 581 0
Transmitter TX1
Protection IP 54 Mounting set 810 403 0
Dimensions 160 x 70 x 35 mm (LxWxH)
Transmitter T80TX-MX-10B 810 577 0
Weight 270 g
10 buttons (6 function relays,
Power supply battery, approx. 30h / 100% DC
2 safety relayss)
Receiver RX1 Receiver T80RX-MQ-06B * 810 578 0
Protection IP 55 Case with 10-pole standard
Dimensions 145 x 140 x 55 mm (LxWxH) plug, alternating/locking
Weight 650 g function 2x1
Power supply 24/48/115/230 VAC
* Please state control voltage when ordering receiver!

STAHL CraneSystems electric chain hoist complete with radio remote control

Electric chain hoists from STAHL CraneSystems are the innovative classics in material handling. In combination with a radio remote control they
facilitate your day-to-day work many times over. The operator can move around freely and choose the optimum position as regards visibility and
safety margin. We are thus presenting to you in this catalogue a small selection from our comprehensive chain hoist range - equipped with
T80 radio remote control.
STAHLplus Info _ We will be pleased to send you detailed information
and technical data such as e.g. dimensions. Make use of our informa-
tion service!
Further hoists are to be found on page 43 ff.

Pre-disconnection is obligatory with travel speeds of 16 m/min


(BGV D6).

Safe working load kg 250 500 1,000 1,600 2,500 3,200 5,000
Hoisting speed m/min 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 1/4 0.75/3.2
Number of chain falls 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
Model ST0502-8/2 ST1005-8/2 ST2010-8/2 ST3016-8/2 ST5025-8/2 ST3016-8/2 ST5025-6/1
Output kW 0.4/0.1 0.8/0.2 1.5/0.37 2.3/0.57 3.8/0.9 2.3/0.57 3.0/0.76
Duty cycle % DC 35/15 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20
Switching operations/hour 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240
Travelling speed m/min 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20
Control Contactor control with remote control
Supply voltage, 3~ 380-415 V, 50 Hz
Weights - electric trolley kg 34 59 88 107 166 130 201
Item Nos. / prices
Chain hoist with electric trolley Price on request
and radio remote control,
incl. travel limit switches,
01_08EN.FM

without installation
Subject to technical modifications

32
Buffers with brackets

The buffers with brackets are welded onto the lower flange of the runway.
Depending on the trolley, the buffer can be bolted onto the short or the long side of the bracket.

Item No.

31 240 00 23 0

PA runway endstops

The runway endstops are clamped onto the runway. Drilling and welding is not necessary for
assembly.
Not suitable for trolleys with guide rollers.

Model b l Safe working E max. Trolley Wheel Item No.


load of hoist (crab) Ø
max. max. *2 *1
[mm] [mm] [kg] [Nm] [kg] [mm]
PA 50/200 200 350 3200 200 700 100 01 740 24 27 0
PA 50/300 300 450 to 01 740 25 27 0
PA 50/500 500 650 125 01 740 26 27 0
*1 Max. weight of hoist and trolley including counterweight
*2 E = 0.1415 x mka x v² x a [Nm], mka [t], v [m/min]
a = with travel limit switch: 0.72; a = without travel limit switch: 1.0
v max.: 20 m/min

Uni buffer stop

The Uni buffer stop is clamped onto the runway. No drilling or welding is required for mounting.
Not suitable for trolleys with guide rollers.
For runway girders with parallel flanges only!

Safe Max. permissible Max. permissible Two buffers are required for suspended mono-
working hoist weight approach speed rails. Flange widths possible: 8 - 25 mm.
load of hoist
[kg] [kg] [m/min]
125-2,000 180 28
2,500 225 25 Size Flange Item No.
3,200 225 22 width
4,000 325 20 [mm]
5,000 600 16 1 91 - 150 577 164 0
6,300 600 14 2 160 - 190 577 165 0
8,000 1500 12 3 200 - 220 577 166 0
10,000 1500 10 4 300 577 167 0

Information plates for cranes


Item No.
Hand signals for guidance (DE) 810 397 0
All hand signals important for crane operation for com-
munication between loader and crane operator.
PVC design, 600 x 400 mm

Crane hazard (DE) 810 398 0


Sturdy aluminium design, 200 x 300 mm

Crane main switch (DE) 810 399 0


In compliance with the regulations, designates the main
switch of the crane or electric hoist enabling current to
be disconnected for repairs or inspections.
Sturdy aluminium design, 170 x 70 mm

Crane operating regulations (DE/EN) DE: 810 400 0


Notice from Employers’ Liability Insurance Association as per
§§29-43 of accident prevention regulations "Cranes" (BGV D 6). EN: 810 564 0
01_08EN.FM

Cellophane-covered cardboard, A4 with eyelet for hanging up

33
Crane technology

Other supply ranges STAHL CraneSystems


Maintenance-free suspensions for nearly all light crane systems

This innovative suspension is used in rugged ambient conditions


(foundries) and in the motor industry.
The advantages are: low deadweight, cost-effective from reduction in
maintenance costs, safe and maintenance-free.
Further suspension variants available on request.
Size Used for Item No.
I complete with clamping cheeks 02 751 06 28 0
without clamping cheeks 02 751 07 28 0
II complete with clamping cheeks 02 751 04 28 0
Suspension complete with clamping cheeks Extreme ambient conditions (foundry) without clamping cheeks 02 751 05 28 0

STAHL MOVEit Crane bottom hook block with electri-


cally rotating load hook
Safe, ergonomic load handling device for single 2-sheave crane
hand use with electric chain hoists bottom hook
block similar to
Technical features H227-4 with elec-
• Compatible _ for connecting to ST chain hoists tromechanicallly
• Economical _ can be plugged in fast and driven load hook,
easily, no wiring necessary ready wired, with
• Safe _ the power flux chain-load hook is not terminal box
interrupted. The load chain is led through (without electric
the MOVEit to the load hook. control).

Surcharge when purchasing an ST electric


chain hoist on request. Price on request
Other designs on request.

Handling devices

Customised handling devices are often the


first choice for particular applications. Let us
know your application, we will advise you and
optimise your material flow.

1 Safe handling of aircraft engine shells with suction


grab
2 Rail-guided manipulator with grab
3 Articulated arm manipulator with grab
4 Rail-bound telescopic rigid lifting axle, radio controlled
5 Lifting pillar with articulated arm

1
01_08EN.FM

2 3 4

34
STAHLplus hoists are concentrated
power. Whether electrically or manually
operated – they always allow for
easy lifting, moving and lowering of
loads just as required. The wide S.W.L.
range extending up to 50,000 kg and
the flexible trolleys secure your material
flow on all common beam profiles.

Hoists

35
Hoists

The SH wire rope hoist

Flexible • Universal
five frame sizes with 26 S.W.L. variants
The SH range from STAHL CraneSystems is a world-wide optimum in crane and hoist techno-
logy, compact, powerful and particularly maintenance-friendly. • Flexible
stationary design and trolleys in flexible
Users, crane manufacturers and system manufacturers appreciate the modular system, built up configurations, for cranes and system
on the basis of tried-and-tested, low-maintenance series components. manufacturers
This varied range permits use in individual solutions thanks to the practically unlimited combi-
nations of the modules. • Compact
the 'U' shape results in a short overall length
The SH range from STAHL CraneSystems is available for the S.W.L. range from 500 kg to
25,000kg. • Cost-effective
practically maintenance-free, low wear,
They can be used in stationary version or complete with trolley or crab on standard cranes, long life
off-standard cranes or in system manufacturing.
Naturally the SH wire rope hoist programme is also available in explosion-protected design for • Demanding
use in Zone 1, 2, 21 and 22. high-quality safety components as standard
for increased safety at work

You will find wire rope hoists • Safe


in explosion-protected design available in explosion-protected design in
on page 84 of this catalogue. compliance with ATEX as an option
02_08EN.FM

36
Perfect technology in detail

Stationary - single-grooved drum KE monorail trolley

Use as lifting and towing equip- For monorail runways and single
ment, either stationary or mounted girder cranes.
on trolleys. The trolley headroom is extremely
The rope drum is single-grooved. low, thus long hook paths are
possible in low-ceilinged rooms.

Stationary - double-grooved drum UE monorail trolley

The double-grooved version is For monorail runways and single


available if true vertical lift is girder cranes.
required. The trolley width is extremely low,
thus small clearance dimensions
are possible.

OE double rail crab DKE articulated


trolleys
The extremely compact construc-
tion permits low approach and These trolleys are
headroom dimensions. used on runways with
Various track gauges can be narrow radii of bend.
supplied for all S.W.L. ranges.
02_08EN.FM

37
Hoists

The AS wire rope hoist

Tried and tested • Up-to-date


innovative drive technology in the form of
The AS 7 range from STAHL CraneSystems supplements the SH range in the upper S.W.L. range cylindrical motor with monodisc magnetic
from 25,000 kg to 100,000 kg. brake

This wire rope hoist is used as a stationary lifting or towing device or with crabs on bridge • Flexible
cranes or in systems. outstandingly suited for integration into
material handling systems
The narrow and compact construction is of particular advantage here, the overall width
permits it to be used when space is restricted. • Advantageous
its construction with motor and drum on one
On the AS 7 wire rope hoist, motor, gear and rope drum are lined up behind one another on axis permits it to be used in restricted
a common axis. spaces
This central gear concept permits highperformance and high loads.
• Maintenance-friendly
The AS 7 wire rope hoist programme is available as an option in explosion-protected design in all important elements are easily accessible,
acc. with ATEX for use in Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22. lifetime lubrication of all gear steps in an oil
bath

You will find wire rope hoists • Safe


in explosion-protected design available in explosion-protected design in
on page 84 of this catalogue. compliance with ATEX as an option
02_08EN.FM

38
The SHW 8 winch

Powerful • Flexible
field-proven sub-assemblies from the SH
The main components of the SHW 8 rope winch from STAHL CraneSystems derive from the programme, bolt-on components and plug
reliable SH programme. connections for simple transport and
commissioning
The systematically modular construction of this series permits almost unlimited combinations of
the sub-assemblies to provide individual solutions, and ensures rational production at a high • Powerful
level of quality. drives with different speeds, stepless speed
control and smooth starting characteristics
The SHW 8 winch is designed for safe working loads up to 160,000 kg.
• Versatile
Its extremely compact overall height derives from the special design of the rope drive. extensive special equipment such as
The winch is extremely versatile thanks to its flexible drive technology, its easy-to-use plug additional holding brake, space heater,
connections and extensive special equipment. maintenance platform, large-format load
display, travel limit switches
As with all STAHL CraneSystems hoists, the SHW 8 winch is also available as an option in
explosion-protected design. • Maintenance-friendly
largely maintenance-free, electrical
components easy to replace thanks to plug
You will find wire rope hoists connections
in explosion-protected design
on page 84 of this catalogue. • Safe
available in explosion-protected design in
compliance with ATEX as an option
02_08EN.FM

39
Hoists

SH / AS 7 and SHW 8 winch programme


Model Safe working Standard reeving Reeving for Stationary Double rail Monorail trolley
load up to [kg] true vertical lift crab

OE KE UE DKE
SH 3 3,200 ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗
SH 4 6,300 ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗
2/2, 4/2
SH 5 12,500 1/1, 2/1, 4/1 ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗
SHR 6 16,000 ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ● ●
SH 6 25,000 ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ● ●
2/2, 4/2, 8/2
AS 7 100,000 2/1, 4/1, 6/1, 8/1 ⊗ ⊗ ● ● ●
SHW 8 160,000 - 4/2-1, 8/2-1, 12/2-1 ⊗ ⊗
⊗ Standard
● Option

TDC Twin Dive Concept _ doubly safe and reliable


New hoist for transporting molten metals
New
Cost-effective
• Use of standard components
• Identical construction for operating and
safety brake
• Up to 60% higher safe working load when
not transporting molten metals

Safe
• Brake does not need to be "run free" when
starting the lowering process
• The twin drive concept prevents the load
dropping even if the gear should break
• Two brakes with manual release for
emergency lowering - the load does not
need to be "recovered"

Reliable
• Smooth emergency braking
• Friction linings are not constantly pressed
together, there is no danger of them sticking
• Long-lived thanks to robust, fully enclosed
system

For transporting molten metals or similarly dangerous goods such as acids or lyes, hoists must meet the standard DIN EN 14492-2. The hoists
must be so designed that the load cannot drop even if a component in the power flux should fail.

The new special hoist on twin drive concept (TDC) is STAHL CraneSystems’ solution for this difficult requirement. It offers maximum safety
when transporting molten metals from 5,000 to 40,000 kg.

Wire rope hoists on twin drive concept are equipped as standard with two motor-gear units. The two motors are always controlled
synchronously.
The brakes mounted on both motors are designed so that in an emergency each one is capable of braking or holding the load by itself.
Both brakes are activated in conjunction and function as operating and holding brakes.
All drives are monitored by STAHL CraneSystems condition monitoring systems.
02_08EN.FM

Safety-relevant electronics are in category of safety 3.

40
Off-standard solutions with wire rope hoists

Power station _ SH 6 wire rope hoist with UE monorail trolley, true vertical lift,
height of lift 75 m.

Locomotive manufacture _ The three off-standard cranes with 6 SH 5 wire rope


hoists have room to move in the large 52 x 85 m shop and if required can be
controlled in conjunction from a single radio remote control.

DKE articulated trolleys are used on runways with narrow radii of bend. They
are equipped with guide rollers and travel around sharp bends with minimum
wear.
02_08EN.FM

Tool manufacture _ Here AS 7 wire rope hoists are used for true vertical lifting Motor production _ The AS 7 wire rope hoists are equipped with maintenance
and lowering. High safe working loads and heights of lift are required. platforms to permit maintenance work to be carried out safely. The ramshorn
hooks can be rotated electrically for precise handling of the loads.

41
Hoists

Chain hoists in series Tried and tested umpteen


thousands of times!
The ST standard programme
• Maximum safety
provided by patented suspension directly on
the chain guide
• Optimum utilisation of space
with short headroom dimensions
• Precise and flexible
from 2 speeds as standard (not ST0501-8)
• Long life
in acc. with FEM, "power reserves" included
• Low maintenance costs
from long-life brake and low-wear slipping
clutch
• Maintenance-friendly
thanks to innovative chain drive
• Fast availability
You order - we deliver immediately

STAHLplus Info _ Spare parts


for hoists directly from the
manufacturer.

Safety advice _ Chain hoists


that can be moved by means
of push or reel-type trolleys
are subject to the accident
prevention regulation BGV D6.

ST chain hoists in explosion-


protected design are to be
found on page 85 of this
catalogue.
02_08EN.FM

42
Advantages by the dozen
Chain hoist with hook suspension
A2 A4 Ready to use chain hoists from stock
A7 A8

We have compiled the most commonly purchased chain hoists from the the world’s most
distinctive and comprehensive range, the ST. The advantages for you: a speedy general view of
our standard range, a speedy decision for a quality hoist from STAHL CraneSystems, speedy

A1
delivery combined with the lowest price.
A3

• Maximum safety ensured by


patented suspension directly on
the chain guide
3500

ha598v
A9 • Low-maintenance, extremely
simple checking and replacement
of chain sprocket thanks to
overmounted shaft
• Height of lift 3 m
Chain hoist with push and electric trolley • Powerful, robust hoist motor with
steady performance and long
125 - 500 kg (push trolley only) service life
B7
• Newly developed ergonomic
B2
STH control pendant
B5

• The ingenious safety slipping


clutch protects against overload 1 Brake
and limits the hoisting path 2 Motor
3 Suspension
B1

• Hard-wearing, surface-hardened 4 Slipping clutch


5 Gear
and galvanised load chain
B3

6 Chain guide
• Simple electrical connection by 7 Chain anchorage
9 Control
means of plug connectors for 10 Bottom hook
3500

control pendant and travel motor block


A9

11 Chain box
A7 • Each chain hoist is tested with at
A2 ha599v A4 least 25% overload

Safe working load kg 125 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 3,200 5,000
Hoisting speed m/min 8 2/8 2/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 0.75/3.2
125 - 500 kg (electric trolley only) Chain falls 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
50-193
Type ST0501-8 ST0501-8/2 ST0502-8/2 ST0502-8/2 ST1005-8/2 ST2010-8/2 ST3016-8/2 ST5025-6/1
266 151 272 Output kW 0.2 0.2/0.05 0.4/0.1 0.4/0.1 0.8/0.2 1.5/0.37 2.3/0.57 3.0/0.76
Duty cycle % DC 40 35/15 35/15 35/15 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20
Switching operations/h c/h 240 240/480 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240
123

Travelling speed m/min 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20


Control Contactor
Supply voltage, 3~ 380-415 V, 50 Hz
274

C1

Dimensions [mm]
ha596v
Chain hoist with hook A1 367 367 367 428 432 547 575 697
suspension A2 238 238 238 238 402 496 496 522
A3 385 385 385 385 514 590 677 664
3500

A4 281 281 281 281 352 398 393 466


A9

A7 145 145 145 145 135 181 181 206


A8 153 153 153 153 133 158 158 154
A9 20 20 20 26 24 29 33 41
Chain hoist with trolley B1/C1 413/230 413/230 413/230 474/285 437/- 545/- 586/- 707/-
B2 164 164 164 164 242 302 310 480
B3 425 425 425 425 519 589 689 672
1,000 - 5,000 kg (push and electric trolley) B4 - - - - 300 330 338 480
B6 B7 B4 B5 62 62 62 62 96 102 113 149
only with B2 B6 - - - - 338 345 341* 403*
electric
B7 42...180 42...180 42...180 42...180 58...300 66...300 66...300 82...300
B5

trolley
Weights [kg]
with hook suspension kg 18 18 18 18 41 75 82 138
with push trolley kg 24 24 24 26 53 101 112 -
only with
with electric trolley kg 34 34 34 36 62 110 130 201
B1

electric
B3

trolley Prices
Chain hoist Prices on request
with hook suspension
Chain hoist Prices on request
with push trolley
3500

A7 A9 Chain hoist Prices on request


A2
02_08EN.FM

ha597env
with electric trolley
A4 * The travel motor is mounted on the opposite side
Subject to technical and dimensional modifications.

43
Hoists

STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Off-standard chain hoist versions

Chain hoists for particular tasks and requirements


We are the specialists with the greatest experience in this field.
Tell us what your problem is - we will be pleased to advise you and
together we can work out the optimum solution.

The new STD Vario dual chain hoist offers greater flexibility as the distance bet- Full utilisation of height of lift. The crane hook can be raised up to the lower
ween the hooks can be adjusted electrically. Thanks to the precisely adjustable flange of the girder. Design with a dual chain hoist (two chain falls are driven
spacing, the load is always safely attached. simultaneously by one chain sprocket).

Standard Short Extra short


headroom headroom headroom

adjustable spacing
between hooks

Thanks to the electrically adjustable spacing between the hooks, goods of The STK extra short headroom trolley, the hoist that doesn’t waste a single
varying lengths can be lifted and transported without difficulty and without millimetre of space .
using any additional speader beam.
Further advantages: extremely space-saving construction, patented chain drive
Further advantages: safe attachment of load, no loss of headroom, simple for smooth, vibration-free lifting of load, no tilting of hook cross-bar thanks to
power supply, absolute synchronicity, load hooks cannot be displaced 2 separate load chains.
inadvertently during lifting and travelling. Headrooms min 136 mm (500 kg),
Safe working load from 2 x 500 kg to 2 x 3200 kg. max. 210 mm (5000 kg)
02_08EN.FM

Double girder suspension crane with two electric chain hoists for transporting long loads Chain hoists with extremely high heights of lift in the service of the environment:
up to 5,000 kg with radio remote control (the illustration shows a version for 2x 250 kg). always ready for use as maintenance hoists! Heights of lift up to 170 m available.

44
STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Hoists for the entertainment industry in ST chain hoist with multiple falls Twin chain hoist for great heights of lift
compliance with BGV - C1

Extra short headrooms Cantilever crab


STAHLplus Info _ Electric belt hoists and
compact, light maintenance chain hoists
for 230 V / 50 Hz available on request.
02_08EN.FM

Big Bag design Coupled chain hoists for 4-point load take-up

45
Hoists

Lubricants

The special lubricants for wire ropes and chains considerably extend the service life of the suspension elements
and also increase safety.

Advantages provided by special lubricants


• Resistant to corrosive acids, lyes, salt water
and steam
• Dissolve and prevent formation of corrosion
and rust
• High penetration capacity ensures internal
lubrication of wire ropes
• Excellent cleaning and lubricating capacity
• Reduce friction and thus wear
• Prevent electro-corrosion

Packaging Item
No.
STAHL special chain spray 400 ml spray can 270 044 9
Special lubricant for wire ropes and chains 400 ml spray can 812 861 0
5 l canister 812 862 0
10 l canister 812 863 0
25 l canister 812 864 0

STAHLplus Info _ It is only possible to show a small selection of beam


profiles here. If you have a profile which is not listed and you wish to
purchase one of our trolleys, please ask us.

Profile specifications

INP profile IPE profile HEB profile


INP Dimensions Weight IPE Dimensions Weight HEB Dimensions Weight
H B S T [kg/m] H B S T [kg/m] H B S T [kg/m]
80 80 42 3.9 5.9 6.0 80 80 46 3.8 5.2 6.0 100 100 100 6.0 10.0 20.4
100 100 50 4.5 6.8 8.3 100 100 55 4.1 5.7 8.1 120 120 120 6.5 11.0 26.7
120 120 58 5.1 7.7 11.2 120 120 64 4.4 6.3 10.4 140 140 140 7.0 12.0 33.7
140 140 66 5.7 8.6 14.4 140 140 73 4.7 6.9 12.9 160 160 160 8.0 13.0 42.6
160 160 74 6.3 9.5 17.9 160 160 82 5.0 7.4 15.8 180 180 180 8.5 14.0 51.2
180 180 82 6.9 10.4 21.9 180 180 91 5.3 8.0 18.8 200 200 200 9.0 15.0 61.3
200 200 90 7.5 11.3 26.3 200 200 100 5.6 8.5 22.4 220 220 220 9.5 16.0 71.5
220 220 98 8.1 12.2 31.1 220 220 110 5.9 9.2 26.2 240 240 240 10.0 17.0 83.2
240 240 106 8.7 13.1 36.2 240 240 120 6.2 9.8 30.7 260 260 260 10.0 17.5 93.0
260 260 113 9.4 14.1 41.9 270 270 135 6.6 10.2 36.1 280 280 280 10.5 18.0 103.0
280 280 119 10.1 15.2 48.0 300 300 150 7.1 10.7 42.2 300 300 300 11.0 19.0 117.0
300 300 125 10.8 16.2 54.2 330 330 160 7.5 11.5 49.1 320 320 300 11.5 20.5 127.0
320 320 131 11.5 17.3 61.1 360 360 170 8.0 12.7 57.1 340 340 300 12.0 21.5 134.0
340 340 137 12.2 18.3 68.1 400 400 180 8.6 13.5 66.3 360 360 300 12.5 22.5 142.0
360 360 143 13.0 19.5 76.2 450 450 190 9.4 14.6 77.6 400 400 300 13.5 24.0 155.0
380 380 149 13.7 20.5 84.0 500 500 200 10.2 16.0 90.7 450 450 300 14.0 26.0 171.0
400 400 155 14.4 21.5 92.6 550 550 210 11.1 17.2 106.0 500 500 300 14.5 28.0 187.0
02_08EN.FM

450 450 170 16.2 24.3 115.0 600 600 220 12.0 19.0 122.0 550 550 300 15.0 29.0 199.0
500 500 185 18.0 27.0 141.0 600 600 300 15.5 30.0 212.0
550 550 200 19.0 30.0 167.0 650 650 300 16.0 31.0 225.0

46
Instructions for use

These instructions for use provide only general information on the use Impact loading
of hoists and do not take the place of the operating instructions The safe working loads stated apply for loading the hoist without any
provided individual equipment! impact.
Light impacts such as arise from lifting and lowering or moving the load
Lifting processes using hoists may only be performed by a skilled user are permissible. Greater impacts, e.g. if the load drops onto the chain
(instructed in both theory and practice). If used correctly, our hoists or wire rope, are not permissible!
offer maximum safety, avoid injuries and damage, and have a long
service life.

Chemicals
Hoists and suspension elements must not be used in the region of
chemicals or in ambiences exposed to chemical vapours without
Modifications to state of delivery considering the application - please consult us beforehand! Hoists
exposed to chemicals or vapours must be decommissioned and sent to
Form and design of the hoists must not be modified, e.g. by mounting us for assessment.
parts supplied by others, bending, welding, grinding, removing parts,
drilling, removing safety devices such as interlocks, locking pins,
safety latches, etc.

Transporting persons
Transporting persons with hoists is forbidden on principle! Only
equipment especially approved for this purpose may be used for
transporting persons. (Caution: note reduction of safe working load!)
Restrictions of use

Loading
Hoists from STAHL CraneSystems are intended for lifting and transpor- Use in dangerous conditions
ting loads. Some hoists (e.g. general purpose appliances) can also be Lifting or moving loads must be avoided as long
used for towing and lashing loads if this is specified in the operating as persons are within the danger zone of the
instructions. load. Standing on or under a suspended load is
forbidden.
The safe working loads specified are
calculated for a hoist subjected to straight
traction and must not be exceeded. The
suspension element of the hoist (e.g. hoist
chain or wire rope) must not be led over edges Electrical hazards
or used to attach the load! The suspension elements of hoists (e.g. load chain) must not be
energised - e.g. used as an earth lead when welding! Please see the
individual operating instructions for other electrical hazards such as
e.g. on powered hoists! Electrical connection may only be performed
by authorised persons or companies.
Temperature
Hoists from STAHL CraneSystems can be used as a rule in tempera-
tures from -20° to +50°C. These temperatures are guidelines and may
be deviated from for particular hoists. You will find the information
applicable for a specific hoist in the relevant operating instructions.
Hoists can also be supplied for higher temperature ranges on request.
Caution: At ambient temperatures below 0°C, watch out for the brake
icing up. (Test lift before use - see also point "Tests before starting
work" in the instructions for use).
02_08EN.FM

47
Hoists

Instructions for use

• Only undamaged hoists with legible S.W.L. and rating plates may be • The operator must not start moving the load until he has ensured
used. that it is correctly attached and that no-one is in the danger zone.

• Each time before starting work, the equipment including suspension • Before lifting, ensure that the load can be moved freely.
elements, equipment, supporting structure and suspension must be
inspected for obvious defects and faults. The brake and the correct • Do not leave loads suspended or tensioned for a long period or
suspension of the hoist and the load must also be checked. To do so, unsupervised.
lift, tow or tension a load over a short distance, then lower or release
(test lift). • Chain stoppers, slipping clutches etc. must not be used as
operational limit switches.
• Check that the load chain is sufficiently
lubricated and free from damage or wear. A • Do not allow hoists to drop from a great height. The hoist must
faulty load chain must be replaced before the always be set down on the ground correctly.
hoist is used. Check load hook for cracks or
damage. It must have a correctly functioning
safety latch. Check the links of the load chain
for damage. In the case of 2-fall hoists, the bot-
tom hook block may turn over and twist the
load chain. Check that the load chain is not
twisted before using.

• Obviously damaged hoists or hoists known to


have been overloaded or subjected to other
damaging influences must be suspended from use and may only be
used again after they have been tested and repaired if necessary.

• When selecting a hoist for a particular task, please check that hoist,
suspension, load suspension equipment and suspension points as
regards their lifting capacity, type, length and method of attachment
are able to take up the load safely and without any unintentional
movement (e.g. slipping).

• Load chains must not be subjected to load if they are twisted or


knotted.

• The hoist’s suspension and load hooks must


always be loaded at the base of the hook,
never at the tip. They must have sufficient
space and be able to move freely.

• When suspending the hoist, the operator must ensure that it can be
operated without him being endangered by the hoist itself, the
suspension elements or the load.

• The suspension and load hooks of the hoist


must be form a perpendicular line above the
centre of gravity (S) of the load to prevent the
load swinging during the lifting procedure!
02_08EN.FM

48
An excerpt from our extended
range of products

This excerpt shows you a selection of other


hoists. Are you interested? If so, please ask!

VLHP/G trolley for extremely narrow radius VLRP/G spur gear pulley block in flat VLRP/G spur gear pulley block in flat
of bend construction with trolley for extremely construction with trolley for extremely
Extremely low headroom narrow radius of bend narrow radius of bend
Push trolley or reel-type trolley Push trolley or reel-type trolley Push trolley or reel-type trolley
S.W.L. 250 - 6,000 kg S.W.L. 250 - 6,000 kg S.W.L. 250 - 6,000 kg

Optional: Optional: Optional:


Buffers, off-standard girder shapes Buffers, chain box, overload device Buffers, chain box, overload device

Towerlift spur gear pulley block Towerlift ES spur gear pulley block Yalelift LHP/G spur gear pulley block with
Off-standard chain guide Off-standard chain guide integrated trolley (short headroom)
Enclosed housing With chain box Push trolley or reel-type trolley
S.W.L. 1,000 - 2,000 kg S.W.L. 1,000 kg S.W.L. 500 - 10,000 kg
02_08EN.FM

Optional: Optional: Optional:


Other heights of lift Other heights of lift Buffers, chain box

49
Hoists

360° manual chain hoist Technical features


• Powder-coated sheet steel design or
hand chain guide can rotate by 360° corrosion-resistant (CR design)
• Extremely enclosed housing protects
The fully rotating hand chain guide permits the against dirt. The inside components are
manual chain hoist to be operated from any protected even in rugged outdoor use
direction. • The patented brake system functions quietly
This permits working to the side, outside the and holds the load safely in any position
danger zone. Horizontal towing and tensioning • Suspension and load hooks rotating, with
or operating from above open up new areas of safety latch
use. • Galvanised load and hand chains (standard)
• Surcharge for overload device up to
20,000kg: Item No.: 822 908 0, price on request.

500 - 3,000 kg

500 - 3,000 kg 5,000 kg


single-fall 2-fall

10,000 kg 20,000 kg
3-fall 6-fall

20,000 kg

Safe Dimensions Hook dimension Standard Sur- CR design Sur-


required on
hand chain
Chain falls

Weight

work- charge charge


Effort

ing load A* D E F G H I K L M B C N Item 3m per m Item 3m per m


No. height of height of No. height of height of
lift lift lift lift
[kg] [daN] [mm] [kg]
500 1 21 300 133 148 139 139 206 24 61 79 110 17 24 14 9 822 000 0 822 171 0
1,000 1 30 335 156 175 157 164 242 24 70 87 125 22 29 19 13 822 001 0 822 172 0
2,000 1 32 395 182 203 183 192 283 31 83 100 156 30 35 22 20 822 002 0 822 173 0
3,000 1 38 520 220 250 204 225 335 34 95 109 178 38 40 30 29 822 003 0 822 174 0
5,000 2 34 654 220 250 204 242 352 21 95 109 285 45 47 37 38 822 004 0 822 175 0
02_08EN.FM

10,000 3 44 825 220 383 204 326 436 136 95 109 401 68 68 50 71 822 170 0 822 176 0
20,000 6 2x44 1010 303 555 250 391 501 - 396 125 461 85 74 56 196 822 244 0 on request
* minimum hook dimension

50
VSplus manual chain hoists Technical features
• Safety brake (load pressure brake) reliably
VSplus manual chain hoists are made of high- holds the load in any position
quality steel. • Safety load hook with latch
They are extremely robust while featuring a • High-tensile galvanised load chain
low deadweight and compact dimensions. The • Roller and ball bearings in all rotating parts
headroom is particularly low. ensuring smooth running
• All mechanical parts protected against dust
GL design available on request. and dirt
• Hardened and tempered chain sprocket
with 4 precisely formed chain pockets
Optional • Chain hoist painted yellow, powder-coated
• Hoists from 1,000 kg safe working load can • Load chain for 3.0 m height of lift and
be equipped with an overload device in the hand-chain slack length 2.5 m, other lengths
form of a slipping clutch activated at 25% always possible
(±15%) overload. Retrofitting is possible • Operating temperature: -10° to +50°C
without any problems. • Spare parts available
• Chain box available for hoists up to 5,000 kg.
Off-standard sizes on request.

500 - 3,000 kg 2,000 - 5,000 kg


single-fall 2-fall

J
J
F L
F L
D
D
B B
C C
A

ha011v

ha010v
C

Safe Dimensions Hook dimension Lift * Weight Item Price Surcharge


at rated load
red on chain
Effort requi
Chain falls

working with 3 m No.


load height of 3 m height per m height of lift
lift of lift (incl hand chain)
A F G H J L B C D
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg]
500 1 320 125 - - 111 64 17 29 11 35 26 9 812 975 0
1,000 1 370 147 - - 125 68 15 30 15 23 36 11.2 812 976 0
2,000 1 450 183 - - 142 74 33 33 23 18 54 18 812 977 0
2,000 2 530 147 - - 125 68 31 34 24 12 37 15.3 812 978 0
3,000 1 530 215 - - 163 84 38 38 27 12 52 28 812 979 0
02_08EN.FM

3,000 2 620 183 - - 142 74 41 37 24 9 41 24.7 812 980 0


5,000 2 620 215 - - 163 84 48 43 33 6 44 38.7 812 981 0
* When reeling 1 m hand chain See page 54 for other options. Subject to technical modifications

51
Hoists

Aluminium manual chain hoist

• Low deadweight
• High corrosion resistance
• Threaded load pressure brake
• Galvanised round link chain to DIN 5684-8

STAHLplus Info _
Stainless steel
manual chain
hoists available
on request.

Safe Chain falls Load chain Effort required Lift *1 Dimensions Weight Item Price Surcharge
working load on handchain A B B1 H *1 M M3 *2 No. 3 m height per m
[kg] [mm] approx. [daN] [mm] [mm] [kg] of lift height of lift
250 1 5 x 15 14 1579 150 137 51 325 27 13 11 822 005 0
500 1 5 x 15 30 1579 150 137 51 325 27 13 11 822 006 0
1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 36 968 174 146 59 370 29 16 13 822 007 0
1,500 1 7.1 x 21 42 732 203 147 61 440 34 20 18 822 008 0
2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 40 476 204 146 59 510 36 22 22 822 009 0
3,000 2 7.1 x 21 46 370 240 147 61 590 42.5 35 30 822 010 0
5,000 3 7.1 x 21 46 224 342 147 61 620 46.5 43 39 822 011 0
02_08EN.FM

*1 When reeling 30 m hand chain


*2 minimum hook dimension

52
9/98 manual chain hoists

The manual chain hoists have a sturdy sheet Optional


steel housing. They are extremely robust while • Stainless steel load and hand chain
featuring a low deadweight and compact • Ball-bearing load hook
dimensions. • With chain box

Technical features
• Supplied as standard with slipping clutch
overload device
• Industrial quality
• Increased safety ensured by two ratchets
• Housing powder-coated up to 10,000 kg
4-fall, galvanised from 10,000 kg 2-fall
• Low effort required on hand chain
• Suspension and load hooks with safety latch
• Galvanised RUD quality load chain in acc.
with EN 818-7-T
• Galvanised load chain in acc. with DIN 766
• German certificate of origin

These manual chain hoists are also available in


explosion-protected design.
You will find the explosion-protected design on
page 89 of this catalogue.

Safe work- Chain Load chain Effort re- Lift * Dimensions Hook dimension With Item Price Surcharge
ing laod falls quired on with 3 m No.
chain at height of 3 m height per m
rated load lift of lift height of lift
A A1 B B1 C H M M1 M2 M3
[kg] [mm] ap. [daN] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
500 1 5 x 15 21 1165 141 87 108 48 216 288 22 35 20 15 8.9 822 177 0
1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 35 870 168 102 131 57 256 345 26 40 25 18 12.2 822 178 0
1,500 1 8 x 24 39 640 212 129 146 68 321 423 30 44 29 22 19.6 822 179 0
2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 35 435 163 88 131 57 286 491 34 50 33 23 13.6 822 180 0
3,000 2 8 x 24 39 320 202 108 146 68 354 593 38 54 39 28 27 822 181 0
5,000 2 10 x 30 42 170 236 128 168 81 412 702 41 64 46 32 42 822 182 0
10,000 4 10 x 30 45 85 415 130 168 81 479 755 58 87 65 46 105 822 183 0
10,000 2 13 x 36 31 74 346 218 282 141 568 824 49 71 67 53 100 822 184 0
15,000 3 13 x 36 33 50 425 255 282 141 758 1115 55 90 85 67 135 822 185 0
20,000 4 13 x 36 35 37 463 293 282 141 787 1165 69 100 95 75 170 822 186 0
25,000 5 13 x 36 37 30 510 326 282 141 798 1233 76 112 106 85 198 822 187 0
30,000 2x3 13 x 36 2x33 50 810 405 282 141 727 1160 84 125 118 95 270 822 188 0
02_08EN.FM

40,000 2x4 13 x 36 2x35 37 926 463 282 141 790 1280 97 140 132 106 340 822 189 0
50,000 2x5 13 x 36 2x37 30 1063 531 282 141 875 1470 110 160 150 118 396 822 190 0
* When reeling 30 m hand chain

53
Hoists

YL ITP manual chain hoists with integrated push trolleys

Safe working load 500 - 5,000 kg

The manual chain hoist forms a compact unit together with the push trolley providing the
advantage of extremely low headroom (hook dimension A).
The hoist is moved horizontally by pushing on the load.
10,000 kg safe working load on request.

YL ITG manual chain hoists with integrated reel-type trolleys

Safe working load 500 - 10,000 kg

The manual chain hoist forms a compact unit together with the reel-type trolley providing the
advantage of extremely low headroom (hook dimension A). The hoist is moved horizontally by
pulling on a hand chain. Other technical features correspond to the YL ITP model.

Corrosion resistant design

For areas of application with increased requirements on the surface (foodstuff industry,
chemical industry, agriculture and sewage farms), the manual chain hoists with integrated
trolleys can also be supplied in corrosion resistant design. Suitable protective surface coatings
prevent or delay the development of corrosion. Thus the coating increases the service life of the
treated component. The hoists are supplied as standard with stainless steel hand chains and
galvanised load chains.

Explosion-protected design

These manual hoists can also be supplied in "explosion-protected design" for use in hazardous
locations such as paint shops, foundries, on-/offshore applications, refineries, oil depots, galva-
nising plants, etc. Please enquire.

Selecting special materials is effective against mechanically produced


sparks such as occur during grinding and hammering processes, e.g.
• stainless steel load and hand chains
• fully corrosion resistant equipment
• bronze-coated suspension and load hooks
• solid bronze wheels
• buffers Solid bronze wheels
• chain box
See page 55 for hoist data and dimensions

See pages 50-51 and 55 for surcharges for options on manual chain hoists Options for VSplus and YL ITP/G manual chain
Safe Surcharges hoists
work- Slipping clutch (VS only) Chain box VS YL IT
ing load Item For Item For Item VS and YL IT manual chain hoists can be
Chain

Chain
falls

falls

[kg] No. height No. height No.


of lift of lift
equipped with chain boxes and slipping
500 - 1 12 m 812 988 0 1 12 m 822 900 0 clutches (VSplus only). The table on the left
1,000 812 986 0 1 12 m 812 989 0 1 12 m 822 901 0 summarises the options available.
2,000 812 986 0 1 12 m 812 990 0 1 6m 822 902 0
2,000 812 986 0 2 6 m 812 991 0 1 12 m 822 903 0
3,000 812 986 0 1 10 m 812 992 0 1 6m 822 904 0 STAHLplus Info _ To help you
3,000 812 986 0 2 6 m 812 993 0 1 12 m 822 905 0
5,000 812 986 0 2 10 m 812 995 0 2 6m 822 906 0 select a suitable trolley for
8,000 - - - - - - - your runway beam, you will
10,000 - - - - 4 3m 822 907 0 find the specifications of all
02_08EN.FM

15,000 - - - - - - - common profiles on page 46.


20,000 - - - - - - -

54
Manual chain hoists with integrated trolley Technical features
• Safety brake (load pressure brake) reliably holds the load in any
position
500 - 3,000 kg YL ITG YL ITP
• Safety load hook with latch
L • High-tensile galvanised load chain
L1 B B • All mechanical parts protected against dust and dirt
• Gear mechanism with high degree of efficiency ensuring little effort

I
is required to hoist loads

I
F

• Chain hoist painted yellow, powder-coated, and trolley black


(YL ITP/G) or in corrosion resistant design (YL ITP/G CR)
• Load chain for 3.0 m height of lift and hand chain slack length 2.5 m,
other lengths always available
A

• Operating temperature: -10° to +50°C


C

STAHLplus Info _ Other tempera-


B

ha015v
ha014v

D D ture ranges from -50° to +70°C and


dust protected design available on
request.

With parking brake with hand chain for 3 m height of lift (option against surcharge)
5,000 kg YL ITG YL ITP

L
L1 B B
F

I
A

Safe working load F1 H1 L P1 T1 Surcharge *

[kg] [mm] Item No.


ha016v ha017v
500 99 24 363 179 134 812 255 0
C

1,000 99 24 413 179 134 812 255 0


2,000 99 23.5 463 179 134 812 255 0
B

D D
3,000 103 32 518 179 134 812 255 0
5,000 102 30.5 628 179 134 812 255 0
* Surcharge per additional m hand chain length

Safe Dimensions Weight Standard Surcharge CR design* Surcharge


Effort required on hand
chain at rated load

working with 3 m
Minimum radius

loadt lift Item 3 m height per m Item 3 m height per m


of bend

No. of lift height of No. of lift height of


Chain falls

lift (incl. lift (incl.


hand hand
chain) chain)
A B C I F L L1
[kg] [mm] [daN] [kg]
500 1 900 245 50-180 24 71.5 92 270 130 21 20 812 919 0 822 191 0
500 1 900 245 180-300 24 71.5 92 270 130 21 21 812 920 0 822 192 0
with push trolley

1,000 1 900 272 50-180 29 71.5 92 310 130 30 27 812 921 0 822 193 0
1,000 1 900 272 180-300 29 71.5 92 310 130 30 29 812 922 0 822 194 0
2,000 1 1150 323 58-180 35 95.5 91 360 150 32 44 812 923 0 822 195 0
2,000 1 1150 323 180-300 35 95.5 91 360 150 32 46 812 924 0 822 196 0
3,000 1 1400 382 74-180 40 131 107 445 180 38 77 812 925 0 822 245 0
3,000 1 1400 382 180-300 40 131 107 445 180 38 79 812 926 0 822 246 0
5,000 2 1800 550 98-180 47 142.5 149.5 525 209 34 125 812 927 0 on
5,000 2 1800 550 180-300 47 142.5 149.5 525 209 34 129 812 928 0 request
500 1 900 245 50-180 24 76.5 92 270 130 21 24 812 939 0 822 197 0
500 1 900 245 180-300 24 76.5 92 270 130 21 25 812 940 0 822 198 0
1,000 1 900 272 50-180 29 76.5 92 310 130 30 32 812 941 0 822 199 0
with reel-type trolley

1,000 1 900 272 180-300 29 76.5 92 310 130 30 33 812 942 0 822 200 0
2,000 1 1150 323 58-180 35 98 91 360 150 32 49 812 943 0 822 201 0
2,000 1 1150 323 180-300 35 98 91 360 150 32 50 812 944 0 822 202 0
3,000 1 1400 382 74-180 40 132.5 107 445 180 38 82 812 945 0 822 203 0
3,000 1 1400 382 180-300 40 132.5 107 445 180 38 84 812 946 0 822 204 0
5,000 2 1800 550 98-180 47 148.5 149.5 525 209 34 130 812 947 0 822 205 0
5,000 2 1800 550 180-300 47 148.5 149.5 525 209 34 134 812 948 0 822 206 0
02_08EN.FM

10,000 4 1800 760 125-310 52 170 113 430 200 44 175.0 812 950 0 on
request
* See Page 54 for further options. Subject to technical modifications.

55
Hoists

Aluminium manual chain hoists with


trolleys

Compact construction

These light aluminium manual chain hoists


are available both with push trolley and with
reel-type trolley.

Technical features
• Short headroom (hook dimension)
• Very low running resistance
• Fast, easy assembly
• Low deadweight
• Asbestos-free brake linings
• German certificate of origin

Accessories available on request:


• Parking brake
• Buffers
• Design for curved tracks (only in combina-
tion with reel-type trolley)

Safe Load Flange Lift Effort on Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley
working chain width *1 hand *2 Running Item Price Surcharge Effort on Travel path Item Price Surcharge
Chain falls

load chain for re- No. 3 m height per m hand chain *1 No. 3 m height per m
lifting sistance of lift height of for travel- of lift height of
B lift ling lift
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] [daN] [daN] [m]
500 1 5 x 15 50 - 146 1579 30 22.5 15.5 822 021 0 6.5 7.8 822 033 0
147 - 302 822 022 0 822 034 0
1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 50 - 135 968 36 28.0 24.0 822 023 0 10.0 10.0 822 035 0
136 - 220 822 024 0 822 036 0
1,500 1 7.1 x 21.0 66 - 185 732 40 45.0 27.0 822 025 0 11.5 9.8 822 037 0
186 - 310 822 026 0 822 038 0
2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 66 - 185 476 40 49.0 36.0 822 027 0 15.0 9.8 822 039 0
186 - 310 822 028 0 822 040 0
3,000 2 7.1 x 21.0 74 - 196 370 43 76.0 39.0 822 029 0 11.0 6.3 822 041 0
197 - 310 822 030 0 822 042 0
5,000 3 7.1 x 21.0 74 - 192 224 46 93.0 63.0 822 031 0 17.0 6.3 822 043 0
193 - 302 822 032 0 822 044 0
*1 when reeling 30 m hand chain
*2 for 3 m runway height

Safe Flange Dimensions


working wdith
load B A A1 B1 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C2 C4 H L M M3
[kg] [mm] [mm]
500 50 - 146 234 148 122 99 24 20 137 51 25 60 296 90 27 12
147 - 302 200
1,000 50 - 135 287 173 122 140 31 20 146 59 25 83 350 140 29 16
136 - 220 163
1,500 66 - 185 350 200 168 146 40 23 147 61 32 108 424 172 34 20
186 - 310 225
2,000 66 - 185 350 208 168 146 40 23 147 59 32 108 438 172 36 22
186 - 310 225
3,000 74 - 196 428 235 182 149 46 30 147 61 35 150 476 195 41 35
197 - 310 243
5,000 74 - 192 492 330 190 283 53 30 147 61 36 148 595 223 41 43
193 - 302 258
02_08EN.FM

56
24/98 manual chain hoists with trolley

Compact construction
A B1
These manual chain hoists are available both L B3 B B2

with push trolleys and with reel-type trolleys

D1

D2

C
Technical features

H
• With 9/98 manual chain hoist, see page 53.
• Equipped as standard with slipping clutch M

overload protection
M3
• Wheels with maintenance-free ball-
ha020v

M2
B6
A1
bearings
• Galvanised load and hand chain, load chain
in acc. with DIN 5684-8
• German certificate of origin

Also available on request: These manual chain hoists


• Parking brake are also available in explo-
• Limiting buffers sion-protected design.
• Rack-and-pinion drive You will find the explosion-
• Design for curved runways (only in protected design on page 91
combination with reel-type trolley) of this catalogue.
• Fully galvanised trolley

Safe Load chain Flange Lift Effort on Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley
Chain falls

working width *1 hand chain *2 Running Item Price Surcharge Effort on Item Price Surcharge
load for lifting resistance No. 3 m height per m hand chain No. 3 m height per m
B of lift height of lift for travelling of lift height of lift
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] [daN] [daN]
500 1 5 x 15 50 - 146 1165 21 20.1 15.5 822 207 0 6.5 822 219 0
147 - 302 822 208 0 822 220 0
1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 50 - 135 870 32 26.7 24.0 822 209 0 10 822 221 0
136 - 220 822 210 0 822 222 0
1,500 1 8 x 24 66 - 185 640 39 50.6 30.0 822 211 0 11 822 223 0
186 - 310 822 212 0 822 224 0
2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 66 - 185 435 35 44.6 36.0 822 213 0 15 822 225 0
186 - 310 822 214 0 822 226 0
3,000 2 8 x 24 74 - 196 320 39 76 39.0 822 215 0 11 822 227 0
197 - 310 822 216 0 822 228 0
5,000 2 10 x 30 74 - 192 170 42 97 63.0 822 217 0 17 822 229 0
193 - 302 822 218 0 822 230 0
10,000 4 10 x 30 119 - 215 85 45 182.5 - - 21 822 231 0
216 - 312 822 232 0
10,000 2 119 - 215 - - - 822 233 0
216 x 312 822 234 0
15,000 3 148 - 310 - - - 822 235 0
20,000 4 158 - 310 - - - 822 236 0
25,000 5 170 x 310 - - - 822 237 0
*1 when reeling 30 m hand chain
*2 for 3 m runway height

Safe Flange Dimensions


working wdith
load B A A1 B1 B2 B3 B6 C ØD1 ØD2 H L M M2 M3
[kg] [mm] [mm]
500 50 - 146 234 141 122 24 99 108 25 50 135 244 93 22 20 15
147 - 302 200
1,000 50 - 135 287 168 122 31 140 131 21 65 135 289 142 26 25 18
136 - 220 163
1,500 66 - 185 350 212 166 40 146 146 31 85 135 359 172 30 29 22
186 - 310 228
2,000 66 - 185 350 163 166 40 146 131 31 85 135 446 172 34 33 23
186 - 310 228
3,000 74 - 196 428 202 182 46 149 146 31 120 135 495 209 38 39 23
197 - 310 243
5,000 74 - 192 492 236 190 53 283 168 32 120 195 592 223 41 46 32
193 - 302 258
02_08EN.FM

10,000 119 - 215 650 415 242 62 248 168 42 150 270 615 253 58 65 46
216 - 312 291

57
Hoists

28/98 manual chain hoists with trolleys

Short headroom design

These manual chain hoists are extremely


compact and have a short hook dimension.
They are available both with push trolley and
with reel-type trolley.

Technical features
• Short headroom (hook dimension)
• Equipped as standard with slipping clutch
overload protection
• Two load axles - trolley with excellent
running characteristics
• Very low running resistance thanks to
machined wheels with roller bearings These manual chain hoists
• Galvanised hand chain in acc. with DIN 766 with trolleys are also availa-
• German certificate of origin ble in explosion-protected
design. Please enquire!

Safe Load Flange Lift Effort on Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley
working chain width *1 hand *2 Running Item Price Surcharge Effort on Travel path Item Price Surcharge
Chain falls

load chain for re- No. 3 m height per m hand chain *1 No. 3 m height per m
lifting sistance of lift height of lift for travel- of lift height of lift
B approx. ling
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] [daN] [daN] [m]
500 1 5 x 15 82 - 185 1165 22 35 10 822 045 0 4 9.8 822 057 0
186 - 310 822 046 0 822 058 0
1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 76 - 196 870 35 42 16 822 047 0 5 9.8 822 059 0
197 - 310 822 048 0 822 060 0
1,500 1 8 x 24.0 125 - 192 640 39 76 24 822 049 0 5 6.5 822 061 0
193 - 302 822 050 0 822 062 0
2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 76 - 196 435 36 78 32 822 051 0 10 9.8 822 063 0
197 - 310 822 052 0 822 064 0
3,000 2 8 x 24.0 125 - 192 320 40 104 48 822 053 0 10 6.5 822 065 0
193 - 302 822 054 0 822 066 0
5,000 3 8 x 24.0 140 - 215 215 41 165 50 822 055 0 9 4.5 822 067 0
216 - 312 822 056 0 822 068 0
10,000 - - 822 069 0
822 070 0
15,000 - - 822 071 0
20,000 - - 822 072 0
25,000 - - 822 073 0
*1 when reeling 30 m hand chain
*2 for 3 m runway height

Safe Flange Dimensions


working wdith
load B A A1 A2 A5 B1 B2 B4 C1 C2 C3 ØD1 H M
[kg] [mm] [mm]
500 74 - 185 481 189 172 118 129 144 108 372 107 30 85 222 22
186 - 310 135
1,000 74 - 196 600 215 209 140 145 149 131 489 150 30 120 264 26
197 - 310 145
1,500 106 - 192 697 250 223 154 137 156 146 560 150 (175) 37 120 327 32.5
193 - 302 162 *1
2,000 74 - 196 600 183 209 172 145 149 131 489 150 30 120 325 32.5
197 - 310 145
3,000 106 - 192 697 223 223 182 153 156 146 560 150 (175) 37 120 384 37
193 - 302 162 *1
5,000 119 - 215 818 267 253 227 183 248 146 567 185 42 150 507 41
216 - 312 183
10,000
15,000 on request
20,000
02_08EN.FM

25,000
*1 Dimensions in brackets up to top of hand chain sheave

58
29/98 manual chain hoists with reel-type
trolleys

Extremely short headroom construction

These manual chain hoists with reel-type


trolley have an extremely short headroom
(hook dimension)

Technical features Also available on request:


• Extremely short headroom (hook dimension) • Chain box
• Overload protection by means of slipping • Parking brake
clutch • End buffers
• Excellent running characteristics • Non-sparking version
• German certificate of origin • Trolley fully galvanised
• Ball-bearing load hook

These manual chain hoists


with reel-type trolleys are
also available in explosion-
1,000 - 6,300 kg protected design. Please
enquire!

1,000 - 6,300 kg 10,000 - 30,000 kg

10,000 - 30,000 kg

Safe Load Flange Lift Effort on Effort on Travel Dimensions Weight Item Price Surcharge
working chain width *1 hand hand chain path *2 No. 3 m height per m
Chain falls

load chain for for *1 A A1 B1 B2 B6 C C1 H L1 L2 M of lift height of


lifting travelling lift
B
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [daN] [m] [mm] [kg]
1,000 2 5 x 15 74 - 150 582 23 9 7,8 565 233 132 272 456 214 127 140 160 190 30 75 822 074 0
151 - 220 456 822 075 0
221 - 310 548 822 076 0
2,000 2 6,3 x 19,1 82 - 156 435 36 13 9,8 670 265 157 335 486 293 167 163 170 235 36 145 822 077 0
157 - 210 486 822 078 0
211 - 306 582 822 079 0
3,200 2 8 x 24 106 - 223 320 42 10 6,3 805 325 178 265 516 326 199 193 200 265 42 225 822 080 0
224 - 310 603 822 081 0
5,000 4 8 x 24 119 - 215 160 35 12 6,5 930 410 187 268 472 323 204 239 270 310 45 370 822 082 0
216 - 312 568 822 083 0
6,300 4 8 x 24 119 - 215 160 43 15 6,5 930 410 187 268 472 323 204 239 270 310 45 370 822 084 0
216 - 312 568 822 085 0
10,000 2 16 x 45 155 - 310 35 19 28 4 1150 500 381 400 425 300 270 300 300 45 1020 822 086 0
16,000 4 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 1465 665 381 400 335 410 392 400 400 55 1625 822 087 0
20,000 4 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 1465 665 381 400 335 410 420 400 400 55 1660 822 088 0
25,000 4 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 1465 665 381 400 335 410 472 400 400 69 1680 822 089 0
30,000 6 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 560 822 090 0
02_08EN.FM

*1 when reeling 30 m hand chain


*2 for 3 m runway height

59
Hoists

HTP push trolleys

Loads can easily be moved horizontally with these push trolleys.


Manual chain hoists and lever hoists can easily be mounted.

They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and can easily be adjusted
to the corresponding flange width.

The push trolleys have ball-bearing wheels making it easy to push the
load.

Painted black, powder-coated or corrosion resistant (CR version).

As an option, a brake can be supplied for fixing the trolley in its parking
position (up to max. 5,000 kg).

For use in hazardous areas, "explosion-protected design" on request.

Safety advice _ Chain hoists that can be moved by


means of push or reel-type trolleys are subject to the
accident prevention regulation BGV D6 Cranes and
must therefore be tested annually.

With parking brake

Safe Flange Dimensions Weight Standard CR version


of bend
radius

working width
Min.

load B A D D1 D2 H1 L L1 O P1 P2 T Item Item


[kg] [mm] [kg] No. No.
500 50-220 900 77 16 25 30 30.5 260 130 60 168 146 146 8.0 812 116 0 812 141 0
160-300 92 45.5 187 10.6 812 117 0 812 142 0
1,000 50-220 900 82.5 17 30 35 30.5 260 130 60 168 150 150 9.0 812 118 0 812 143 0
160-300 97.5 45.5 187 12.0 812 119 0 812 144 0
2,000 66-220 1150 98.5 22 40 47 30.5 310 150 80 168 155 155 16.0 812 122 0 812 145 0
160-300 113.5 45.5 189.5 19.3 812 123 0 812 146 0
3,000 74-220 1400 114 26 48 58 30 390 180 112 168 160 160 32.0 812 124 0 812 147 0
160-300 129 45 191.5 35.8 812 125 0 812 148 0
5,000 90-220 1800 132.5 33 60 70 30 450 209 125 168 167.5 167.5 48.0 812 126 0 812 149 0
180-300 147.5 45 191.5 52.2 812 127 0 812 550 0
Subject to technical modifications
02_08EN.FM

Surcharge for parking brake with hand chain for 3 m runway height
up to 5,000 kg: Item No. 812 204 0, price on request (cannot be retrofitted)
Surcharge per aditional metre hand chain slack on request

60
HTG reel-type trolleys

Loads can positioned precisely with these reel-type trolleys. Manual or


electric chain hoists and lever hoists can easily be mounted.
They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and can easily be adjusted
to the corresponding flange width.
The reel-type trolleys have ball-bearing wheels making it easy to push
the load. Painted black, powder-coated or corrosion resistant
(CR version).
Hand chain slack for 3 m runway height.

A brake for fixing the trolley in its parking position can be supplied as
an option (up to max. 10,000 kg).

For use in hazardous areas, "explosion-protected version" on request.

With parking brake 500 - 5,000 kg

500 - 5,000 kg

To help you select a suita-


ble trolley for your runway
beam, you will find the
specifications of all com-
mon profiles on page 46.

8,000 - 10,000 kg 15,000 - 20,000 kg

Safe Flange Dimensions Standard Sur- CR version Sur-


working width charge charge
load B (hand chain (hand chain
Weight

hand chain

hand chain

slack 2.70 m) slack 2.70 m)


per m

per m
slack

slack

A C D D1 D2 F H1 I L L1 L2 O P P1 P2 R* T Item Item
[kg] [mm] [kg] No. No.
500 50-220 77 - 16 25 30 46 30.5 71.5 260 130 - 60 110 168 146 900 146 8 812 087 0 812 217 0
160-300 92 45.5 187 10.6 812 088 0 812 218 0
1,000 50-220 82.5 - 17 30 35 46 30.5 71.5 260 130 - 60 110 168 150 900 150 9 812 089 0 812 219 0
160-300 97.5 45.5 187 12 812 096 0 812 224 0
2,000 66-220 98.5 - 22 40 47 46 30.5 95.5 310 150 - 80 110 168 155 1150 155 16 812 097 0 812 225 0
160-300 113.5 45.5 189.5 19.3 812 098 0 812 232 0
3,000 74-220 114 - 26 48 58 46 30 131 390 180 - 112 110 168 160 1400 160 32 812 099 0 812 233 0
160-300 129 45 191.5 35.8 812 102 0 812 234 0
5,000 90-220 132.5 - 33 60 70 45.5 30 142.5 450 209 - 125 110 168 167.5 1800 167.5 48 812 103 0 812 235 0
180-300 147.5 45 191.5 52.2 812 104 0 812 236 0
8,000 125-310 276 52 30 80 114 113 45 170 430 200 - 150 163 - - 1800 270 104 812 105 0 812 237 0
10,000 125-310 276 52 30 80 114 113 45 170 430 200 - 150 163 - - 1800 270 104 812 106 0 812 238 0
15,000 125-310 270 70 35 110 155 113 45 170 870 200 115 150 163 - - 5000 270 230 812 107 0 812 239 0
20,000 125-310 270 70 35 110 155 113 45 170 870 200 115 150 163 - - 5000 270 230 812 108 0 812 240 0
* minimum radius of bend Subject to technical modifications

Surcharge for parking brake with hand chain for 3 m runway height
02_08EN.FM

up to 5,000 kg: Item No. 812 204 0, price on request (cannot be retrofitted)
from 8,000 - 10,000 kg: Item No. 822 238 0, price on request (cannot be retrofitted)
Surcharge per additional metre hand chain slack on request

61
Hoists

Trolleys

Galvanised Technical features


• Push trolley or reel-type trolley versions
Loads can be transported horizontally with • Safe working load 500 - 25,000 kg
these trolleys. • Suspension suitable for all types of hoist
They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and • Stable non-distorting 3 bolt design
can easily be adjusted to the corresponding • Maintenance-free lifetime lubricated ball
flange width. bearings with 2 RS seals
Manual chain hoists and cable pullers can • Heavy duty design, long-lived even in the
easily be mounted. most severe conditions
• Trolleys from 8,000 kg with zinc primer and
alcyd paint
Optional • Hand chain slack 2.5 m, other lengths
• Buffers always possible
• Off-standard surface treatment • Stainless steel hand chain available on
• Static load test with manufacturer’s request
certificate in acc. with EN 50049

N
L
R
O

A
B

H
E
D

ha018v

Safe Max. hoist Flange Dimensions Effort Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley
working weight width required at Item Item hand Sur-
load A B L H W R D E N O rated load No. No. chain charge
slack 2.5 m *1
[kg] [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] [kg]
500 100 55 - 102 45 60 150 125 160 75 52 15 - - - 3 823 000 0 -
105 - 152 210 823 001 0
1,000 120 55 - 102 60 75 190 150 170 99 60 20 90 100 10 5-6 823 002 0 823 028 0
105 - 152 220 823 003 0 823 029 0
156 - 203 270 823 004 0 823 030 0
207 - 254 325 823 005 0 823 031 0
2,000 250 74 - 127 80 100 255 195 215 123 75 27 90 100 16 11-12 823 006 0 823 032 0
127 - 180 265 823 007 0 823 033 0
190 - 243 330 823 008 0 823 034 0
254 - 305 390 823 009 0 823 035 0
3,200 150 90 - 143 100 120 300 235 250 144 90 35 95 100 25 18-19 823 010 0 823 036 0
149 - 203 310 823 011 0 823 037 0
203 - 254 360 823 012 0 823 038 0
251 - 305 410 823 013 0 823 039 0
5,000 300 106 - 156 125 150 375 295 275 174 117 40 130 135 20 31-32 823 014 0 823 040 0
160 - 210 330 823 015 0 823 041 0
210 - 260 380 823 016 0 823 042 0
255 - 305 425 823 017 0 823 043 0
6,300 200 106 - 156 125 150 375 300 275 174 117 40 130 135 25 33-34 823 018 0 823 044 0
160 - 210 330 823 019 0 823 045 0
210 - 260 380 823 020 0 823 046 0
255 - 305 425 823 021 0 823 047 0
8,000 550 fix (119) * 160 190 450 365 bw+150 220 145 45 135 270 16 85-90 823 022 0 823 048 0
10,000 600 fix (131) * 160 190 450 370 bw+150 220 145 45 135 270 19 90-95 823 023 0 823 049 0
12,500 150 fix (143) * 160 190 450 375 bw+150 220 145 45 135 270 23 95-100 823 024 0 823 050 0
16,000 700 fix (155) * 200 240 560 445 bw+185 272 165 42 155 300 20 135-145 823 025 0 823 051 0
20,000 800 fix (170) * 200 240 560 455 bw+185 272 165 42 155 300 25 140-150 823 026 0 823 052 0
02_08EN.FM

25,000 900 fix (185) * 200 240 560 460 bw+195 272 165 42 160 380 25 150-160 823 027 0 823 053 0
* Minimum flange width *1 Surcharge per further m hand chain slack on request

62
Trolleys

Stainless steel Optional


• Buffers
Loads can be transported horizontally with • Static load test with manufacturer’s
these trolleys. certificate in acc. with EN 50049
They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and
can easily be adjusted to the corresponding
flange width.
Manual chain hoists and lever hoists can
easily be mounted.
N
L
Technical features R

• Push trolley or reel-type trolley versions

A
B
• Safe working load 500 - 3,200 kg

H
• Trolleys made completely of stainless steel

E
D
(material AISI 316)
• Hand chain slack 2.5 m, other lengths W
ha018v

always possible

Safe Max. hoist Flange Dimensions Effort Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley
working weight width required at Item Item hand chain Surcharge
load A B L H W R D E N O rated load No. No. slack 2.5 m *
[kg] [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] [kg]
500 100 55 - 102 45 60 150 125 160 75 52 15 - - - 3 823 054 0 -
105 - 152 210 823 055 0
1,000 120 55 - 102 60 75 190 150 170 99 60 20 90 100 10 5-6 823 056 0 823 067 0
105 - 152 220 823 057 0 823 068 0
156 - 203 270 823 058 0 823 069 0
207 - 254 325 823 059 0 823 070 0
2,000 250 74 - 127 80 100 255 195 215 123 75 27 90 100 16 11-12 823 060 0 823 071 0
127 - 180 265 823 061 0 823 072 0
190 - 243 330 823 062 0 823 073 0
3,200 150 90 - 143 100 120 300 235 250 144 90 35 95 100 20 18-19 823 063 0 823 074 0
149 - 203 310 823 064 0 823 075 0
203 - 254 360 823 065 0 823 076 0
251 - 305 410 823 066 0 823 077 0
* Surcharge per further m hand chain slack on request

Articulated trolleys

The articulated trolley suspension permits


extremely small radii of bend to be travelled.

Technical features
• Push trolley or reel-type trolley design
• Safe working load 500 - 10,000 kg
• Hand chain slack 2.5 m, other lengths
always possible
• Stainless steel hand chain available on
request

Optional
• Buffers
• Off-standard surface treatment
• Static load test with manufacturer’s
certificate in acc. with EN 50049
Safe working Max. Flange Wheel Ø With push trolley With reel-type trolley
load hoist weight width Weight Item Weight Item hand chain Surcharge *
[kg] [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] No. [kg] No. slack 2.5 m
500 100 60 / 75 16 823 078 0 17 823 082 0
1,000 120 60 / 75 16 823 079 0 17 823 083 0
2,000 250 80 / 100 30 823 080 0 31 823 084 0
3,200 150 100 / 120 46 823 081 0 47 823 085 0
fix
5,000 300 125 / 150 77 823 090 0 78 823 086 0
6,000 500 125 / 150 83 823 091 0 84 823 087 0
8,000 550 160 / 190 154 - 157 823 088 0
02_08EN.FM

10,000 600 160 / 190 165 - 167 823 089 0


* Surcharge per further m hand chain slack on request

63
Hoists

UNO lever hoists Technical features


• Frame structure, gear and brake housing
Lever hoists are fully adaptable and can be deep-drawn sheet steel
used effectively for lifting, pulling and clam- • Freewheeling facility for fast handling
ping applications. They are ideal for moving • Safety brake with asbestos-free brake
and positioning heavy machinery, installing linings
overhead cables and securing loads. Thanks • Load chain in class 8 (T) in acc. with EN 818
to their compact size they can be used effec- • Painted yellow, powder-coated
tively even in the most confined spaces.

250 kg 500 kg

750 - 6,000 kg

250 - 500 kg 750 - 6,000 kg

Safe working Dimensions Hook dimension Leverage Weight Standard Surcharge


load at with
rated load 1.5 m lift Item 1.5 m per m
No. height of lift height of lift
A E F J L B C D
[kg] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg]
250 240 160 72 98 77 20 21 14 25 2.2 812 071 0
500 282 160 104 116 80 17 24 12 25 2.8 822 239 0
750 350 290 110 150 90 24 25 17 14 7 812 072 0
1,500 420 410 120 175 100 28 30 21 22 11 812 073 0
02_08EN.FM

3,000 520 410 190 200 115 42 38 31 34 21 812 074 0


6,000 700 410 200 210 120 55 45 36 35 30 812 075 0

64
Aluminium lever hoists
J
F L
The enclosed housing, hand lever and D
handwheel are made of high-tensile aluminium

B
alloy. The precise needle bearings ensure that
little effort is required to lift loads.

This lever hoist is indispensable wherever low


weight is important, e.g. in service vehicles.

A
The standard freewheeling facility permits the

E
load chain to be pulled through in both direc-
tions for fast attachment of the load.

C
ha035v

Safe Dimensions Hook dimension Weight Aluminium Surcharge

at rated load
work- with

Leverage
ing load 1.5 m lift Item 1.5 m per m
No. height of height of
A E F J L B C D lift lift
[kg] [mm] [daN] [kg]
750 315 300 106 154 105 20 22 14 16 6.4 812 266 0
1,000 325 300 109 154 105 23 23 16 22 6.6 812 267 0
1,500 380 300 138 177 103 27 26 20 18 10 812 268 0
3,000 455 400 168 212 118 36 33 24 28 18 812 269 0

Safety Advice _
When using the lever hoists on pages 64-66, please observe
minimum load (approx. 3% of rated load)!

D 85 annealed cast iron lever hoists D 95 annealed cast iron lever hoists

Sturdy design: enclosed housing, cover, The basic technical characteristics


D 85 handwheel and bottom block made of correspond to model D 85. Their lower dead-
high-quality annealed cast iron. weight and the extremely small dimension
between upper and lower hooks are a
Ideal for moving heavy machinery and convincing argument for their use.
securing heavy loads. Facilitates laying pipes
D 95 in shafts and trenches. The automatic load pressure brake prevents
the brake being released unintentionally even
if the load should swing. Ideal for securing
Design with slipping clutch and freewheeling loads.
facility on request.
The chain freewheeling facility is a standard
Version with roller chain (type C 85) available feature.
on request.
Design with slipping clutch on request.

Model Safe Dimensions Weight Standard Surcharge


at rated load

working with
Leverage

load (See UNO for sketch) 1.5 m Item 1.5 m per m


lift No. height of height of lift
A C E F J L lift
[kg] [mm] [daN] [kg]
D 85 750 322 27 443 112 142 103 38 8.2 812 905 0
1,500 389 30 443 189 171 99 31 16.3 812 906 0
3,000 403 34 570 197 179 103 40 19.6 812 907 0
6,000 532 46 570 197 218 142 42 32.9 812 908 0
10,000 805 54 570 305 218 142 37 60 812 909 0
02_08EN.FM

D 95 1,500 314 23 315 156 141 91.5 27 9.9 812 915 0


3,000 376 25 443 189 177 105 49 16.5 812 916 0

65
Hoists

New
53/03 lever hoists - superior quality

The best lever hoist ever!

Lever hoists are fully adaptable and can be used effectively for lifting, pulling and clamping Also available on request:
applications. They are ideal for moving and positioning heavy machinery, installing overhead • Visual and acoustic overload display on
cables and securing loads. Thanks to their compact size they can be used effectively even in the lever
most confined spaces. • Apparatus protected by slipping clutch

The housing is made of aluminium for 250 kg and 500 kg, S.W.L. , of sheet steel for 800 to 9,000 kg
S.W.L.

Technical features
• Long life, low maintenance requirement thanks to precise matching of the individual
components
• Extremely short lever lengths and low deadweight make for particularly simply handling
• Non-slip hand wheel
• Rubber handle screw-locked STAHLplus Info _ All lever
• Reinforced hook safety latch hoists are suitable for lashing
• Automatically functioning enclosed load pressure brake loads in acc. with EN 12195.
• Freewheeling facility for pulling the unloaded chains through fast
• Easy release of brake, particularly when used for securing loads
• Housing for 250 - 500 kg: made of aluminium, light and corrosion-resistant;
800 - 9,000 kg: made of robust sheet steel
• Galvanised load chain in acc. with EN 818-7
• 3-year warranty

Safe Chain Dimensions Weight Standard Surcharge


height of lift

Leverage at

working (standard
No. of falls

rated load
Housing

Item Standard per m


Standard

load height of
lift) No. lifting height of lift
A B C D E F G H height
[kg] [m] [daN] [mm] [mm] [kg]
250 Alu- 1 1.0 20 3.2 x 9.0 74 88 32 150 62 11 21 205 1.6 822 012 0
500 minium 1 24 4.2 x 12.2 93 100 35.5 180 68 12 24.5 246 2.6 822 013 0
800 Steel 1 1.5 29 5.6 x 15.8 119 144 36 245 97 14 24 280 5.7 822 014 0
1,600 1 36 7.1 x 20.1 126 159 43 265 100 19 32 335 8.0 822 016 0
2,500 1 34 9.0 x 24.8 150 173 47 265 102 21 37 375 11.2 822 017 0
3,200 1 37 10.0 x 28.1 159 190 50 415 112 24.5 39 395 15.0 822 018 0
02_08EN.FM

6,300 2 38 10.0 x 28.1 217 190 60 415 112 34 50 540 26.0 822 019 0
9,000 3 39 10.0 x 28.1 304 190 85 415 112 42 73 680 40.0 822 020 0

66
STKX adjustable beam clamp

With the STKX beam clamp, suspension points


can quickly be provided on I-beams for hoists,
sheaves and loads. The central spindle
mechanism makes it simple to mount it firmly
and securely on a beam. The spindle can be
locked in position.

Technical features
• Secure and fast attachment to steel beams
• Extremely low overall height thanks to
built-in suspension bar STAHLplus Info _
• Positive locking connections relieve the YRC reinforced beam clamp
load on beam flanges available on request.
• Adjustable gripper range facilitates variable
applications
• Operating temperature range -10° to +50°C
• Also available with suspension shackle on YRC
request

Safety Advice _
The STKX beam clamps
must only be used as an
attachment point on an exi-
sting steel structure or a Safe Model A B C D E F G H Weight Item
crane girder. work- min. min. No.
ing load max. max.
Only clamps as shown on [kg] [mm] [kg]
pages 102 ff. may be used 1,000 STKX1 75-230 186-350 84 4 215 115-150 146-198 20 3.8 812 133 0
as lifting clamps for trans- 2,000 STKX2 75-230 186-350 94 6 215 115-150 147-200 20 4.6 812 134 0
porting girders. 3,000 STKX3 80-320 232-455 122 8 255 180-225 220-285 22 9.2 812 135 0
5,000 STKX5 90-310 242-445 129 10 255 180-225 222-285 28 11 812 136 0
10,000 STKX10 90-320 268-480 146 14 275 175-220 215-280 38 17.2 812 137 0

SRKX rolling clamp

1,000 to 3,000 kg

Easy-to-fit assembly aid for attaching and


moving loads along beams.

Can quickly be adapted to the beam width by


turning the central spindle.

Locking lever ensures secure positioning.


Spindle and shackles galvanised to prevent
corrosion.

Safe Model A B C D E H I L O Weight Item


working No.
load

[kg] [mm] [kg]


1,000 SRKX1 82-109 60-150 258 26 22 20 53 160 46 2.5 812 274 0
2,000 SRKX2 60-155 75-200 344 42 20 30 71.5 260 60 9.9 812 275 0
136-191 200-300 444 42 20 30 71.5 260 60 10.3 812 276 0
02_08EN.FM

3,000 SRKX3 128-171 75-200 375 50 22 30.5 95.5 310 80 17.5 812 277 0
150-212 200-320 495 50 22 30.5 95.5 310 80 19.5 812 278 0

67
Hoists

AF automatic brake cable winches, galvanised

The AF automatic brake cable winches for hoisting and towing are supplied
as standard with a gear cover. Safety Advice _
Transporting persons with these
cable winches is not permitted!
Technical features
• High quality spur gear
• Automatic brake
• Cable strength 1770 N/mm², type of cable in compliance with EN 12385-4 STAHLplus Info _
• Mechanism group in compliance with DIN 15020: 1Em Please do not forget the wire
• Surface treatment: galvanised yellow (except for 4AF Mini, powder-coated, black) rope when ordering!
• Effort on hand crank for the hoisting forces given: 20 daN
• N.B. Type 30 AFD does not have GS approval

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6

Automatic brake cable winches Model 4 AFMD 4 AFD 6 AFD 8 AFD 12 AFD 20 AFD 30 AFD
- galvanised
Towing force on 30% incline, rolling load [kg] 350 500 750 850 1500 2500 3664
Hoisting force lowest cable position [kg] 190 340 500 650 900 1180 1994
Hoisting force highest cable position [kg] 80 190 240 270 490 650 1419
Fig. 1 2 3 4 5 - 6
Drum Ø [mm] 27 40 45 54 63 76 80
Min. load for braking function [kg] 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
Hand crank length [mm] 155 155 200 250 250 290 290
Ratio 1:2.57 1:2.57 1:3.5 1:4.85 1:9.71 1:9.71 1:21.85
Dimensions with handcrank (LxWxH) [mm] 195x211x96 197x250x96 240x265x128 290x265x167 295x294x170 330x294x170 345x365x180
Max. drum capacity DIN 15020 (Ø [mm] x L [m]) 3x8 4 x 12 5 x 13 6 x 19 7 x 13 8 x 10 9 x 13
Min. breaking force of rope [kg] 583 1028 1606 2110 2880 3760 4406
Net weight approx. [kg] 2.2 2.7 3.7 5.5 7.4 7.8 13.7
Item No. 812 883 0 812 884 0 812 885 0 812 886 0 812 887 0 822 240 0 822 241 0
Price on request

Accessories required
Cable with load hook Ø [mm] 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-Length [m] 8 12 14 19 13 10 13
Item No. 812 893 0 812 894 0 812 895 0 812 896 0 812 897 0 822 242 0 822 243 0
02_08EN.FM

Price on request
Technical data and description are not binding. Subject to technical modifications.

68
AFI stainless steel (INOX) automatic brake cable winches

The particularly corrosion-resistant AFI automatic brake cable winches for hoisting
and towing are made of stainless steel. They are supplied as standard with a gear cover.
STAHLplus Info _
Compact hoisting winches, ratchet
winches and automatic brake belt
Technical features
winches and rope winches with free-
• High quality spur gear
wheel drum available on request.
• Automatic brake
• Cable strength 1770 N/mm², type of cable in compliance with EN 12385-4 We also supply off-standard designs
• Mechanism group in compliance with DIN 15020: 1Em for particular requirements.
• Corrosion-proof, made of stainless steel Please enquire!
• Effort on hand crank for the hoisting forces given: 20 daN

Theatre winch, driven by battery-powered screwdriver Winch with belt Worm gear winch with load pressure brake

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

Automatic brake cable winches Model 4 AFMID 4 AFID 6 AFID 8 AFID 12 AFID
- stainless steel
Towing force on 30% incline, rolling load [kg] 450 500 750 870 1500
Hoisting force lowest cable position [kg] 190 340 500 650 900
Hoisting force highest cable position [kg] 80 180 240 270 490
Fig. 1 - 2 - 3
Drum Ø [mm] 27 36 45 54 63
Min. load for braking function [kg] 10 10 10 10 10
Hand crank length [mm] 165 165 200 255 255
Ratio 1:2.57 1:2.57 1:3.5 1:4.85 1:9.71
Dimensions with handcrank (LxWxH) [mm] 202x245x96 195x211x96 232x265x130 290x270x167 295x294x170
Max. drum capacity DIN 15020 (Ø [mm] x L [m]) 3x8 4 x 12 5 x 14 6 x 19 7 x 13
Min. breaking force of rope [kg] 583 1028 1606 2110 2880
Net weight [kg] 2.2 2.8 4.4 5.2 7.6
Item No. 812 888 0 812 889 0 812 890 0 812 891 0 812 892 0
Price on request

Accessories required
Stainless steel cable with load hook Ø [mm] 3 4 5 6 8
-Length [m] 8 12 14 19 13
Item No. 812 579 0 812 580 0 812 581 0 812 582 0 812 583 0
02_08EN.FM

Price on request
Technical data and description are not binding. Subject to technical modifications.

69
Hoists

43/86E electric cable winch

The electric cable winch is a highly professional multipurpose winch. It is particularly


appreciated in the building trade.
It is available optionally for single phase A.C. current or three-phase current.
Pneumatic versions available on request.

The winch meets all relevant safety standards and corresponds to European regulations,
in particular machinery directives 89-392, 91-368.

Technical features Accessories Item


• Compact, robust construction No.
Cable
• Maintenance-free ball bearings -Ø 4 mm 822 109 0
• Mechanism group in acc. with DIN 15020: -Ø 6 mm 822 110 0
1 Bm -Ø 8 mm 822 111 0
• 230 V A.C. current or 230/400 V three-phase -Ø 11 mm 822 112 0
current, 50 Hz Load hook pressed onto cable
• IP 54 protection, isolation class B -500 kg 822 140 0
• Overload protection from 1,000 daN tensile -1,000 kg 822 141 0
force on cable upwards -2,000 kg 822 143 0
• German certificate of origin

Safe working No. of Cable Effective cable length Cable Weight Single phase A.C. current 230 V, 50 Hz 3-phase current 230/400 V, 50 Hz
load cable Ø speed without
(1st cable layer) layers 1st cable Last cable cable Output Cable winch Cable winch Output Cable winch
layer layer complete*1 w/o cable and access. w/o cable and access.
[kg] [mm] [m] [m/min] [kg] [kW] Item No. Item No. [kW] Item No.
125 4 4 6.4 (5) *2 32 (30) *2 11.0 25 0.37 822 091 0 822 103 0 0.37 822 097 0
250 4 4 7.1 (5.6) *2 35 (34) *2 7.0 35 0.37 822 092 0 822 104 0 0.37 822 098 0
500 4 6 5.7 (4.8) *2 30 (29) *2 4.0 38 0.37 822 093 0 822 105 0 0.37 822 099 0
990 3 8 8.4 (6.8) *2 30 (29) *2 6.0 53 1.3 822 094 0 822 106 0 1.3 822 100 0
1,000 3 8 8.4 (6.8) *2 30 (29) *2 6.0 53 1.3 822 095 0 822 107 0 1.3 822 101 0
2,000 3 11 8.0 (6.3) *2 30 (29) *2 6.0 150 1.3 822 096 0 822 108 0 2.6 822 102 0
*1 with 30 m cable, hook, control pendant and 3.0 m power supply cable
*2 with grooved drum

Safe working Dimensions


load A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B B1 C C1 C2 D D1 D2
(1st cable layer) *3 *4 *4
[kg] [mm]
125 205 165 171 35 43 135 27 13 405 375 215 140 4 60 130 9
(195) (230) (200)
250 260 165 222 34 78 150 32 15 405 375 250 140 6 60 150 11
(195)
500 260 165 222 34 82 145 33 15 405 375 250 140 6 76 150 11
(195)
990 345 216 289 45 97 200 48 17 575 535 270 155 10 108 180 13
1,000 (240)
2,000 440 216 358 61 171 200 69 20 600 550 385 171 15 146 245 17
(240)
*3 Dimensions in ( ) for version for single-phase A.C. current
*4 Dimensions in ( ) refer to side cheek on bearing side

Off-standard versions

We can only show you


STAHLplus Info _
a small selection of
When ordering, please state
winches in this cata-
length of cable and load hook
logue.
required.
Over and above this, we
can supply the right
winch for nearly every
requirement.

Tell us what you need -


we will advise you and
quote you a suitable
winch!
02_08EN.FM

70
238/99 worm drive manual winch

The worm drive manual winches are extremely versatile for use in workshops, production Accessories Item
areas and on building sites. for 238/99 and 260/76 No.
They are extremely robust and long-lasting.
Cable
-Ø 4 mm 822 130 0
-Ø 6 mm 822 131 0
Technical features -Ø 8 mm 822 132 0
• Robust design -Ø 9 mm 822 133 0
-Ø 10 mm 822 134 0
• Great cable lengths possible -Ø 11 mm 822 135 0
• Crank removable, length individually adjustable -Ø 12 mm 822 136 0
• Design in accordance with DIN 15020 -Ø 13 mm 822 137 0
-Ø 18 mm 822 138 0
• Cable simply attached with cable clamp
• Two speeds from 2,000 kg by means of spur gear
• German certificate of origin Load hook pressed onto cable
-500 kg 822 140 0
-1,000 kg 822 141 0
-1,600 kg 822 142 0
Available on request: -2,000 kg 822 143 0
• Hot-dip galvanised version -3,200 kg 822 144 0
• Separator for two rope lead-offs -5,000 kg 822 145 0

You will find explosion-protected manual


winches on page 96 of this catalogue.

Safe No. of Cable Dimensions Effort Lift per Manual winch


working load cable required crankshaft (without cable and hook)
(1st cable (top cable layers max. Ø at rotation Weight Item
layer) layer) length rated load No.
A A4 B B1 C
[kg] [m] [mm] [mm] [daN] [mm] [kg]
250 87 13 100 4 293 350 410 121 170 5 44 13 822 113 0
500 220 9 68 6 313 350 440 138 190 9 42 16 822 114 0
1,000 534 7 63 8 348 350 490 164 260 14 25 26 822 115 0
1,500 875 5 40 10 378 350 490 164 263 20 24 28 822 116 0
2,000 1,133 6 55 11 410 380 740 208 419 12 11/21 60 822 117 0
02_08EN.FM

3,000 1,733 6 64 13 436 380 825 260 550 17 8/16 78 822 118 0
5,000 3,435 4 35 18 436 380 865 298 613 34 9/18 115 822 119 0

71
Hoists

260/76 spur drive manual winches

The spur drive manual winches are extremely versatile for use in workshops, production areas Accessories Item
and on building sites. They are for 238/99 and 260/76 No.
extremely robust and long-lasting.
Cable
-Ø 4 mm 822 130 0
-Ø 6 mm 822 131 0
Technical features -Ø 8 mm 822 132 0
• Robust, practically enclosed sheet steel housing -Ø 9 mm 822 133 0
-Ø 10 mm 822 134 0
• Mechanism group to DIN 15020: 1Dm -Ø 11 mm 822 135 0
• Foldaway crank from 2,000 kg -Ø 12 mm 822 136 0
• Automatically functioning load pressure brake -Ø 13 mm 822 137 0
-Ø 18 mm 822 138 0
• Improved cable life thanks to large drum diameter
• German certificate of origin
Load hook pressed onto cable
-500 kg 822 140 0
-1,000 kg 822 141 0
-1,600 kg 822 142 0
-2,000 kg 822 143 0
-3,200 kg 822 144 0
You will find explosion-protected manual -5,000 kg 822 145 0
winches on page 96 of this catalogue.

Rope lead-off
I for 300 - 500 kg
II for 1,000 - 2,000 kg

Safe working load Wire rope Dimensions Efort Lift per Manual winch
required crankshaft (without rope and hook)
(1st layer) (top layer) Max. Ø at rotation Weight Item
length rated load No.
A B B1 C C4
[kg] [m] [mm] [daN] [mm] [kg]
300 200 11.8 6 200 270 100 300 265 19 74 10 822 120 0
500 335 10.8 6 200 270 100 300 265 21 30 10 822 121 0
02_08EN.FM

1,000 770 12.0 8 290 295 125 290 265 18 18 15 822 122 0
2,000 1,690 9.0 12 230 540 240 340 265 32 16 23 822 123 0

72
Sheaves, wire rope blocks and steel jacks

An excerpt from our extended accessories programme. Please enquire!

Wire rope blocks

With revolving hook conforming to DIN 15401 with safety latch, or GG/R: with grey cast iron sheave and slide bearing
swivel eye conforming to DIN 82006. (100-125 mm in polyamide PA6-6)

The wire rope blocks are available in two versions: ST/K: with steel sheave and ball bearing

No. 31 No. 36 No. 41 No. 46

No. 161 sheave with support, with rectangular footplate

With steel housing, painted.


Rope sheaves made of grey cast iron with drilled hub bore.

Sheaves with supports with transverse plates are also available


on request.
Please enquire.

External sheave Ø [mm] 80 100 130

Safe working load [kg] 125 130 150

Ø at base of groove [mm] 67 83 108


Width of groove [mm] 9 11 13
Depth of groove [mm] 6.5 8.5 11
Width of rim [mm] 13 16 19
Width of base plate [mm] 40 40 45
Length of base plate [mm] 130 142 190
Thickness of base plate [mm] 6 6 6
Ø of bolt holes [mm] 10 10 10
Distance between holes [mm] 96 108 156
Overall height [mm] 94 115 149
Weight approx. [kg] 0.57 0.73 1.40

Item No. 812 491 0 812 492 0 812 493 0

Price
02_08EN.FM

73
Hoists

No. 180 sheave with support

With housing of folded sheet steel, painted.

Rope sheaves made of steel with maintenance-free ball bearings,


groove turned.

No. 829 wire rope guide sheave

For wall-mounted and portable windlasses. Steel housing, painted.

Rope sheaves made of grey cast iron, hub boring drilled,


groove turned.

STAHLplus Info _
Wire rope guide sheaves are also available
with swivel eyes or roller bearings.
Please enquire.

DIN steel jacks

Steel jacks conforming to DIN 7355, with lifting steel housing. N.B.:
Other versions, e.g. with large footplate, on request.
They are available in 2 versions:

SIKU: Version with safety crank and folding handle


RAKU: Version with ratchet safety crank and folding handle

STAHLplus Info _ All steel jacks available as


stainless steel version (all components in
stainless steel) for food industry and chemical
industrie.
Price on request

SIKU RAKU
Safe Height Item Item
Headroom

working of No. No.


Weight
Height
of lift

load claw in
lowest
position
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,500 725 350 70 12 812 805 0 812 810 0
3,000 725 350 75 20 812 806 0 812 811 0
5,000 725 300 70 24 812 807 0 812 812 0
10,000 800 300 90 42 812 808 0 812 813 0
15,000 800 340 95 58 812 809 0 812 814 0
02_08EN.FM

74
Cable pullers Technical features

This portable equipment for pulling, lifting, • Housing made of high-tensile aluminium
lowering, clamping and securing loads over alloy
long distances was developed especially for
applications in industry, in particular civil 800 kg • Compact construction with low deadweight
engineering, power line construction,
shipbuilding, oil refineries, etc. • Overload protection by means of shear pin
It is simple and safe to use. in forward lever. Spare pins are to be found
in the operating lever or carrying handle and
The supply comprises the cable puller with can be replaced under full load, i.e. without
handlever and an original wire rope with removing the load from the rope
coloured strand.
• Simple rope guide mechanism
for rugged operating condi-
tions • Special wire rope with steel core and
6 strands - one coloured - pressed into a
safety hook at one end and tapered at the
other for easy threading.

1600 kg • Low-wear, parallel mounted clamping


system avoids wear on the rope by
distributing the surface pressure evenly

• Long stroke path = high working speed

• Easy to clean

Off-standard design
S.W.L. b h l m s t Motor-driven multi-purpose puller for
[kg] [mm]
transport of material and persons.
800 21 20 110 20 17 78
1,600 23 21 120 23 18 86 Portable, ideal if place of application changes
3,200 32 29 163 32 22 116 3200 kg frequently. Please enquire!

C
B

A ha019v
C1

Version Safe Lever pull at Rope Lever Wire rope Dimensions Standard Weight Item Price
working load rated load advance length diameter rope without No.
* per double length wire rope with standard
stroke ** rope length
A B C C1
[kg] [daN] [mm] [m] [kg]
Profi 800 24 60 800 8.4 430 240 - 60 20 7 812 206 0
1,600 30 60 790/1190 11.5 545 270 97 72 20 14 812 207 0
3,200 50 40 790/1190 16.0 680 330 110 91 10 21 812 208 0
* With overload protection = shear pin in forwards lever, shears off at 25% overload.
Spare shear pins in operating lever or carrying handle
** Prices for spare parts (incl hook) on request.
STAHLplus Info _ Professional line cable
pullers are approved by the Employers’
Liability Insurance Association for
02_08EN.FM

transporting passengers.

75
Hoists

Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 0.4 to 3 kg

Technical features
• Cast aluminium housing
• Cable: steel wire
• Low-friction cable drive
• Adjustable stop for upward stroke
• Additional safety suspension mounting
• Insulated link for snap hooks
• Without locking facility

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working cable No.
load length
[kg] [m] [kg]
0.4-1.0 1.6 0.6 812 300 0
1.0-2.0 0.6 812 301 0
2.0-3.0 0.7 812 302 0

Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 2 to 8 kg

Technical features
• Cast aluminium housing
• Cable: steel wire
• Low-friction cable drive
• Adjustable stop for upward stroke
• Additional safety suspension mounting
• Insulated link for snap hooks
• Without locking facility

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working cable No.
load length
[kg] [m] [kg]
2.0-4.0 2.0 2.0 812 303 0
4.0-6.0 2.3 812 304 0
6.0-8.0 2.5 812 305 0

Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 2 to 14 kg

Technical features
• Cast aluminium housing
• Cable: steel wire
• Low-friction cable drive
• Adjustable stop for upward stroke
• Additional safety suspension mounting
• Insulated link for snap hooks
• Without locking facility

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working cable No.
load length
[kg] [m] [kg]
2.0-4.0 2.5 2.9 812 815 0
4.0-6.0 3.2 812 816 0
6.0-8.0 3.5 812 817 0
02_08EN.FM

8.0-10.0 3.7 812 306 0


10.0-14.0 4.0 812 307 0

76
Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 0.4 to 6.8 kg

Technical features
• Housing: steel
• Drum: steel
• Cable: steel, galvanised
• With locking facility

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working load cable length No.
[kg] [m] [kg]
0.4-2.3 2.4 2.0 812 818 0
2.0-4.5 3.6 812 819 0
3.5-6.8 4.1 812 820 0

Balancers, S.W.L. from 4.5 to 17 kg

Technical features
• Housing, cover and drum: plastic
• Cable: steel wire; cable length adjustable
• Suspension: revolving and adjustable hook; snap
hook
• Cable intake: elastic and adjustable with automatic
locking facility
• Load setting: infinitely variable
• Drop safeguard facility in the event of spring break
• Integrated locking facility for locking the cable drum
• See page 95 for explosion-protected balancers

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working load cable length No.
[kg] [m] [kg]
4.5-7.0 2.0 3.3 812 821 0
6.0-10.0 3.4 812 822 0
9.0-14.0 3.6 812 823 0
13.0-17.0 3.8 812 824 0

Balancers, S.W.L. from 10 to 25 kg

Technical features
• Housing made of aluminium, extremely sturdy
• Cable: steel wire
• Cable drive: low-friction
• Tapered drum body mounted in ball bearings
• Fine balance in lifting range with infinitely variable
load setting
• Suspension: revolving safety hook with safety latch
• Drop safeguard facility in the event of spring break

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working load cable length No.
[kg] [m] [kg]
10.0-14.0 2.0 5.5 832 000 0
14.0-18.0 6.6 832 001 0
02_08EN.FM

18.0-22.0 8.0 832 002 0


22.0-25.0 8.5 832 003 0

77
Hoists

Balancers, S.W.L. from 10 to 75 kg

Technical features
• Housing made of aluminium, extremely sturdy
• Cable: steel wire
• Cable drive: roller-type mouthpiece
• Tapered drum body mounted in ball bearings
• Further information see 75 to 105 kg

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working load cable length No.
[kg] [m] [kg]
10.0-15.0 2.0 10.3 812 825 0
15.0-20.0 10.6 812 826 0
20.0-25.0 11.2 812 827 0
25.0-30.0 11.5 812 828 0
30.0-35.0 11.8 812 829 0
35.0-45.0 12.4 812 830 0
45.0-55.0 12.5 812 831 0
55.0-65.0 13.6 812 832 0
65.0-75.0 14.5 812 833 0

Balancers, S.W.L. from 75 to 105 kg

Technical features
• Cast aluminium housing
• Cable: steel wire
• Cable drive: roller-type mouthpiece
• Tapered drum body mounted in ball bearings
• Fine balance in lifting range with infinitely variable
load setting
• Suspension mounting: safety swivel hook with latch
• Drop safeguard facility in the event of spring break
• Insulated design (against ground current)
• Locking facility (for securing the load at the required
height)

Safe Unwound Weight Item


working load cable length No.
[kg] [m] [kg]
75.0-90.0 2.0 17.3 812 834 0
90.0-105.0 18.0 812 835 0

Spring-action cable reeling drums


No. of cores Wound Voltage at Item Technical features
Weight

Cable length collector No. • Plastic housing


cross- • For mounting on wall or ceiling
section
[mm²] [m] [kg] • IP 42 protection
1 x 2.5 15.0 1x 10 A, 42 V 4.0 812 286 0 • Voltage max. 500 V
1x6 14.0 1x 20 A, 42 V 812 287 0 • Line: H05VV-F, complying with
1 x 16 8.5 1x 40 A, 42 V 812 288 0 CEI 20-35 standards
2x1 14.0 2x 10 A, 42 V 812 289 0
2 x 1.5 11.0 2x 10 A, 42 V 812 290 0 • 1.5 m line length outside drum
2 x 2.5 8.5 2x 10 A, 42 V 812 291 0 • Operating temperature range
3x1 12.5 2x 10 A + PE 812 292 0 -5° C to +40° C
3 x 1.5 10.0 2x 10 A + PE 812 402 0 • Manufactured in compliance with
3 x 2.5 7.0 2x 10 A + PE 812 293 0
4x1 10.5 3x 10 A + PE 4.5 812 294 0 IEC 1242 and 1316 standards
4 x 1.5 8.0 3x 10 A + PE 812 295 0 • Current at collector: 10 A
4 x 2.5 5.5 3x 10 A + PE 812 296 0 • Built-in overheating protection
5x1 7.5 4x 10 A + PE 812 297 0 • Double earthing contacts
5 x 1.5 5.5 4x 10 A + PE 812 406 0
7x1 6.0 7x 10 A 5.0 812 298 0
7 x 1.5 3.0 7x 10 A 812 299 0
02_08EN.FM

8x1 5.5 8x 10 A 812 308 0


8 x 1.5 3.0 8x 10 A 812 309 0

78
STAHL CraneSystems is distinguished
by long years of experience and
competence on the field of explosion
protection. STAHLplus offers a selec-
tion of products and systems from
the wide range of equipment available.

Explosion protection

79
Explosion protection

European explosion protection

ATEX
Explosive atmospheres

Directive 94/9/EC Directive 99/92/EC

Harmonisation of statutory regulations of member states for equipment Minimum regulations for improving the health and safety of employees
and protective systems intended for use in areas subject to explosion who might be endangered by explosive atmospheres.
hazards.

Marking of equipment
for gas II 2 G Ex de IIB T4 Electrical explosion protection

ll 2 G ck T4 Mechanical explosion protection

for dust II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP66 T120° Electrical explosion protection

ll 2 D ck T120° Mechanical explosion protection


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Equipment group 6 Explosion group


I = mining (given only for equipment for gas Ex area)
II = all other areas I = methane (mining)
IIA = propane
2 Equipment category IIB = ethylene
1 = can be used in Zone 0 or in Zone 20 IIC = (most hazardous group, e.g. hydrogen)
2 = can be used in Zone 1 or in Zone 21
3 = can be usedr in Zone 2 or in Zone 22 7 Temperature classes
M1 = mining (comparable to Zone 0 and 1) (Maximum permissible temperature of a surface which may be exposed to
M2 = mining (comparable to Zone 2) gas)
T1 = 450°C
3 Atmosphere T2 = 300°C
G = Gas T3 = 200°C
D = Dust T4 = 135°C
T5 = 100°C
4 Explosion-protected device T6 = 85°C

5 Type of protection 8 IP code


5.1 Electrical explosion protection in areas subject to gas explosions 1st figure: protection against contact
e = increased safety 5 = dust protected
d = flameproof enclosure 6 = dustproof
px = pressurised apparatus for use in Zone 1 und 2,
indoors, non-explosive atmosphere 2nd figure: protection against water
py = pressurised apparatus for use in Zone 1, indoors Zone 2 0 = no protection
pz = pressurised apparatus for use in Zone 2 1 = vertical drips
ia = intrinsic safety (required for Zone 0) 2 = water drips onto equipment at 15° inclination
ib = intrinsic safety (adequate for Zone 1 and 2) 3 = spray water
ma = encapsulation (required for Zone 0) 4 = splash water
mb = encapsulation (adequatefor Zone 1 and 2) 5 = water jet
nA = non-sparking equipment (Zone 2) 6 = temporary immersion
nC = sparking equipment with protected contacts (Zone 2) 7 = permanent immersion
nL = restricted energy equipment (Zone 2)
9 Maximum surface temperature
5.2 Electrical explosion protection in areas with combustible dusts (given only for equipment for dust Ex area).
tD A21 = protection by housing (in compliance with procedure A for Zone 1)
tD B21 = protection by housing (in compliance with procedur B for Zone 21) Maximum permissible temperature of a surface which may be exposed to
pD = pressurised enclosure dust.
iaD = intrinsic safety (required for Zone 20) Assessment by user:
ibD = intrinsic safety (required for Zone 21 and 22) a) Limit temperature 1 = 2/3 of minimum ignition temperature of
maD = encapsulation (required for Zone 20) dust present
mbD = encapsulation (adequate for Zone 21 und 22) b) Limit temperature 2 = minimum glow temperature of dust present
minus 75k (applicable for layers up to 5 mm).
5.2 Mechanical explosion protection The lower limit temperature must be above the specified max. surface
c = constructional safety temperature of the equipment.
d = flameproof enclosure
03_08EN.FM

p = pressurised enclosure
k = liquid encapsulation
fr = restricted breathing enclosure (Zone 2 only)

80
Explosion-protected material handling equipment from the EXperts

STAHL CraneSystems is a leading and competent partner for solutions in gas and dust explosion protection world-wide.
This is underlined by numerous approvals for Zone 1- from the Federal Physico-Technical Institute in Braunschweig and
from other test institutes, e.g. in Belgium, Canada, Poland, Switzerland, Czech Republic and Hungary.

STAHL CraneSystems can always offer an economical solution whatever the explosion protection requirements may be.
The table below summarises zone classifications and equipment allocation (equipment category in accordance with
94/9/EC).

Gases, mists, vapours Explosive atmosphere is ATEX Ex programme from STAHL CraneSystems
present:
Zone 0 → Category II 1 G constantly or for long periods

Zone 1 → Category II 2 G occasionally SHex, ASex wire rope hoist, STex chain hoists,
Zone 21 → Category II 2 D crane components
Zone 2 → Category II 3 G rarely and for short periods SHex, ASex wire rope hoist, STex chain hoists,
Zone 22 → Category II 3 D crane components

The full range

cannot be shown here.


This catalogue contains only a small selection from the extensive
range of explosion-protected hoists and material handling
components.

Further information - fast and comprehensive

We would be pleased to send you further information in print - just ask


at www.stahlcranes.com.

We would also be pleased to visit you for a personal discussion -


naturally free of charge and without obligation!

Product informations Broschures Cutaway photos or posters

Explosion- Explosion-protec- SH ex wire rope SH ex wire rope hoist programme, Zone 1 and Zone 2
protected wire ted crane hoist programme
rope hoists components
Ex-poster

Explosion- KT 2000ex small ST ex chain hoist


protected crane technology programme
03_08EN.FM

chain hoists (as download only)

81
Explosion protection

Explosion-protected cranes

When it is a question of the safety of man and machine in hazardous


areas, STAHL CraneSystems is pioneering, forceful and systematic.

With our experience and our know-how from many decades, our own
fundamental research and our own R&D, with approvals from the
Federal Physico-Technical Institute (PTB) and other test institutes in
many countries, STAHL CraneSystems occupies a special position in
this field.

All components of a crane or hoist are strictly from our own


production, from motor and brake to control and switchgear.

This ensures optimum, high-quality explosion protection.

The new rigorous ATEX regulations on mechanical explosion


protection are of course met.

STAHL CraneSytems was the first manufacturer of overhead material


flow technology to implement the ATEX directive 94/9/EC in its
production programme.

ATEX
Single girder overhead travelling crane (5000 kg S.W.L.) operated by radio
remote control in a hazardous area in a chemical plant. Transport of hoppers
over several levels.

• Experienced
the world's leading specialist for explosion protection engineering

• Strict
everything from one supplier and from our own production

• Pioneering
design in compliance with ATEX in certified quality

• High quality
extremely safe and accurate

• Comprehensive
technology for use in Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22

References
- Linde AG, Höllriegelskreuth
- Wacker-Chemie GmbH, Burghausen
- BASF AG, Ludwigshafen
- Bayer AG, Leverkusen
- Hoechst AG, Frankfurt
- Degussa AG, Hanau und Frankfurt
- Clariant, Burgkirchen
- InfraServ, Burgkirchen
- Qatar Gas, Qatar
Single girder suspension crane (1600 kg S.W.L.) used for transporting compo-
nents during maintenance work outdoors. The construction of the explosion-
03_08EN.FM

protected chain hoist enables the whole crane bridge to be utilised to the full.

82
Explosion-protected crane components

The explosion-protected crane components, as specified in EC directive 94/9/EC, are designed optionally for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres in combination with gas or in combination with dust.
Make use of their sturdy design, compact construction, maintenance friendliness and reliability in conjunction with the economic advantages of
series production for your crane manufacturing.

For further information, please ask for our Product Information brochure on explosion-protected crane components.

Explosion-protected endcarriages for suspension cranes Zone 1, 21 Explosion-protected endcarriages for o.h.t. cranes Zone 1, 2, 21, 22

On the basis of KEHex endcarriages for suspension cranes, modern On the basis of K.Lex (n) endcarriages for overhead travelling cranes,
suspension cranes up to an S.W.L. of 10,000 kg and a span of 20 m can modern single girder and double girder overhead travelling cranes up
be manufactured. to an S.W.L. of 50,000 kg and a span of 30 m can be manufactured.

The explosion-protected suspension crane endcarriages KEHex com- The explosion-protected overhead travelling crane endcarriages K.Lex (n)
ply with the equipment group and category of the EC directive 94/9/EC comply with the equipment group and category of the EC directive
(ATEX): 94/9/EC (ATEX):
For gas: ll 2G or For gas: ll 2G, ll 3G or
For dust: ll 2D For dust: ll 2D, ll 3D

Explosion-protected travel drives Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 Explosion-protected crane electrics Zone 1, 2, 21, 22

STAHL CraneSystems travel drives are adapted to the requirements of In the section on explosion-protected crane electrics, STAHL Crane-
material handling. Systems offers controls, power supply systems with accessories and
control pendants as are required for crane manufacturing.
The explosion-protected travel drives comply with the equipment
group and category of the EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
03_08EN.FM

For gas: ll 2G, ll 3G or These components are taken from STAHL CraneSystems’ wide range of
For dust: ll 2D, ll 3D standard cranes.

83
Explosion protection

Explosion-protected small crane technology

STAHL CraneSystems has developed the wordl’s first and only small crane system in
compliance with ATEX for Zone 1, 2, 21 and 22.

The basis is provided by the innovative KT2000 small crane system. This high-quality modular
system is specially designed for the S.W.L. range up to 2000 kg. The basic element of the KT2000
system is the maintenance-friendly, easy to inspect rail. The low-maintenance travel unit with
exterior wheels runs easily and smoothly.

Extensive modifications were carried out on the field-proven KT2000 small crane system to to
meet the requirements for explosion protection.

Light crane system with electric chain hoist in the


hazardous area in front of a paintshop in which
tractor components are coated with a special paint.
In addition to the off-standard colour for the small
crane system, the demands for an explosion-
protected design for Zone 2 are met here.

Basic structure of a single girder suspension crane with electric chain hoist in explosion-protected design

The generation of explosion-protected wire rope hoists


Two great ranges:

• SHex/ASex wire rope hoists for Zone 1 and


21, safe working load up to 100,000 kg
in type of protection Ex de IIB T4,
on request IIC T4
and Ex tD A21 IP66 T120°

• SHex n/ASex wire rope hoists for Zone 2


and 22, safe working load up to 100,000 kg,
in type of protection Ex denA IIB (llC) T3,
on request T4
and Ex tD A22 IP66 T120°

These wire rope hoists are available in various


versions, e.g. stationary hoists, hoists with
monorail trolleys, or in combination with
double-rail crabs.

Special equipment to suit your requirements:

For example:
• bronze wheels,
• bronze-coated load hooks,
03_08EN.FM

• rust-resistant wire ropes and much more.


SHex n electric wire rope hoist with "short headroom" trolley for Zone 2

84
ST_ Ex chain hoist programme Technical features
with ATEX certification
• Low headroom
STex/Zone 1 explosion-protected chain hoists permits hook height to
are the hoists presumably used most be utilised to the full
frequently in hazardous conditions. • Standard height of
STAHL CraneSystems’ comprehensive lift 3 m
explosion protection knowhow and the • 2 hoisting speeds as
assured quality are complemented by the standard
safety factor of many years of experience. • 2 travel speeds as
Now STAHL CraneSystems, market leader in standard on powered
explosion-protected hoisting and crane trolleys
technology, has the first and only complete • Powerful, robust hoist
Ex chain hoist programme complying with motor with constant
ATEX. The basis is the new ST chain hoist performance and long
programme, ranking among the most operating times
distinctive and comprehensive on offer • Newly developed
internationally. All components come from a er-gonomic 2-step
single supplier, from our own production. SHW 5ex control
pendant
In the following you will find an excerpt from • Patented safety
the wide range of explosion-protected chain slipping clutch
hoists for Zone 1. protects against
overload and limits
Chain hoists for use in Zone 21/22 and on the hoisting path
request as belt hoists. • Single-fall chains
(up to 2,500 kg) and
high-performance
motors permit great
heights of lift
• Asbestos-free
long-life brake
• Long-lasting, surface-hardened and STex electric chain hoist with electric trolley for Zone 1
galvanised load chain
• Designed in accordance with EC directive
STAHLplus Info-Service _ For more informa- 94/9/EC (ATEX) for equipment group II,
tion and dimensions, please ask for our category 2G

ATEX
Product Information on explosion-protected • Explosion protection in accordance with
chain hoists. EN: Ex de IIB T4 (standard), Ex de IIC T4 as
alternative
• Protection class to EN 60529: IP 54
• Permissible ambient temperature:
-20°C to +40°C
• Supply voltages: 380, 400, 415, 500 V, 50 Hz;
60 Hz on request
STAHLplus Info _ Every electric chain hoist is • Control voltage: 42 V (standard), 230 V as
tested with at least 25% overload. alternative

An excerpt from our standard explosion-protected range - STex/Zone1 chain hoists


Safe working load kg 250 500 1,000 1,600 2,000 2,500 3,200 5,000
Hoisting speed m/min 8/2 4/1 6/1 5/0.8 5/0.8 4/0.7 2/0.3 2/0.3
No. of chain falls 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
Output kW 0.4/0.08 0.4/0.08 1.2/0.17 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24
Duty cycle %DC 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20
Switching operations/hour c/h 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240
Travelling speed m/min 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20
Control Contactor control
Supply voltage, 3~ 400 V, 50 Hz
Stationary chain hoist

Chain hoist
with push trolley
03_08EN.FM

Chain hoist
with electric trolley
Chain hoists for use in Zone 21 / 22 on request.

85
Explosion protection

Mini pneumatic chain hoist

Mini pneumatic chain hoists in the "Economy" version can be used in


hazardous areas thanks to the drive medium of compressed air.

The low deadweight and compact dimensions make them extremely


easy to use. The are very easy to transport.

Technical features

• Extremely low headroom


• Standard height of lift 3 m
• Infinitely variable hoisting speeds
• Suitable for oil-free operation, no additional oiler necessary
• Sensitive pressbutton control with EMERGENCY STOP, control hose
2 m (standard), up to 6 m on request
• Extremely compact with minimum weight
• Insensitive to dust, humidity and temperatures from -20°C to
approx. +50°C
• Classification of mechanism group acc. to FEM: 1Bm
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
II 3 GD IIA T4 (X)
• Compressed air supply 6 bar
• New low-wear braking system
• Also suitable for towing horizontally
• Available with push trolley as an option

STAHLplus Info _ Every pneumatic hoist is


tested with at least 25% overload.

Mini pneumatic chain hoist with hook suspension

Also available with push trolley


as an option. Please enquire.

ATEX
Safe Hoisting Lowering Air consumption Dimensions Weight Item Price Surcharge
Hose size

working speed speed with rated load No. for per m


inside Ø
Output
chain falls

Air supply

load with 3 m height height of


No. of

rated no with rated Hoist- Low- A B C D E F H J M of lift lift


load load load ing ering
[kg] [kW] [m/min] [m³/min] [mm] [mm] [kg]
125 1 0.4 15 40 30 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 328 232 367 92 213 109 177 148 19 9.5 820 078 0
250 1 0.4 8 20 16 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 328 232 367 92 213 109 177 148 19 10.5 820 079 0
500 1 1.0 10 20 18 1.2 1.6 G1/2 13 458 316 505 122 292 148 234 194 28 21 820 080 0
03_08EN.FM

980 1 1.0 5 10 10 1.2 1.6 G1/2 13 458 316 505 122 292 148 234 194 28 23 820 081 0
The hoisting speeds apply with 2 m control hose. The speeds are reduced with longer hose lengths. Max. height of lift 8 m.

86
Mini manipulator
New
With the aid of the mini manipulator, loads can be guided, lifted,
lowered and shifted manually with one hand. The hoisting and lowering
speeds can be regulated precisely with the pushbutton control.

The low weight makes the mini manipulator very easy to operate.

Mini manipulators are available with S.W.L.s of 125 or 250 kg.

Technical features

• Very low headroom


• Max. 3 m height of lift
• Steplessly adjustable hoisting speeds
• Suitable for oil-free operation
• Precision pushbutton control with EMERGENCY STOP
• Extremely compact with very low weight


Not susceptible to dust, damp and temperatures from
-20°C to approx. +50°C
Classification according to FEM: 1Bm
ATEX
• Classification according to EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
II 3 GD IIA T4 (X)
• 6 bar compressed air connection
• Novel low-wear braking system
• One-handed operation for lifting, lowering and guiding loads

Also available with push


trolley as an option.
Please enquire.

STAHLplus Info _ Every


pneumatic hoist is tested with at
least 25% overload.

Safe work- Dimensions


ing load D E F G H K M R S T U
[kg] [mm]
125 92 213 104 177 83 29 19 160 250 190 195
250 92 213 104 177 83 29 19 160 250 190 195

Model Safe No. of Output Hoisting Lowering Air consumption Compres- Hose size Chain Chain Weight Item Price
working chain speed speed with rated load sed air dimen- weight with 3 m No. for
load falls with connec- sions height of 3 m height
rated no load with rated Lifting Lowering tion inside Ø lift of lift
load load
[kg] [kW] [m/min] [m³/min] [mm] [kg/m] [kg]
mini 125 125 1 0.4 15 40 30 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 4x12 0.35 9.5 820 296 0
03_08EN.FM

mini 250 250 1 0.4 8 20 16 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 4x12 0.35 10.5 820 297 0

87
Explosion protection

Profi pneumatic chain hoist

Profi pneumatic chain hoists are designed for use in industry. They can
be used in hazardous areas thanks to the drive medium of compressed
air.
Stationary chain hoists with safe working loads up to 100 t and various
trolley versions are available on request.

Technical features

• Extremely low headroom, extremely robust construction


• Standard height of lift 3 m
• Infinitely variable hoisting speeds
• Sensitive pressbutton control with EMERGENCY STOP, control hose 2 m
• Suitable for oil-free operation
• Extremely compact with minimum weight
• Overload protection standard from 1,000 kg S.W.L. (EU version)
• Insensitive to dust, humidity and temperatures from
-20°C to approx. +70°C
• Classification of mechanism in acc. with FEM: up to 2,000 kg 1 Am,
from 3,200 kg 1 Bm
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
II 2 GD IIA T4 (X) / II 3 GD IIB T4 (X)
• Compressed air supply 6 bar
• Version up to IIC T6 possible. Please enquire.

ATEX

Profi pneumatic chain hoist with powered trolley

Safe Dimensions
working A B C d D E F G H J K L M N
load max (b) *1 *2
[kg] [mm]
250 250 130 b+36 70 185 137 39 145 152 - 563 95 28 42 116
500 -
1,000 -
2,000 250 130 b+36 70 185 137 46 145 152 - 611 95 28 42 116
3,200 292 113 b+60 84 191 187 46 233 250 635 798 107 30 42 136
Travel speed for S.W.L.: 250 - 6,300 kg: 9/14 m/min 6,300 500 141 b+70 165 205 154 79 233 250 763 919 215 40 51 236
Travel speed for S.W.L.: 10,000 - 16,000 kg: 5/12 m/min 10,000 490 146 b+70 165 318 197 109 308 267 944 1131 215 42 66 236
16,000 146 318 199 382 310 997 1216 55 82
Lower flange width b max for S.W.L.: 250 - 2,000 kg: 300 mm *1 Hoist installed
Lower flange width b max for S.W.L.: 3,200 - 16,000 kg: 310 mm *2 Hoist hooked on

Model Safe Hoisting Lowering Air consumption Hose size Chain Chain Weight Item Price Surcharge
air connection
Compressed

working speed speed with rated load dimen- weight with 3 m No. for per m
chain falls
Output
No. of

load with sions height of 3 m height height of


rated no with Lifting Lowering inside Ø outside Ø lift of lift lift
load load rated load
[kg] [kW] [m/min] [m³/min] [mm] [kg/m] [kg]
025TI LM2T 250 1 1.0 20 42 38 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 53 820 082 0
05TI LM2T 500 1 1.0 11 19 17 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 53 820 083 0
1TI LM2T 1,000 1 1.0 5.5 11 11 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 54 820 084 0
2TI LM2T 2,000 2 1.0 2.7 5.5 5.5 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 60 820 085 0
3TI LM3,2T 3,200 1 3.5 5 10 10.8 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 13x36 3.8 119 820 086 0
6 TI LM6,3T 6,300 2 3.5 2.5 5 5.4 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 13x36 3.8 234 820 087 0
03_08EN.FM

10TI LM10-16T 10,000 2 3.5 1.6 3.2 3.4 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 16x45 5.8 286 820 088 0
16TI LM10-16T 16,000 3 3.5 1 2 2.1 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 16x45 5.8 370 820 089 0

88
9/98 explosion-protected manual chain hoists with
hook suspension

For use in Zone 1 hazardous areas.

Technical features

• Equipped as standard with slipping clutch overload protection


• Compact sheet steel housing
• Industrial quality
• Increased safety thanks to two ratchets
• Housing powder-coated up to 10,000 kg, 4-fall, galvanised from
10,000 kg, 2-fall
• Galvanised RUD quality load chain in acc. with EN 818-7-T
• Galvanised hand chain in acc. with DIN 766
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for II 2D c 135° or 200°C

ATEX
• German certificate of origin

Also available on request:


• Stainless steel chains
• Ball-bearing load hook

N.B.: 9/98 manual chain hoist in standard version on page 53.

Safe work- Dimensions


ing load A A1 B B1 C H M M1 M2 M3
[kg] [mm]
500 141 87 108 48 216 288 22 35 20 15
1,000 168 102 131 57 256 345 26 40 25 18
1,500 212 129 146 68 321 423 30 44 29 22
2,000 163 88 131 57 286 491 34 50 33 23
3,000 202 108 146 68 354 593 38 54 39 28
5,000 236 128 168 81 412 702 41 64 46 32
10,000 415 130 168 81 479 755 58 87 65 46
346 218 282 141 568 824 49 71 67 53
15,000 425 255 282 141 758 1115 55 90 85 67
20,000 463 293 787 1165 69 100 95 75
25,000 510 326 798 1233 76 112 106 85
30,000 810 405 282 141 727 1160 84 125 118 95
40,000 926 463 790 1280 97 140 132 106
50,000 1063 531 875 1470 110 160 150 118

Safe working Chain falls Load chain Hand chain Lifter after Effort on hand Weight Item Price Surcharge
load reeling 30 m chain at rated at 3 m per additional m No. for per m
hand chain load approx. runway height height of lift 3 m height height of
of lift lift
[kg] [mm] [daN] [kg]
500 1 5.0x15.0 5x23.8 1165 21 8.9 1.5 820 090 0
1,000 1 6.3x19.1 870 35 12.2 1.8 820 091 0
1,500 1 8.0x24.0 640 39 19.6 2.3 820 092 0
2,000 2 6.3x19.1 435 35 13.6 2.7 820 093 0
3,000 2 8.0x24.0 320 39 27 3.7 820 094 0
5,000 2 10.0x30.0 170 42 42 5.5 820 095 0
10,000 4 10.0x30.0 5x23.8 85 45 105 9.7 820 096 0
2 13.0x36.0 5x18.5 74 31 100 8.6 820 097 0
15,000 3 13.0x36.0 5x18.5 50 33 135 12.4 820 098 0
20,000 4 37 35 170 16.2 820 099 0
25,000 5 30 37 198 20.0 820 100 0
30,000 2x3 50 2x33 270 24.8 820 101 0
03_08EN.FM

40,000 2x4 37 2x35 340 32.4 820 102 0


50,000 2x5 30 2x37 396 40.0 820 103 0

89
Explosion protection

Explosion-protected manual chain hoists with


hook suspension

For use in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous areas. Three versions are
available:
- Basic: Explosion protection class II 3G llB c T3 (Zone 2)
- Medium: Explosion protection class II2G IIB c T3 (Zone 1)
- High: Explosion protection class II 2G IIC c T3 (T4*) (Zone 1)
* (T4 available on request depending on application)

Technical features

• Low headroom
• Low effort on hand chain
• Automatic load brake
• Industrial quality of gear and chain drive
• Fast-running parts in bronze or bronze-coated

ATEX
• Load and suspension hook bronze-coated (Medium, High)
• Galvanised load chain (Basic, Medium, High), NIROSTA chain
available as an option
• Galvanised hand chain (Basic, Medium) or NIROSTA (High)
• High safety factor Safe working load Dimensions
for version
Also available on request: Basic High A B D E F F1 G
• Overload protection Medium
• Special surface coating [kg] [mm]
500 500 82 56 90 48 30 24 260
1,000 1,000 83 63 100 59 36 29 300
Stahlplus Info _ See page 92 for manual chain
1,600 1,250 90 75 115 69 39 31 345
hoists with trolleys. Other versions on request. 2,000 1,250 98 85 132 82 42 34 380
3,200 2,000 106 92 160 94 48 39 435
5,000 3,750 90 75 188 94 56 47 575
10,000 6,000 106 92 283 122 75 68 790
16,000 10,000 106 92 340 205 90 81 1020
20,000 12,000 153 153 390 390 90 81 1040

500 - 3,200 kg 5,000 - 10,000 kg 20,000 kg

Safe working load Chain Load Effort on Weight Basic Medium High
for version falls chain hand II 3G IIB c T3 II2G IIB c T3 II 2G IIC c T3
Basic High chain at at 3 m Item Price Surcharge Item Price Surcharge Item Price Surcharge
Medium rated load runway No. for 3 m per m No. for 3 m per m No. for 3 m per m
approx. height height of lift height of lift height of lift height of lift height of lift height of lift
[kg] [mm] [daN] [kg]
500 500 1 5.0 21.0 8.0 820 135 0 820 144 0 820 153 0
1,000 1,000 1 6.3 24.0 10.5 820 136 0 820 145 0 820 154 0
1,600 1,250 1 7.1 29.5 15.0 820 137 0 820 146 0 820 155 0
2,000 1,250 1 7.9 33.5 21.0 820 138 0 820 147 0 820 156 0
3,200 2,000 1 10 38.0 30.5 820 139 0 820 148 0 820 157 0
5,000 3,750 3 7.1 36.0 35.0 820 140 0 820 149 0 820 158 0
10,000 6,000 3 10.0 43.0 76.0 820 141 0 820 150 0 820 159 0
03_08EN.FM

16,000 10,000 5 10.0 47.0 155.0 820 142 0 820 151 0 820 160 0
20,000 12,000 6 10.0 2x45.0 250.0 820 143 0 820 152 0 820 161 0

90
Explosion-protected manual chain hoists with push or
reel-type trolley

For use in Zonen 1 hazardous area.

Technical features

• Small hook dimension


• With 9/98 manual chain hoist (see page 89)
• Overload protection by means of slipping clutch as standard
• Trolley with two load suspension bolts, excellent running
characteristics
• Machined wheels with maintenance-free roller bearings
• Galvanised load and hand chains, load chain in acc. with DIN 5684-8
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for II 2D c 135°C or 200°C
• German certificate of origin

Also available on request:


• Stainless steel chains
• Ball-bearing load hook

N.B.: 24/98 manual chain hoist with trolley in standard version on page 57.

A B1
ATEX
L B3 B B2
C ØD2
ØD2

Safe Dimensions
working A A1 B1 B2 B3 B6 C D1 D2 H L M
load 1N 2N
[kg] [mm]
H

500 234 141 122 200 24 99 108 25 50 135 244 93 22


1,000 287 168 122 163 31 140 131 21 65 135 289 142 26
M 1,500 350 212 166 228 40 146 146 31 85 135 359 172 30
2,000 350 163 166 228 40 146 131 31 85 135 446 172 34
3,000 428 202 182 243 46 149 146 31 120 135 495 209 38
5,000 492 236 190 258 53 283 168 32 120 195 592 223 41
Ha646 B6
10,000 650 415 242 291 62 248 168 42 150 270 615 253 58
A1 10,000
15,000 Dimensions on request
20,000
25,000

Safe Chain Load Girder Effort on hand Lift after Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley
working falls chain flange chain at rated load reeling at 3 m per Item Price Surcharge Item Price Surcharge
load width approx. 30 m hand runway additional No. for per m No. for per m
B Lifting Travel chain height m lift 3 m height height of 3 m height height of
[kg] [mm] [daN] [mm] [kg] of lift lift of lift lift
500 1 5x15 1N: 50-146 21 6.5 1165 20.1 2.5 820 104 0 820 116 0
2N: 147-302 820 105 0 820 117 0
1,000 1 6.3x19.1 1N: 50-135 32 10 870 26.7 2.8 820 106 0 820 118 0
2N: 136-220 820 107 0 820 119 0
1,500 1 8x24 1N: 66-185 39 11 640 50.6 3.3 820 108 0 820 120 0
2N: 186-310 820 109 0 820 121 0
2,000 2 6.3x19.1 1N: 66-185 35 15 435 44.6 3.7 820 110 0 820 122 0
2N: 186-310 820 111 0 820 123 0
3,000 2 8x24 1N: 74-196 39 11 320 76.0 4.7 820 112 0 820 124 0
2N: 197-310 820 113 0 820 125 0
5,000 2 10x30 1N: 74-192 42 17 170 97.0 6.5 820 114 0 820 126 0
2N: 193-310 820 115 0 820 127 0
10,000 4 10x30 1N: 119-215 45 21 85 182.5 10.7 - 820 128 0
2N: 216-312 - 820 129 0
10,000 2 13x36 1N: 119-215 - 820 130 0
2N: 216-312 - 820 131 0
15,000 3 13x36 1N: 148-310 Dimensions and weights on request - 820 132 0
03_08EN.FM

20,000 4 13x36 1N: 158-310 - 820 133 0


25,000 5 13x36 1N: 170-310 - 820 134 0

91
Explosion protection

Explosion-protected manual chain hoists with push or


reel-type trolley

For use in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous areas. Three versions are available:
- Basic: Explosion protection class II 3G llB c T3 (Zone 2)
- Medium: Explosion protection class II2G IIB c T3 (Zone 1)
- High: Explosion protection class II 2G IIC c T3 (T4*) (Zone 1)
* (T4 available on request depending on application)

Technical features

• Low headroom
• Low effort on hand chain
• Automatic load brake
• Industrial quality of gear and chain drive
• Fast-running parts in bronze or bronze-coated
• Bronze wheels with maintenance-free roller bearings


Load and suspension hook bronze-coated
Galavanised load chain (Basic, Medium, High), NIROSTA chain
available as an option
ATEX
• Galvanised hand chain (Basic, Medium) or NIROSTA (High)
Also available on request:
• Overload protection
• Buffers
• Special surface coating

Safe working Dimensions


load in version
Basic High A B E F F1 G N R L O n
Medium
[kg] [mm] [m]
500 500 45 60 15 30 24 315 - 75 150 - 2.5
1,000 1,000 60 75 20 36 29 360 90 99 190 100 2.5
1,600 1,250 80 100 27 39 31 420 90 123 255 100 2.5
2,000 1,250 80 100 27 39 31 455 90 123 255 100 2.5
3,200 2,000 100 120 35 48 39 525 95 144 300 100 2.5
5,000 3,750 125 150 40 56 47 690 130 174 375 135 2.5
10,000 6,000 160 190 45 75 68 935 135 220 450 270 2.5

Safe working load Girder W Push trolley Reel-type trolley


Chain falls

in version flange Basic Medium High Basic Medium High


width II 3G IIB c T3 II2G IIB c T3 II 2G IIC c T3 II 3G IIB c T3 II2G IIB c T3 II 2G IIC c T3
Basic High Item for Item for Item for Item for Item for Item for
Medium No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height
[kg] [mm] of lift of lift of lift of lift of lift of lift
500 500 1 55-102 160 820 162 0 820 185 0 820 208 0 - - - - - -
105-152 210 820 163 0 820 186 0 820 209 0 - - - - - -
1,000 1,000 1 55-102 170 820 164 0 820 187 0 820 210 0 820 231 0 820 252 0 820 273 0
105-152 220 820 165 0 820 188 0 820 211 0 820 232 0 820 253 0 820 274 0
156-203 270 820 166 0 820 189 0 820 212 0 820 233 0 820 254 0 820 275 0
207-254 325 820 167 0 820 190 0 820 213 0 820 234 0 820 255 0 820 276 0
1,600 1,250 1 74-127 215 820 168 0 820 191 0 820 214 0 820 235 0 820 256 0 820 277 0
127-180 265 820 169 0 820 192 0 820 215 0 820 236 0 820 257 0 820 278 0
190-243 330 820 170 0 820 193 0 820 216 0 820 237 0 820 258 0 820 279 0
254-305 390 820 171 0 820 194 0 820 217 0 820 238 0 820 259 0 820 280 0
2,000 1,250 1 74-127 215 820 172 0 820 195 0 820 218 0 820 239 0 820 260 0 820 281 0
127-180 265 820 173 0 820 196 0 820 219 0 820 240 0 820 261 0 820 282 0
190-243 330 820 174 0 820 197 0 820 220 0 820 241 0 820 262 0 820 283 0
254-305 390 820 175 0 820 198 0 820 221 0 820 242 0 820 263 0 820 284 0
3,200 2,000 1 90-143 250 820 176 0 820 199 0 820 222 0 820 243 0 820 264 0 820 285 0
149-203 310 820 177 0 820 200 0 820 223 0 820 244 0 820 265 0 820 286 0
203-254 360 820 178 0 820 201 0 820 224 0 820 245 0 820 266 0 820 287 0
251-305 410 820 179 0 820 202 0 820 225 0 820 246 0 820 267 0 820 288 0
5,000 3,750 3 106-156 275 820 180 0 820 203 0 820 226 0 820 247 0 820 268 0 820 289 0
160-210 330 820 181 0 820 204 0 820 227 0 820 248 0 820 269 0 820 290 0
210-260 380 820 182 0 820 205 0 820 228 0 820 249 0 820 270 0 820 291 0
255-305 425 820 183 0 820 206 0 820 229 0 820 250 0 820 271 0 820 292 0
10,000 6,000 3 min. 131 bw 820 184 0 820 207 0 820 230 0 820 251 0 820 272 0 820 293 0
(fix) +
03_08EN.FM

150
Surcharge per m lift of manual chain hoist or reel-type trolley on request.

92
28/98 HR/HH explosion-protected manual chain hoists with
trolley

Manual chain hoists with trolley are described in the chapter on


"Hoists" on page 58. These can also be supplied in off-standard design
using special materials for use in hazardous areas.

The S.W.L. range and dimensions are as shown on page 58.

Prices on request.

Technical features

• Compact construction
• Short hook dimensions
• Overload protection by means of slipping clutch as standard
• Galvanised load chain in acc. with DIN 5684-8
• Galvanised hand chain in acc. with DIN 766
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
II 2G IIB T4 and II 2D 135°C

ATEX

29/98 HH explosion-protected manual chain hoists with


reel-type trolley

Extremely short headroom

These manual chain hoists with reel-type trolley which can also be
employed in hazardous areas when special materials are used
correspond to those shown on page 59 as regards S.W.L. range and
dimensions.

Prices on request.

Technical features
• Extremely short headroom (hook dimension)
• Overload protection by means of slipping clutch
• Excellent running characteristics
• German certificate of origin

ATEX
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX):
up to 6,300 kg: II 2G IIB T4 and II 2D 135°C
from 10,000 kg: II 2G IIB T3 and II 2D 200°C

Accessories available on request:


• Chain box
• Parking brake
• Buffers
• Fully galvanised trolley
• Ball bearing load hook

Stahlplus Info _ You will find all common


profile specifications on page 46 to enable
you to select the correct trolley for your
03_08EN.FM

runway beam.

93
Explosion protection

Explosion-protected cranes

for use in hazardous areas, Zone 1 and 21.


Single girder suspension cranes

with reel-type drive, safe working load from

ATEX 1,000 up to10,000 kg.

• Spans up to 14000 mm
• Designed in acc. with DIN 15018 H1/B2
• Low effort on hand chain thanks to indirect
drive
• Hand chains for 6 m runway height
• Primer and top-coat RAL 2000 yellow-
orange
• Classification in acc. with 94/9/EG (ATEX):
II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for
II 2D c 135° or 200°C
Also available as articulated crane with push
drive (the attachment of the trolley to the
bridge girder is articulated) for a safe working
load up to 1,500 kg and a span up to 7000 mm.
Also available witout main girder

Single girder manual overhead travelling


cranes

with reel-type drive, safe working load from


1,000 up to10,000 kg.

• Spans up to 14000 mm
• Designed in acc. with DIN 15018 H1/B2
• Low effort on hand chain thanks to indirect
drive
• Hand chains for 6 m runway height
• Primer and top-coat RAL 2000 yellow-
orange
• Classification in acc. with 94/9/EG (ATEX):
II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for
II 2D c 135° or 200°C
ATEX
Also available without main girder in various
versions:

Version A with screw-on adapters A


• 1 set of endcarriages
• 1 set of screw-on adapters
• No welding necessary

Version B with screw-on adapters for main


girder to be set on top
• 1 set of endcarriages B
• 1 set of screw-on adapters

Version C with weld-on adapter plates


• 1 set of endcarriages
• 1 set of weld-on adapters
Other versions available on request.
C
Stahlplus Info _ You will find
suitable hoists with trolley on
page 91 ff. ATEX
03_08EN.FM

94
LD explosion-protected digital load cells

Digital load cells for use in hazardous areas in acc. with ATEX.

ATEX

Technical features
• Precision mechanical-electronic system (DMS) in integrated
construction, extremely low wear as there are no moving
mechanical parts during load measurment Stahlplus Info _ Other
• 7-segment LED display, thanks to integrated measuring procedure scale ranges on request.
result appears "fast" even if the load is still vibrating strongly
• Plus-minus display for weighing from full load to "zero", tare function
for direct display of net weight
• Accuracy of display capacity: +/-0.03%
• Digit height: 40 mm
• Reading distance: 40 m Scale range Model Display Weight Item
graduation No.
• Power supply from maintenance-free 12 V accumulators, display [kg] [kg] [kg]
flashes when recharging necessary 0 - 250 LD 0,25 EEx 0.1 47 820 073 0
• Duration of use of maintenance-free accumulator: 120 hours 0 - 500 LD 0,5 EEx 0.2 47 820 074 0
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX): 0 - 1,000 LD 1 EEx 0.5 47 820 075 0
0 - 2,000 LD 2 EEx 1 47 820 076 0
II 2G Ex de IIC T6 0 - 5,000 LD 5 EEx 2 55 820 077 0

Stahlplus Info _ Load


suspension equipment in
explosion-protected design
up to 1,000 kg S.W.L.
available on request.
Explosion-protected balancer

for use in Zone 2 hazardous areas in acc. with ATEX.

Technical features

• Unwound cable length: 8 m


• Sheet-steel frame, powder-coated Weight: approx. 12 kg
• Conical plastic drum
• Nylon rope
• Precise, low-friction rope guide
• 16 locking positions per rotation
• Recoil brake
• Infinitely variable spring force by means of
handwheel
• Special flat spring (lower spring tension
when rope is unwound)
• Classification in acc. with EC directive
94/9/EC (ATEX): II 3G

Safe Unwound Weight Item

ATEX
working load cable No.
[kg] [m] [kg]
03_08EN.FM

5.0-11.0 8 12.0 820 294 0


8.5-15.0 820 295 0

95
Explosion protection

Explosion-protected manual winches

Two frame sizes for safe working loads up to 125 kg.

Technical features

• Approvals for lifting and lowering loads


• Mechanism group 1Bm
• Permissible ambient temperatures
ATEX
WH 050: -10°C to +50°C, WH 1: -20°C to +40°C
• Mounting position and rope lead-off can be determined as required
by turning the winch
• Minimum load 1 kg
• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX): II 2G IIB T4

Safe working Model Rope Ø Max. cable Effort on


load length crankhandle
[kg] [mm] [m] [kg] WH 05 WH 1
63 WH 05 3 28 8...10
125 WH 1 4 27 12...14
Prices on request.

Explosion-protected pneumatic winches

Various frame sizes in the power range of 1.0 kW to 6.0 kW for safe
working loads up to 3,000 kg. Mechanism group 1 Bm in acc. with FEM.

Technical features

• Extremely compact construction


• High rope capacity
• Air pressure required: 6 bar
• Various controls for different requirements

Max. safe Profi Rope Ø Max. cable Explosion protection


working load model length in acc. with ATEX
[kg] [mm] [m]
750 Lifter 500-1 6 58.3 II 3GD IIA T4(X)
800 Puller 800-1 6 58.3
640 Lifter 500-2,2 7 86.1 II 3GD IIA T4(X)

ATEX
1,050 Lifter 800-2,2 9 55.2
1,500 Lifter 1200-2,2/6 10 72.8-143.2 II 2GD IIA T4(X) /
2,500 Lifter 2000-2,6/6 12 102.3-241.8 II 3GD IIB T4(X) and
1,800 Puller 1800-2,2/6 10 72.8-143.2 II 2GD IIB T4(X)
3,000 Puller 3000-2,6/6 12 102.3-241.8
Prices on request.

Explosion-protected pneumatic chain hoists

for handling Big Bags, safe working load up to 2,000 kg.


Mechanism group 1 Bm in acc. with FEM.

Technical features



Design with one or two load hooks as required
Few components to ensure low-maintenance and low-wear operation
ATEX
• Spacing between hooks can be adapted later
• Standard height of lift 3 m
• Air pressure required: 6 bar

Max. safe Profi Chain Chain Explosion protection


working load model falls dimension in acc. with ATEX
[kg] BBH ... [mm]
1,100 1000 1 7x21 II 2GD IIA T4(X) / II 3GD IIB T4(X)
2,200 2000 2 II 2GD IIB T4(X) / II 3GD IIC T4(X)
03_08EN.FM

Please state runway profile when ordering.

Prices on request.

96
The right suspension for every load.
The wide selection of STAHLplus
load suspension equipment is fast
and flexible in handling and
offers a safe solution.

Load suspension
equipment

97
Load suspension equipment

General instructions for use for lifting clamps

These instructions for use provide only general information on the use Only undamaged clamps with legible rating plates and plates giving
of some lifting clamps and do not take the place of the operating S.W.L. and gripping range may be used. They must be visually
instructions provided by the manufacturer for individual pieces of inspected before the first and each following use for obvious defects!
equipment!

Please read also our general instructions for the use of load Inspection before starting work
suspension equipment and slings on pages 120-121 and 142-144.
Lifting processes using load suspension equipment may only be Ensure that the surfaces of the steel plate where the clamp is attached
performed by a skilled loader (instructed in theory and practice). are as far as possible dry and free of grease, paint, dirt, scale and
Load suspension equipment which has been known to have been coatings so that the contact of the jaws and the goods to be lifted are
overloaded or otherwise exposed to damaging influences must no not hindered, or protective coatings can generate the necessary
longer be used until it have been inspected and repaired if necessary. friction.

• Inspect the fixed and clamping jaws or their coatings for wear and
Modifications to state of delivery defects. Both jaws must have a clear profile and the teeth must not
be too worn (observe manufacturer’s specifications in the operating
The form and construction of load suspension equipment must not be instructions, approximate guide max. 30% wear). Protective coatings
modified by e.g. bending, welding, grinding, removing parts, drilling must not be soiled, damaged, uneven or too worn.
holes, removing safety devices such as interlocks, bolts, locking pins,
etc. without the manufacturer’s permission, as the manufacturer’s • The whole load suspension device must be checked for damage,
declaration of conformity and any liability or warranty would lose their corrosion, cracks or deformation.
validity .
• The clamp must be able to be opened and closed easily.

Restrictions of use • Check the spring. It must present a clearly perceptible spring
pressure in the "closed" position when pressing against the
Temperature suspension eye.

Clamps without any protective coating can be used with their full
safe working load at -40° to +100°C as a rule (dependent upon
manufacturer). Clamps with a protective coating can due to this usually
only be used for lower temperature ranges - e.g. type TPB, TSB from Use for intended purpose
-20° to +40°C.
• The supporting ring must have sufficient space in the load hook and
move freely. The clamp must have a safety device to prevent it being
Impact loading, load swinging accidently removed from the hook. A short sling between crane hook
and clamp makes loading easier and safer!
The safe working loads stated apply for loading the load suspension
equipment without any impact. • The working load limit (W.L.L.) given on the equipment is the
maximum load and must not be exceeded.
The full safe working load can be utilised in the case of slight impacts
such as arise from lifting and lowering or moving the load on the crane. • Lifting or transporting loads must be avoided as long as there are
persons in the danger zone of the load. In the case of clamps which
High impacts (e.g. knocking the load during transportation) or swinging are not positive locking, but friction locking without any other locking
loads are not permissible! device, the load must on no account be moved over persons.

• Standing under a suspended load is forbidden on principle.


Goods to be lifted

Load suspension equipment is designed by the manufacturer for


particular applications and goods any may not be used for other
purposes without consulting him. For example the thickness of the
aterial (gripping range of the clamp), surface structure, surface
hardness* of the material and the temperature of the material must be
taken into consideration. You will find information on this in the
relevant manufacturer’s operating instructions. To ensure safe use, the Friction force
operating instructions must always be made available to the users. It is
forbidden to transport persons with load suspension equipment! Positive locking Friction locking
04_08EN.FM

* Please note that the surface and core hardness of particular steel sheets may vary
considerably: e.g. cold work steel.

98
Use for intended purpose (continued)

Caution: A safe positive locking connection requires sufficient strength • This depends on the model in the case of clamps for transporting
of the goods to be lifted and it must be ensured that the load or parts of plates horizontally.
it cannot slip and fall! For example in the case of steel plates, with the corresponding
clamp and lifting clamp models, several plates can be lifted
simultaneously if the stacks do not sag.
• The load suspension device must be
positioned above the centre of gravity of the
load so that the load does not swing when
lifted.

• Do not leave loads suspended or under tension unattended or for


long periods of time.
• If long plates or sections are to be
transported, using two clamps is • When loading, it must be ensured that the load suspension
recommended to prevent swinging. equipment can be operated without the loader being endangered by
They can either be used in conjunction the equipment, suspension elements or the load.
with a spreader beam, or for example a
two-leg sling with clamps with a swivel • The operator must not initiate the movement of the load until he has
eye (e.g. type TBS) within the satisfied himself that the load has been attached correctly and
permissible angle of inclination (note no one is in the danger zone.
S.W.L. reduction).
• Please note the reduced S.W.L. for clamps depending on the swivel
range of the support ring or direction of use of the clamp.
(Caution: not all available clamps are suitable for a swivel range of
Example: 180° - read operating instructions carefully!)
S.W.L. in % for type TBS with
swivel eye with diagonal pull.
• The load suspension equipment must be decommissioned
Note safe working immediately if it should malfunction.
load diagram

Maintenance, inspection and repair of lifting clamps


• Clamps without swivel eyes must not be
loaded from the side! (As a rule, applying the Load suspension equipment must be maintained in a safe condition
clamp to the plate in the direction of pull of the by means of regular servicing (in acc. with regulations and the
sling is not permissible as the jaws would manufacturer’s information) (§ 16 AMVO).
clamp too close to the edge of the plate - the
clamp is then not seated correctly on the Periodic tests in acc with § 8(13) AMVO on load suspension equipment
plate!) must be performed by a qualified inspector at least once a year, at
shorter intervals if the conditions of use are severe. Records must be
made and kept of the inspection and maintenance work. In the main
• The plate to be transported must be the tests are visual and functional tests whereby the state of
inserted right up to the base of the components with regard to damage, wear, corrosion or other
jaw, the housing must be in contact alterations are assessed and the completeness and efficacy of safety
with the edge of the plate on both equipment must be determined. The inspections must be initiated by
sides. the user.

Repairs and overhauls may only be performed by the manufacturer or


authorised persons using original spare parts.

• Only one plate at a time can be


transported with clamps for transporting
plates vertically. The clamping effect There are many applications which could not be dealt with here.
must be exerted both on the front and Please contact us, we would be pleased to advise you!
rear sides of the plate!

It is forbidden to transport
more than one plate verti-
cally.
04_08EN.FM

99
Load suspension equipment

TKA crate grab

When lifting, the crate grab presses the two


clamping jaws under the rigid edge of the
container. When it has been set down, the
safety latch locks automatically and holds the
grab open.
The crate grab is available as an internal or
external operating grab.
inside grab
N.B.: When ordering please state type of crate
or provide a sample.

Safe Model Grab Item

Weight
work- width No.
ing
load
[kg] [mm] [kg]
250 TKA0,25/i 300-600 10 806 000 0
250 TKA0,25/a 10 806 003 0
TKA0,25/i = interal operating
TKA0,25/a = external operating outside grab

TRU round stock grab


Shackle for grabs for
safe working load
The round stock grab grips round and tubular 2,000 kg and up

material up to 600 mm in diameter easily and


safely.
The jaws can be equipped with a protective
coating (price on request).

Safety Advice _ The protective coating can only prevent the


load slipping if the surface of the material is dry and not
polluted with oil or grease.
Safe Grab Dimensions Weight Item
working load range A B C D E F No.
Z min. max.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
100 50-150 270 292 458 97 43 8 17 3.9 806 004 0
500 35-200 503 417 723 150 56 15 17 13.6 806 010 0
1,000 35-200 509 437 745 178 82 15 30 16.4 806 014 0
1,500 80-300 720 520 937 204 84 20 25 29 806 015 0
3,000 80-300 740 582 960 220 125 20 30 50.7 806 016 0
4,000 200-600 1420 930 1815 318 205 20 35 204 806 017 0

TR pipe grab Shackle for grabs for


safe working load
2,000 kg and up

For safe transport of tubular and round


materials up to a diameter of 1050 mm.

The TR pipe grab is a lightweight grab also


suitable for lifting and transporting rolls of
paper, fabric, sheet metal, tubes and barrels
laid on their sides.
The jaws can be equipped with a protective Safety Advice _ If the centre
coating of Bremsite or hard rubber (price on of gravity is off-centre and the
request). pipe hangs at an angle the
Other grab ranges available on request. surface must be clean, dry
and free of oil and grease.
Safe Grab Dimensions Weight Item
working load range A B ØC ØD E F G No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
200 350-550 800 565 350 550 550 35 20 34 806 018 0
500 500-750 1100 665 500 750 550 35 20 47 806 019 0
1,000 500-750 1000 665 500 750 550 35 20 55 806 023 0
04_08EN.FM

2,000 700-1050 1350 815 700 1050 800 45 30 135 806 024 0
3,000 700-1050 1350 815 700 1050 800 45 30 154 806 029 0

100
TBG block grab

For safe transport of rectangular, high-value


A F
Ø9
2
loads with two parallel vertical surfaces. The
E

grab jaws are rubber-coated to protect the


load. A safety latch can be used to lock the
grab in the open position.
B1

N.B.: the material to be lifted must be free of oil

D
and grease.
ha021v
Z C

S.W.L. Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


Z A B1 max. B2 C D E F No.
TBG with narrow jaws (*1) [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
200 *1 0,2/150 0 - 150 815 760 - 200 160 30 15 23 809 084 0
300 *1 0,3/150 0 - 150 815 760 - 200 160 30 15 23 809 086 0
500 *1 0,5/150 0 - 150 815 760 - 200 160 30 15 23 809 088 0
1,000 *1 1,0/250 50 - 250 1050 980 - 250 160 29 20 48 809 090 0
A F
Ø9
1,500 *1 1,5/250 50 - 250 1050 980 - 250 160 29 20 50 809 093 0
4
2,500 *1 2,5/250 50 - 250 1050 980 - 250 160 29 25 58 809 096 0
E

200 *2 0,2/500 200 - 500 1040 840 275 160 300 35 20 49 809 085 0
B1

94 F 300 *2 0,3/700 400 - 700 1040 840 275 160 300 35 20 52 809 087 0
500 *2 0,5/900 600 - 900 1120 840 275 160 300 35 20 55 809 089 0
E
124

B2

1,000 *2 1,0/400 100 - 400 1040 840 275 160 300 35 20 51 809 091 0
D

Z
ha022v

C
1,0/1100 800 - 1100 1320 840 275 160 300 35 20 72 809 092 0
1,500 *2 1,5/1300 1000 - 1300 1520 840 275 160 300 35 20 128 809 094 0
2,000 *2 2,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1120 250 160 350 36 25 126 809 095 0
3,000 *2 3,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1120 250 160 350 42 30 160 809 097 0
4,000 *2 4,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1190 250 160 350 48 35 240 809 098 0
TBG with wide jaws (*2) 5,000 *2 5,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1190 250 160 350 48 35 270 809 099 0

TKAd crate grab with tipping device

The TKAd crate grab with tipping device can not only safely
transport stacking crates, but also empty them in mid-air.
When ordering, please state type of crate or provide a sample.

Safe working Model Dimensions Weight Item


load A B L No.

[kg] [mm] [kg]


150 TKA 0,15/330d 200-300 315-330 465-540 26 806 036 0
150 TKA 0,15/480d 300 470-480 550-660 26 806 037 0

TFA-D barrel grab with tipping device


(for one-man operation)

For transporting, lifting, setting down and emptying barrels.

The grab with tipping device is also suitable for turning and
emptying barrels.

A barrel must be gripped at its centre of gravity for it to be


turned without difficulty.

Safe Grab range Dimensions Weight Item STAHLplus Info _


working A B C ØD E F G H No. See fork lift truck
load attachments, page 209
04_08EN.FM

[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]


for further barrel grabs.
300 400-600 600 1150 1525 90 34 15 200 400 83 806 038 0

101
Load suspension equipment

TPR profile steel grab

For transporting beams, profile steel, etc.

The jaws lock under the profile and ensure a completely secure
grip.

Safe Grab Dimensions Weight Item


working load range A B C D E No.
Z min. max.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 0-200 510 390 625 200 15 30 15 806 042 0
1,500 0-300 710 495 830 200 15 30 24 806 043 0
3,000 0-300 720 525 920 220 20 43 42 806 044 0

TFA barrel grab

For transporting upright barrels to DIN 6643.

This barrel grab grabs upright barrels at the side and sets them
down in the same position. The jaws are rubber-coated (PU).

Safe Grab Dimensions Weight Item


working load range A B C ØD E F G H I No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
300 Ø400-600 600 1040 950 90 34 15 200 400 400 57 806 039 0

TFA-R and TFA-TR barrel grabs TFA-R

For transporting steel drums. The gripping clamps grab under


TFA-R TFA-TR the rim of the drum and with their form-fitting connection ensure
it is held securely.
Model TFA-TR can be lifted optionally by a hook or by a fork-lift
truck.

TFA-TR

Safe Model Grab Weight Item


working load range No.

[kg] [kg]
04_08EN.FM

350 TFA-R 420-700 5.7 806 040 0


350 TFA-TR 9.2 806 041 0

102
BTG concrete pipe clamp tackle

For concrete pipes to DIN 4034.

The pipe tackle is designed for transporting and setting


down upright concrete pipes/culverts.
It consists of 3 clamps and a 3-leg chain sling.
Also available for concrete pipes up to Ø3000 mm on
request.

Safe Model Grab Dimensions Weight Item Technical features


working range per No. • Sturdy design
load Z A B ØC D E F clamp • 4:1 safety factor against breakage
[kg] [mm] [kg] • Simple and safe handling
1,500 BTG 1,5/120 40-120 135 75 18 180 165 100 10 809 076 0
3,000 BTG 3,0/180 TM-N 50-180 180 100 26 310 245 175 25 809 077 0
• Wide grab range
3,000 BTG 3,0/220 TM-N 90-220 180 100 26 310 245 175 26 809 078 0 • For the most rugged application conditions
• Low deadweight
• Service-friendly

TRO pipe hook

For 60° to 90° top angle between chains.

Pipe hooks are used in pairs to transport pipes safely. The


shackles are included in the delivery; chain sling not
included. Rubber coating for hooks on request.
Pipe hooks for top angles of 90-120° available on request.
Suitable chain slings can be found on page 145 ff.

Safe working Model Dimensions Weight Item


load A B C D E F ØG H ØI J t per pair No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
2,000 TRO 2/90 0-40 35 40 62 62 116 16.3 47.6 12.7 30.2 20 3.1 809 079 0
4,000 TRO 4/90 0-50 40 48 77 77 142 24.3 72.2 19.0 44.5 30 5.6 809 080 0
6,000 TRO 6/90 0-60 51 62 90 90 173 24.3 72.2 19.0 44.5 30 10.5 809 081 0
8,000 TRO 8/90 0-70 55 67 105 105 190 30.3 95.3 25.4 58.7 40 17.8 809 082 0
10,000 TRO 10/90 0-80 69 80 115 115 221 30.3 95.3 25.4 58.7 40 22.0 809 083 0

TPZ plate pliers

For wooden, chipboard and plastic panels.

Suitable for lifting, setting down and transporting wooden,


chipboard and plastic panels vertically.

The pliers are set down on the panel by means of the


handle.
The pliers are equipped with a protective coating in the
gripping area and thus ensure that the panels are gripped
securely and are not damaged during transport.

Safe working Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


load Z A B C D E F G H No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
400 TPZ 0,4/55 5-55 120 290 525 125 117 60 40 6 6.3 809 071 0
400 TPZ 0,4/100 55-100 120 335 525 125 117 60 40 6 9.0 809 118 0
04_08EN.FM

750 TPZ 0,75/60 5-60 155 349 545 145 135 121 75 8x24 12.0 809 119 0
750 TPZ 0,75/120 60-120 155 406 560 145 135 121 75 8x24 14.0 809 120 0

103
Load suspension equipment

TBP non-marring grab

For turning and transporting plates with sensitive


surfaces. It does not leave any dents or damage.
Suitable for aluminium, stainless steel, or sheet metal
with an extremely hard surface.
The surface of the material to be transported must be free
of grease and oil to maintain the friction coefficient of the
rubber-coated jaws (smooth PU).
Other non-marring grabs up to 3 t S.W.L. and larger grab
ranges available on request.
Non-marring grab with chain up to 1.25 t S.W.L. available
on request.

Safe working Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


load Z A B ØC D E F G H I No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 TBP 0,5 0-10 127 200 55 52 69 86.5 76 13 20 3.5 809 028 0
1,500 TBP 1,5 0-20 215 345 85 75 135 131 118 20 24 12 809 029 0
Minimum load is 10% S.W.L.

The surface hardness


of the material to be
transported must be
less than HRC 30!

TBS plate clamp Safe work- Grab range Dimensions Weight Item
ing load Z No.
A B ØC D E F G H I
Safe working load 1,000 to [kg] [mm] [kg]
3,000 kg. With universal joint 1,000 0-20 126 270 50 49 70 95 63 12 23 4.6 809 018 0
suspension, swivel eye and safety 2,000 0-32 192 382 80 75 96 132 92 20 30 14 809 019 0
lock. 3,000 0-32 192 382 80 75 96 132 92 20 30 14 809 020 0
Minimum load is 10% S.W.L.

The surface hardness


of the material to be
transported must be
less than HRC 30!

TBS plate clamp Safe work- Grab range Dimensions Weight Item
ing load Z No.
A B ØC D ØE F G H I
Safe working load 4,500 to [kg] [mm] [kg]
10,000 kg. With universal joint 4,500 0-50 292 675 90 180 27.8 95 143 135 185 33 809 021 0
suspension, swivel eye and safety 6,000 0-50 292 737 95 176 27.8 95 143 137 188 38 809 022 0
lock. 6,000 50-100 367 785 98 180 27.8 115 143 135 188 42 809 023 0
Other clamps up to 30 t S.W.L. 8,000 0-50 292 737 98 176 27.8 95 143 136 210 39 809 024 0
8,000 50-100 367 785 98 180 27.8 115 143 136 210 42.4 809 025 0
04_08EN.FM

available on request. 10,000 0-50 360 903 110 195 33.0 125 162 170 223 68 809 026 0
10,000 50-100 446 921 112 195 33.0 168 162 170 223 80 809 027 0
Minimum load is 10% S.W.L.

104
TBL Plate clamps

TBL self-gripping clamps can be used for the vertical transport of individual plates and steel
sheet, and for lifting and turning up to 180°.
A spring-loaded safety lever ensures that the plate clamp remains closed when not in use.
The surface hardness of the material to be transported must be less than HRC 30!
Plate clamps up to 30 t S.W.L. available on request.

Safe Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


working Z No.
A B ØC D E F G H
load
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 0-16 99 195 29 33 47 50 11 16 1.5 809 006 0
1,000 0-20 126 225 50 49 70 82 12 20 3 809 007 0
2,000 0-32 192 312 80 75 96 100 20 24 9.3 809 008 0
3,000 0-32 192 312 80 75 96 100 20 24 9.3 809 009 0
4,000 0-32 197 339 80 68 93 110 20 32 12 809 016 0
6,000 0-50 293 442 89 95 143 129 20 35 21 809 017 0
Minimum load is 10% S.W.L.

TCH plate lifting clamp

The TCH plate lifting clamp consists of two


plate clamps in conjunction with a 2-leg chain
sling.
It is particularly suitable for transporting
single thick plates from approx. 5 mm in
thickness, as well as for plate bundles.

In its standard design, the lifting tackle is


suitable for plates up to 1500 mm wide - top
angle between the chains max. 90°. For wider
plates on request.
Safe Grab Dimensions Weight Item
working range ** No.
A B ØC D E F G H I ØJ
The top angle between the chain or rope legs load * Z
must not exceed 90°. [kg] [mm] [kg]
Single clamps available on request. 1,000 0-50 135 75 18 15 82 65 100 32 44 13 13 809 030 0
2,000 5-32 160 90 22 32 83 61 100 49 72 19 17.7 809 031 0
4,000 5-50 180 100 26 44 114 75 99 62 89 26 31 809 032 0
6,000 5-75 200 110 32 58 172 97 129 90 127 36 69 809 033 0
8,000 5-75 260 140 36 56 170 100 128 90 130 37 72 809 034 0
10,000 5-100 300 160 40 70 216 116 149 113 113 50 93.8 809 035 0
10,000 50-150 300 160 40 66 218 116 150 113 113 50 108.6 809 036 0
* per pair with angle of inclination 45°
** per pair with chain

TGF plate lifting clamp Safe Grab Dimensions Weight Item


working range ** No.
load * Z A B C D ØE F G ØH
For transporting plate stacks horizontally.
TheTGF plate lifting clamp consists of two [kg] [mm] [kg]
plate clamps in conjunction with a 2-leg chain 350 0-150 298 122 160 41 20 80 20 25 21 809 037 0
sling. 0-250 448 140 809 044 0
Single clamps (without shackles) available 650 0-150 298 122 160 41 20 80 20 25 22 809 038 0
0-250 448 140 809 045 0
on request. 1,300 0-150 298 122 160 41 20 80 20 25 23 809 039 0
0-250 448 140 809 046 0
2,300 0-150 321 130 160 50 23 80 25 25 33 809 040 0
0-250 417 60 809 047 0
3,300 0-150 321 130 160 50 23 80 25 25 39 809 041 0
0-250 417 60 809 048 0
5,000 0-150 405 185 210 82 30 100 30 40 59 809 042 0
0-250 495 809 049 0
6,650 0-150 405 185 210 82 30 100 30 40 65 809 043 0
0-250 495 809 050 0
* per pair with top angle between chains 90°
** per pair without chain
04_08EN.FM

105
Load suspension equipment

Shark plate clamp

For transporting single plates and steel sheets vertically


and for lifting and turning them up to 180°. The
strengthened suspension eye and the drop-forged housing
make the Shark plate clamp particularly torsion-resistant.
The swivel-action jaw guarantees high gripping force in
every position.
Safe working load 1,000 kg to 2,000 kg.
The surface hardness of the goods to be transported must
be below HRC 40!

Safe work- Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


ing load A B ØC D E F G H I J K L No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 Shark 1,0 0 - 20 120 240 36 42 60 72 58 12 12 137 152 210 3.3 809 100 0
2,000 Shark 2,0 0 - 32 170 345 65 58 80 88 69 15 19 191 214 302 6.8 809 101 0
Minimum load is 10% S.W.L.

Shark-S plate clamp

For transporting single plates and steel


sheets vertically and for lifting and turning
them up to 180°. With universal joint suspen-
sion for two-fall use. Torsion resistant thanks
to drop-forged casing. The swivel-action jaw
guarantees high gripping force in every
position.
Safe working load 1,000 kg to 2,000 kg.
The surface hardness of the goods to be
transported must be below HRC 40!

Safe work- Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


ing load A B ØC D E F G H I J K L No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 Shark-S 1,0 0 - 20 120 248 38 42 60 72 58 12 13 137 152 223 3.6 809 102 0
2,000 Shark-S 2,0 0 - 32 170 349 65 58 80 88 69 19 20 191 214 326 7.8 809 103 0
Minimum load is 10% S.W.L.

TAG multi-purpose grab

A grab for universal use which saves a great deal of time


as there is no chain/rope. The grab is easy to open by
lifting and simultaneously pulling on the lever. The spring
tension of the clamping jaw holds the goods transported
safely even is no load is applied.
The jaws can be equipped with a protective coating
(on request).
The surface hardness of the goods to be transported must
be below HRC 30!

Safe work- Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


ing load A B C D E F G H I J K No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
350 TAG 0,35/100 0 - 100 264 259 128 100 100 85 550 75 121 20 78 8.7 809 104 0
350 TAG 0,35/200 90 - 200 382 434 195 156 200 120 760 75 121 20 90 16.3 809 105 0
750 TAG 0,75/100 0 - 100 264 259 128 100 100 85 550 75 121 20 83 8.6 809 106 0
750 TAG 0,75/200 90 - 200 382 434 195 156 200 120 760 75 121 20 90 16.6 809 107 0
1,250 TAG 1,25/100 0 - 100 320 289 128 100 100 85 570 75 121 20 83 14.9 809 108 0
1,250 TAG 1,25/200 90 - 200 382 434 195 156 200 120 760 75 121 20 90 24.3 809 109 0
2,000 TAG 2,0/100 0 - 1000 328 415 135 115 100 105 571 75 121 20 105 20.8 809 110 0
2,000 TAG 2,0/200 90 - 200 375 515 195 165 200 160 750 75 121 20 105 29.1 809 111 0
3,000 TAG 3,0/90 5 - 90 297 290 136 106 90 91 570 82 111 32 137 26.5 809 112 0
5,000 TAG 5,0/90 5 - 90 297 290 136 106 90 91 570 82 111 32 147 30.5 809 113 0
5,000 TAG 5,0/170 80 - 170 354 423 180 155 170 118 620 82 111 32 147 43.8 809 114 0
04_08EN.FM

10,000 TAG 10,0/100 0 - 100 405 423 160 130 100 160 720 102 144 40 208 70.0 809 115 0
10,000 TAG 10,0/200 100 - 200 440 562 200 175 200 183 840 102 144 40 208 105.0 809 116 0
Minimum load is 10% S.W.L.

106
TTR beam grab

The TTR beam grab is particularly useful for transporting


beams vertically into and out of stores.
The spring-loaded safety catch locks the grab to the goods
to be transported even if no load is applied. Simple to ope-
rate, the grab jaw is opened and closed by a lever which
locks it in the open position.

Safe work- Grab Dimensions Weight Item


ing load range No.
STAHLplus Info _ If the beams A B C D E F ØG H I K
are long, we recommend [kg] [mm] [kg]
750 5-16 24 40 132 62 145 118 50 12 12 53 4 809 055 0
using the TTR/TTG beam 1,500 5-25 33 53 176 76 190 152 70 15 17 69 7 809 056 0
grabs in pairs in combination 3,000 5-28 37 56 194 78 208 163 80 20 23 85 13 809 057 0
with a spreader beam.
TTG beam grab

Particularly suitable for transporting beams, sheet steel,


profiles etc. horizontally. The offset suspension eye
ensures that the beam flange will be kept practically
horizontal during transport.

The spring-loaded safety catch locks the grab to the goods


to be transported even if no load is applied.
The lever ensures ease in opening and closing the grab jaw
and locks it in the open position.

Safe work- Grab Dimensions Weight Item


ing load range No.
ØA B C D E F G H I J K L M
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 0-20 20 36 25 148 200 27 20 95 110 10 56 85 13 3 809 058 0
1,500 0-30 70 43 35 140 180 40 30 155 230 15 50 100 16 6 809 059 0
3,000 0-35 80 55 42 180 214 40 32 190 284 20 60 114 20 12 809 068 0
4,500 0-40 90 60 46 196 248 40 35 207 314 20 64 117 25 16 809 069 0
7,500 0-45 110 64 55 222 304 50 42 237 367 22 90 143 30 28 809 070 0

TFRK barrel rim clamp

For transporting upright barrels to DIN 6643.

The clamp grips under the rim of the barrel. A spring-loaded


cam prevents the clamp being opened unintentionally.
Can be used singly, in pairs, or as a multi-leg system.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


work- No.
ing load A B C D E F G ØH
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 152 150 127 30 21 41 17 40 1.2 809 051 0

TKB cable drum clamp

Used in pairs for transporting cable drums.

The safety lever locks the expanded clamp in the cable drum
so as to transport it safely.

Safe work- Dimensions Weight Item


ing load No.
per pair A B ØC D ØE
04_08EN.FM

[kg] [mm] [kg]


5,000 277 277 82 85 50 11 809 121 0

107
Load suspension equipment

TSH screw clamp

The screw clamp is suitable for a wide range of applications.


It is particularly suitable for lifting, turning and pulling steel
sheets, beams, structural steelwork, etc.

The surface hardness of the goods to be transported must not be


above HRC 50.
Screw clamps up to 6 t S.W.L. available on request.

Safe work- Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


ing load Z A B ØC D E F X No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
750 0-30 190 52 19 43 113 35 15 3.1 809 117 0
1,500 0-32 255 65 26 75 130 44 40 7.4 809 073 0
3,000 0-50 290 74 30 85 170 50 40 11.4 809 074 0
5,000 0-80 470 130 50 135 225 72 50 27.6 809 075 0

TDI inside grab

For transporting rectangular and cylindrical


hollow goods such as wire reels. Depending
on the material, the clamping jaws can be
equipped with steel spikes, hard manganese
teeth or a protective coating. Please advise
version required when ordering.

S.W.L.100 to 5,000 kg.

For clamping jaws with protective coating, the


interior wall of the material to be transported
must free of grease and oil.

Safe work- Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item


ing load A B C D E F ØG H I No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
100 TDI 0,1/420 220-420 790 455 550 80 90 - 60 15 22 17 809 122 0
500 TDI 0,5/600 400-600 1200 610 800 100 160 - 92 15 30 51 809 123 0
1,000 TDI 1,0/600 400-600 1200 600 900 100 160 - 92 15 30 53 809 124 0
2,000 TDI 2,0/800 550-800 1400 830 1100 120 220 124 83 30 42 150 809 125 0
3,000 TDI 3,0/800 550-800 1450 920 1000 160 220 151 107 30 42 175 809 126 0
5,000 TDI 5,0/800 550-800 1450 795 1000 160 65 151 107 35 42 220 809 127 0

STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Parallel grab for gearboxes. Grab for gearboxes. Automatic adjust- Grab (scissor principle) for 2-fold pick-up hook with
Swivelling around curved runway. ment of centre of gravity around a cylinder heads. polyamide coating for cylinder
04_08EN.FM

Catch points for locking in position. curved runway. Transport without changing position. crankcases.
Safe working load 50 kg. Safe working load 60 kg. Safe working load 20 kg. Safe working load 70 kg.

108
STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Crate grab (swivel action) and lifting appliances for all types of Crate tipper grab with self-locking swivel mechanism or turning hand-wheel for
KLT crate variants transporting and emptying sheet steel crates

Internal operating grab in 3-arm design - various off-standard designs

Spindle grab Parallel sliding grab for lifting upright reels

Parallel grab Round grab, asymmetrical pick-up Parallel grab for lifting engine blocks or engine components
04_08EN.FM

Other off-standard grabs

109
Load suspension equipment

Vacuum lifters

Advantages for the user

• Efficient, safe and protective handling of flat materials


• No mechanical damage to the load caused by clamps,
grabs or chains
• Modular system combining a high degree of flexibility with
minimum deadweight
• Easy one-man operation
• Various handling options:
- horizontal transport
- vertical transport
- swivel through 90°
- turn through 180°
- 90° swivel and 180° turn
• Fast attachment to and release from material to be
transported
• Optimum matching to the most diverse workpiece
dimensions
• High degree of operational safety and reliability even in
the event of power failure ensured by integrated safety
backup and non-return valve
• Complete solutions with hoist and crane systems

STAHLplus Info _ Matching hoists and


suspension equipment are to be found
on pages 4 ff and 42 ff.

Scope of applications

Vacuum lifters are particularly suitable for transporting:


• sheet metal, channelled and bulb plate
• oxidised or rusty sheet metal plates
• plastic panels
• panes of glass
• coated wood panels
• impermeable and smooth stone slabs
• and all other air-impermeable materials

Safety Advice _ The high safety standards


comply with currently applicable safety
specifications.
04_08EN.FM

110
VACUBOY horizontal

VACUBOY, the vacuum-operated lifter for horizontal handling


operations, is particularly suitable for feeding and discharging
processing machines as well as stacking and de-stacking sheet
products.

Simply attach the device, connect the electrical supply and it is ready
for use. By suitable selection and arrangement of the suction pads, not
only smooth but also structured and corrugated workpieces can be
moved safely without damage.

Easy adjustment of the cross beam as well as the suction pad mounting
allow the lifters to be effectively adapted to the most diverse
workpiece dimensions.

If you cannot find the suction lifter you need, please enquire! Enquiry
form on page 115.

Technical features (standard version for all devices) VB 60/6

• Acoustic warning facility


• Vacuum gauge in visual range
• Oil-free vacuum pump with safety accumulator and non-return valve
• Vacuum control by means of manually operated slide valve or
solenoid valve available against surcharge
• Two-hand manipulator handle
• Cardanic mounting of suction pads
• Variable position of suction pads
• Painted safety yellow-green (RAL 6018), partially galvanised
• Supply voltage 400 V, 50 Hz

VB 80/8

Safe working Model Number of Suction pad Dimensions Weight Item


load suction pads Ø L1 L2 B1 B2 B3 H A No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
250 VB 60/4 4 160 1800 900 800 350 600 approx. 60 50 806 300 0
VB 60/6 6 160 600 60 806 301 0
VB 60/8 8 110 80 806 302 0
500 VB 80/4 4 220 2400 900 800 500 600 approx. 60 70 806 303 0
VB 80/6 6 220 600 85 806 304 0
VB 80/8 8 160 100 806 305 0
1,000 VB 100/6 6 280 2400 1100 800 600 900 approxc 85 180 806 306 0
VB 100/8 8 220 3000 a. 800 230 806 307 0
04_08EN.FM

2,000 VB 100/M/12 12 280 3000 1100 1200 600 900 approx. 85 320 806 308 0
VB 100/M/16 16 200 800 360 806 309 0

111
Load suspension equipment

VACUBOY 90° swivel-action

The swivel-action VACUBOY vacuum lifter is particularly suitable for handling plates that need to be turned through approx. 90°. The workpiece
can be taken up both horizontally and vertically.
The vacuum lifter is controlled by ergonomically designed pushbuttons in the manipulator handle, the suspended workpiece can be turned
without exerting any effort by means of a motor-driven swivel facility.
If you cannot find the vacuum lifter you need, please enquire! Enquiry form on page 115.

Technical features (standard version for all devices)

• Acoustic warning facility


• Vacuum gauge in visual range
• Oil-free vacuum pump with safety accumulator and non-return valve
• Vacuum control by means of manually operated slide valve or
solenoid valve available against surcharge
• Two-hand manipulator handle
• Cardanic mounting of suction paids
• Variable position of suction pads
• Painted safety yellow-green (RAL 6018), partially galvanised
• Supply voltage 400 V, 50 Hz

VB 60/4-90E

STAHLplus Info _ Matching hoists and suspen-


sion equipment are to be found on pages 4 ff
and 42 ff.

VB 60/8-90E

Safe working Model Number of Suction pad Dimensions Weight Item


load suction pads Ø L1 L2 B1 B2 B3 H A No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
250/125 VB 60/4-90E 4 160 1800 1300 800 350 600 approx. 60 75 806 310 0
VB 60/8-90E 8 110 1050 85 806 311 0
500/250 VB 80/4-90E 4 220 2400 1300 800 500 600 approx. 60 85 806 312 0
VB 80/8-90E 8 160 1050 105 806 313 0
04_08EN.FM

1,000/500 VB 100/8-90E 8 220 3000 1500 1200 600 900 ap.1100 85 350 806 314 0
2,000/1,000 VB 100M/12-90E 12 280 3000 1500 1200 600 900 ap.1100 85 530 806 315 0

112
Mini VACUBOY

• Extremely compact and light-weight device with only 20 kg deadweight


• For horizontal and vertical transport of inherently stable loads up to 300 kg, in particular
for solid and smooth stone slabs, drums and containers, sheets of glass and other
air-impermeable materials.
• One suspension eye for vertical and one for horizontal transport.
• Supply voltage 400 V, 50 Hz, supply cable 1.0 m

Safe work- Model Suction Vacuum Vacuum Headroom Weight Item


ing load pads producer control approx. No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
100/50 VBM 100/1 GRL 220 T4.4 manual 470 20 806 069 0
150/75 VBM 150/4 GRL 110 500 30 806 070 0
200/100 VBM 200/1 GRL 280 470 20 806 071 0

Self-acting suction lifters

Transportation of air-impermeable loads with relatively clean and flat surfaces such as metal
plates (a thin film of rust is no problem), polished blocks of marble or granite, coated chipboard
panels, plastic panels, etc.

Technical features
• Self-acting suction lifters produce the necessary suction force
dependent upon the weight of the load.
• With vacuum gauges and optical and acoustic warning signal.

Safe working load Model Number of suction pads Length of beam Max. dimensions of load Item
[kg] pad Ø [mm] [mm] [mm] No.
Single device 270 U02-E Ø350 - 1000x2000 806 063 0
for inherently stable loads 640 U075-E Ø480 - 806 064 0
1,100 U125-E Ø625 - 806 065 0
Multiple suction pad device 300 U02-2 2x Ø350 1500 1500x3000 806 066 0
for large-surfaced, 750 U075-2 2x Ø415 806 067 0
more instable loads 1,250 U125-2 2x Ø625 806 068 0

Examples of off-standard design suction lifters


04_08EN.FM

Suction lifter (10,000 kg) for long steel plates for loading a flame-cutting machine. Off-standard vacuum lifter for 120 kg blocks of cheese packed in foil permitting air to
escape. 2-step chain hoist control for lifting-lowering on the hinged, ergonomic guide
bar.

113
Load suspension equipment

CLAD BOY suction lifter

The CLAD BOY suction lifter is designed for transporting roofing and walling panels of various sizes both vertically and horizontally.
Power is supplied by a rechargeable 24 V battery.
Technical features

• Safe working load at 60% vacuum: 160 kg


• Frame red (RAL 300) with suspension eyes for crane hook. Length
approx. 1000 mm, overall height approx. 1000 mm.
• Take-up unit with 4 suction plates AL 80x400, rigidly suspended and
movable on the galvanised main beam.
• "Suction release" by 3/2-way valve with safety device
• Attached vacuum gauge with red-green range. Electronic warning
device (specified by BGR 500).
• Vacuum reservoir (approx. 10 l), non-return valve and adjustable
underpressure switch for switching vacuum pump on and off
Safe Weight Item
working No. automatically.
load • Device battery 24 V, 18 Ah, maintenance-free, for horizontal and
[kg] [kg] vertical use. Well over 100 work cycles with one battery charge.
160 115 806 361 0 • Switched-mode battery charger, 2.7 A, 24 V.

AERO suction lifter

for horizontal transport of air-impermeable panels and steel sheets, can be swivelled by 180°.
Technical features

• Safe working load at 60% vacuum:


- AERO 150/4R: 150 kg (4 suction plates)
- AERO 350/8R: 350 kg (8 suction plates)
• Main frame (C-shaped) with adjustable crane eye. The main frame is
also the vacuum reservoir. With non-return valve and underpressure
switch.
• Manipulating switch for the functions "suction - release" and control
switch for "swivel 0-180°".
• Swivelling by means of gear motor with brake.
• 4 or 8 suction plates AL 210R, Ø210 mm, with black buna N seal /
corrugated rubber surface. The suction plates are cardanically
mounted.
• Vacuum pump type VAL 6T, 6 m³/h, 400 V, 50 Hz, 0.25 kW
Safe Length of Length of Overall Weight Item
working main beam cross- height No.
load beam
[kg] [mm] [kg]
AERO 150/R4
150 1600 800 ap. 1200 170 806 362 0
350 2000 800 ap. 1200 ap. 200 806 363 0

Off-line equipment

The suction lifters shown below work off-line. This makes them
extremely mobile.
Please enquire!
04_08EN.FM

AERO 350/R8

114
Fax enquiry for suction lifters Simply copy - fill in - fax

You can’t solve your transport problem with the suction lifters Please copy this page and complete with the required data and
described above? We can still help you. dimensions.

Fax it to us. We look forward to advising you and sending you a


quotation by return.

1. Workpiece:

Material: ..................................................................................................................................................................

Dimensions and weights Length Width Thickness


Maximum [mm] [mm] [mm]
Minimum [mm] [mm] [mm]
Max. weight [kg] Max. weight per metre: [kg/m]

Surface condition: … dry … smooth … dusty … oily


… wet … rough … sensitive
Suction ability: … impermeable … air permeable … suction test required (sample)
Temperatures: Workpiece min./max.: ........./.......... °C Ambient min./max.: ......../........ °C

2. Handling:

Method of handling: … Load horizontal … Swivelling load … 90° … 85° … ................°


… Rotating on one level … Turning load … 180° … 360°
Application environment: … Enclosed space … Outdoors under roof … Outdoors

3. Equipment features:
Vacuum control: … Manual sliding valve … Automatic switching … Radio remote control
… Magnetic valve incl. pushbuttons on device … Crane motions
Electrical connections: ............... V ................Hz … 3-phase A.C. … A.C.
… L1 … L2 … L3 …N … PE
Supply: … CEE 16 A plug … Cable balancer with coupling
… Multiple plug … Power supply by customer

4. Crane installation:
… None … Existing, safe working load: .......................................kg,
hook size: ......................................................
… Single-point suspension … Two-point suspension, dimension between hooks: .............mm

5. Enclosures / quotation date:


… Sketch showing handling procedure … Sketch of workpiece
… Material sample (approx. 500 x 500) … Other:.........................
Quotation by: ......................... Desired delivery date:......../............ c/w / year
… Quotation for test acc. to accident prevention regulations (1 x per year) requested

Sender/customer no.
................................................................................................................................
Company
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Street/P.O. Box
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post code/town
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Name of person ordering
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Department/job title
04_08EN.FM

.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telephone Fax
.................................................................................................................................................................................................

115
Load suspension equipment

General instructions for use for lifting magnets

These instructions for use provide only general information on the use Determination of safe working load
of lifting magnets and do not take the place of the operating
instructions provided by the manufacturer for individual pieces of There are various negative influences on the material to be lifted and
equipment! the ambient temperature. Every lifting magnet is accompanied by a
safe working load table. This table lists the safe working loads
Please read also our general instructions for the use of load dependent upon material thickness, surfaces, nature (air gap) and
suspension equipment and slings on pages 120-121 and 142-144. material.
Lifting processes using load suspension equipment may only be
performed by a skilled loader (instructed in theory and practice).
Load suspension equipment which has been known to have been
overloaded or otherwise exposed to damaging influences must no
longer be used until it have been inspected and repaired if necessary.

Modifications to state of delivery Influences on safe working load

The form and construction of load suspension equipment must not be Material thickness
modified by e.g. bending, welding, grinding, removing parts, drilling
holes, removing safety devices such as interlocks, bolts, locking pins, Workpieces which are too thin cannot take up all the magnetic force
etc. without the manufacturer’s permission, as the manufacturer’s lines. Some of the magnetic force lines flow through the air underneath
declaration of conformity and any liability or warranty would lose their the workpiece causing the safe working load to be reduced.
validity .

Air gap

Restrictions of use The quality of the workpiece surface plays a


major role. The rougher or more uneven the
Danger zone surface is, the larger the "air gap" between the
workpiece and the magnet. Air is a strong
The presence of persons in the danger zone of the load is forbidden for resistance to magnetic force lines. Also paint,
the duration of the lifting and transport procedure. rust, scale, grease etc. form an "air gap" and
thus a resistance in the magnetic circuit. Please note the relevant safe
working load tables on the magnet or in the operating instructions.

Impact loading, load swinging Ratio of workpiece dimensions to magnet dimensions

The safe working loads stated apply for loading the load suspension Be sure to observe the maximum and minimum plate dimensions given
equipment without any impact. in the lifting table.
The full safe working load can be utilised in the case of slight impacts The contact surface of the workpiece should be at least as large as the
such as arise from lifting and lowering or moving the load on the crane. pole surface of the magnet.
High impacts (e.g. knocking the load during transportation) or swinging
loads are not permissible!
Temperature of load

The safe working loads apply at 20°C. If the temperature is consi-


Goods to be lifted derably higher, around 100°C or more, the magnetic properties of the
magnet material are impaired. The maximum permissible temperature
Load suspension equipment is designed by the manufacturer for is thus given in the operating instructions.
particular applications and goods any may not be used for other
purposes without consulting him. Detailed information is to be found in
the relevant manufacturer’s operating instructions. To ensure safe use,
the operating instructions must always be made available to the users.
It is forbidden to transport persons with load suspension equipment!
04_08EN.FM

116
ELM / SK-I permanent lifting magnet

With the ELM / SK-I lifting magnet, ferrous


materials can be lifted efficiently regardless of
their shape.
The powerful magnet is applied by turning the
lever through 90°.

Technical features
• Neodymium magnet
• Compact dimensions and low deadweight
• Low-depth magnetic field making the lifting SKI
magnet also suitable for lifting thin ferrous
sheets
ELM
• Particularly suitable for moving round material
• Operating temperature range from -10°C
to +80°C
• Safety factor 3.5:1
• Safe working load is reduced by 30% when
used vertically

Additional crane eye for ELM 300 / 600


For transporting steel plates horizontally.

Item No.: 806 388 0

Safe working load Model Sheet Ø Length of Dimensions Weight Item


Flat Round thickness max. load A B C D E F G H No.
material material min. max.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
100 45 ELM 100 15 150 1000 107 84 120 125 60 71 41 30 2.5 806 373 0
300 135 ELM 300 25 250 1500 280 155 156 185 90 93 51 41 8.6 806 374 0
600 270 ELM 600 30 350 2000 255 224 212 260 115 120 77 52 21.0 806 375 0
1,000 450 ELM 1000 40 450 2500 280 245 286 371 165 169 97 87 46.0 806 384 0
2,000 900 ELM 2000 55 550 3000 422 380 348 512 216 215 105 121 118.0 806 385 0
3,000 1,350 ELM 3000 60 650 3500 560 530 400 770 216 222 147 80 181.0 806 386 0
5,000 2,250 SK-I 5000 70 650 4500 610 550 610 750 370 310 260 95 350.0 806 387 0

SP 16 permanent lifting magnet

With the SP 16 lifting magnet, ferrous materials


can be lifted efficiently regardless of their
shape.
The powerful magnet is applied by turning the
lever through 90°.

Technical features
• Neodymium magnet
• Compact dimensions and low deadweight
• Operating temperature range from -10°C
to +80°C
• 3:1 safety factor

Safe working load Model Sheet Ø Length of Dimensions Weight Item


Flat Round thickness min. load A B C D E No.
material material min. max.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
150 65 SP16.00150 10 40/100 2000 155 75 83 62 35 6 806 050 0
250 100 SP16.00250 15 40/160 2000 195 95 105 62 35 12 806 051 0
500 210 SP16.00500 20 40/220 2500 250 105 118 87 52 21 806 052 0
1,000 540 SP16.01000 25 80/300 3000 310 150 168 88 52 55 806 053 0
04_08EN.FM

1,500 810 SP16.01500 30 80/350 3000 370 178 201 123 64 95 806 054 0
2,000 1,080 SP16.02000 35 80/400 3500 400 216 236 124 64 145 806 055 0

117
Load suspension equipment

Safe working loads for ELM / SK-I lifting magnets Safe working loads for SP16 lifting magnets
relating to material thickness dependent upon material thickness
Model Material thickness Model Material thickness
20 mm 15 mm 10 mm 5 mm 20 mm 15 mm 10 mm 5 mm
Test Work Test Work Test Work Test Work Test Work Test Work Test Work Test Work
load load load load load load load load load load load load load load load load
[kg] [kg]
ELM 100 350 100 350 100 245 70 140 40 SP16.00150 450 150 450 150 450 150 220 70
ELM 300 945 270 735 210 525 150 315 90 SP16.00250 750 250 750 250 490 160 270 90
ELM 600 1,575 450 1,260 360 945 270 525 150 SP16.00500 1,500 500 1,500 500 650 215 410 135
ELM 1000 2,100 600 1,750 500 1,225 350 700 200 SP16.01000 3,000 1,000 2,100 700 870 290 -* -*
ELM 2000 3,150 900 2,450 700 1,750 500 1,050 300 SP16.01500 4,500 1,500 -* -* -* -* -* -*
ELM 3000 4,200 1,200 3,150 900 2,100 600 -* -* SP16.02000 6,000 2,000 -* -* -* -* -* -*
SK-I 5000 4,500 1,500 3,000 1,000 -* -* -* -* * Not possible
* Not possible
Ultralift-TP permanent lifting magnet

The TP permanent lifting magnet will take up flat ferrous materials.


It is magnetised by turning the lever by 90°.

Technical features
• Compact dimensions and low deadweight
• Particularly suitable for lifting thin iron plates
• Can be used from -10°C to +80°C
• Safety factor 3:1

Safe work- Model Sheet thickn. Length Dimensions Weight Item


ing load min. max. A B C D E F No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
150 TP 150 8 1500 202 150 181 100 126 74 8 806 364 0
300 TP 300 8 2000 352 300 181 100 126 74 15 806 365 0

SH / HL magnetic carrier

With the SH / HL magnetic carrier, steel plate and sheet steel products can easily be lifted and transported
either by hand or by attaching them to a crane. The most effective grip is achieved on smooth surfaces.

A release latch device allows the load to be detached easily from the magnet.

Safe work- Tractive Model Base area Plate Weight Item STAHLplus Info _
HL 10 HL 20 ing load force thickn. No. If you are unable
[kg] [mm] [kg] to solve your
SH 12/4 30 15 HL 10 150x100 from 1 1.5 806 371 0 transport tasks
SH 35K SH 60 50 25 HL 20 190x140 from 1 2.0 806 372 0
170 100 SH 12/4 133x106 from 1 1.4 806 366 0 with the magnets
350 175 SH 25 160x120 from 2 2.5 806 368 0 shown here, we can still help you!
250 170 SH 35K 190x110 from 3 4.0 806 369 0 Just ask us!
500 300 SH 60 310x190 from 6 12.0 806 370 0
04_08EN.FM

Infinitely adjustable magnet beam with infrared remote control for a flame-cutting machine, Magnetic beams (rigid or adjustable) for transporting individual long, thin plates (standard
safe working load 3,200 kg, working width from 400 - 2000 mm. from 5 mm in thickness up to 16 m in length and 25 t in weight). With infinitely adjustable
electrohydraulic telescopic arms and radio remote control. Slewing drive also available as
an option.

118
Load suspension equipment from crane manufacturer STAHL CraneSystems

On the following pages we


show you examples of our
range of spreader beams. If
you are unable to handle your
transport task with our stan-
dard range, we would be
please to quote you a suitable
solution. Please enquire!

Safety Advice_
The high safety standards
comply with currently applica-
ble accident prevention
regulations and requirements
of the Employers’ Liability
Insurance Association.
EN 13155 and FEM 1.001 are
taken into account when
calculating load suspension
equipment. All approvals and
qualifications necessary for
production are available.

Stahlplus Info _
Load suspension equipment in
explosion-protected design up
to 1,000 kg S.W.L. available on
request.

STAHLplus Info _ On page 134 and 135 you will find a detailed
questionnaire which may be of help for you to make initial
contact!
04_08EN.FM

119
Load suspension equipment

General instructions for the use of load suspension equipment If load suspension equipment is used which holds the load e.g. with
magnetic, suction or friction forces without any other positive locking
Definitions safety device, the load must on no account be moved over persons.

Load suspension equipment


Commissioning load suspension equipment and slings
Components not permanently attached to the hoisting equipment,
mounted between crane or hoist hook and load, for the safe Before using a sling for the first time, it must be ensured that:
attachment of the load. For example: spreader beams, lifting clamps, • the sling corresponds to the order;
C hooks, grabs, loading forks, etc. • the declaration of conformity or test certificate is available;
• the marking and S.W.L. ratings on the sling correspond to the
Specialist declaration of conformity or test certificate;
• the operating instructions have been read carefully.
A person having specialist knowledge, practical experience and The slings must be checked for obvious defects before each use!
training able to perform the required tests after having been suitably
instructed. Obvious defects

are for example bent hooks, cracked or bent chain links, displaced
Determining weight of load connecting bolts in chain connecting links, broken strands of fibre or
wire ropes, cuts in web slings, damage to web sling sleeves.
The load on the suspension equipment and the sling must not be
greater than that stated on the S.W.L. tag for the type of suspension
and inclination angle. Delivery papers, information on the load itself, Prescribed maintenance and inspections
weight tables e.g. for steel sections etc., calculation or weighing with a
load cell can be used to determine the weight. Slings and load suspension equipment must be maintained in a state of
safety in use by means of regular maintenance (as per regulations and
manufacturer’s instructions).
Handling load The user must ensure that load suspension equipment and thus also
slings are inspected by a specialist at intervals of not more than one
Before hoisting starts it must be ensured that the load moves freely and year.
is not jammed or still lashed or screwed down. Slings must not be Depending on the conditions of use, inspections may be necessary at
overloaded. Slings must not be twisted or knotted. If hooks are used, shorter intervals than one year. This applies e.g. if they are frequently
the load must be at the base of the jaw and never at the tip. The hook used with the maximum permissible load, in the case of increased
must move freely at the sling point to prevent bending stress. The wear, corrosion or heat, the effect of chemicals, or if increased risk of
suspension link or loops must move freely in the hoist’s load hook. If damage is to be expected on the basis of the company’s experiences.
two loops or eyes are placed on the hoist’s load hook, it must be Inspection records must be filed. If the user has any doubts as to the
ensured that there is sufficient room and they do not hinder each other. safe condition of the load suspension equipment and slings, he must
decommission them and have them checked.
There must be no danger of the loops being
pulled out of the hoist or crane hook by the Extraordinary inspections
angle between the two legs.
Inclination angles above 45° in the hoist or The user must ensure that slings are subjected to an extraordinary
crane hook may already be hazardous, inspection by a specialist after any damage or incidents which might
depending on the hook design! affect the lifting capacity, and after repairs.
Wrong!
If the sling comes into contact with sharp Cleaning before inspections
edges of the load, it must be protected by intermediate layers such as
wood, edge protectors, PU sleeves or other means. The slings must be thoroughly cleaned before being inspected. Chains
and ropes must be cleaned so that they are free of oil, dirt and
Force must not be used to pull slings out from under the load. Loads corrosion. Any method of cleaning is permissible that does not corrode
must be set down on wood blocks so that there is sufficient space to the base material. Any procedures which might cause hydrogen
remove the slings. The sling must only be grasped from the outside embrittlement (e.g. stripping), overheating, material erosion or material
when being position to prevent hands being endangered when the deformation , or disguise cracks or surface damage, must be avoided
sling tautens. When the load is ready for lifting it should be lifted slowly
at first and checked that it is attached safely and remains horizontal. If
the load tips it should be set down and the sling repositioned above the
centre of gravity. The loader must leave the dangerous spot before the
load is lifted. Persons must not stand unnecessarily in dangerous
spots, in particular underneath suspended loads, in travel and slewing
areas or in blind travel and transport areas.
04_08EN.FM

120
General instructions on the use of load suspension equipment
(continued)

Notes and inspection records Obligatory information - residual risks

Records must be kept of all inspections and repairs, and filed for the When loads are lifted with slings, the person below or near the load is
service life of the sling. The law on protecting employees also endangered. As manufacturer, we must advise you as the user that
prescribes drawing up an inspection plan for all load suspension residual risks remain when using slings, in particular that the
equipment. connection of sling to load may be insufficiently safe or the load swing
after lifting and endanger the loader. Falling loads may endanger
persons and goods. As user, you should ensure thorough training of
your loaders and crane operators.

STS spreader beam, rigid Safe working Dimensions Weight Item


load No.
L H h b
Lifting beam with suspended safety swivel hooks (not adjustable). The [kg] [mm] [kg]
suspension eye is suitable for load hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 1,000 1000 400 90 60 45 808 162 0
2000 400 55 808 163 0
3000 400 75 808 164 0
4000 420 130 808 165 0
2,000 2000 420 90 60 65 808 166 0
3000 440 120 808 167 0
4000 440 200 808 168 0
3,000 2000 470 120 80 80 808 169 0
3000 490 150 808 170 0
4000 490 230 808 171 0
5,000 2000 420 120 80 120 808 172 0
3000 470 200 808 173 0
4000 490 230 808 174 0
8,000 2000 530 150 100 155 808 175 0
3000 560 285 808 176 0
4000 580 400 808 177 0
10,000 2000 550 150 100 175 808 178 0
3000 600 300 808 179 0
4000 620 500 808 180 0
15,000 3000 960 320 155 350 808 181 0
4000 1000 540 808 182 0
5000 1080 720 808 183 0
20,000 3000 1100 360 120 420 808 184 0
4000 1150 610 808 185 0
5000 1200 875 808 186 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

Technical features
• STS, STV and TV feature swivel hooks (mounted in plain bearings),
they cannot be turned under load.
• Standard paint finish: yellow (RAL 1021), alkyd resin based
04_08EN.FM

121
Load suspension equipment

STV spreader beam, adjustable Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
load L L H h b R
Lifting beam with suspended safety swivel hooks (cannot be turned
max. min.
under load). The working width L can be adjusted by shifting pins. The [kg] [mm] [kg]
suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 1,000 1000 400 450 90 60 100 25 808 198 0
2000 800 450 200 55 808 199 0
3000 1000 450 200 75 808 211 0
4000 1500 470 250 130 808 212 0
2,000 2000 800 470 90 60 200 65 808 213 0
3000 1000 490 200 120 808 214 0
4000 1500 490 250 200 808 226 0
3,000 2000 800 520 120 80 200 80 808 227 0
3000 1000 540 200 150 808 228 0
b 4000 1500 540 250 230 808 229 0
5,000 2000 800 600 120 80 200 120 808 235 0
3000 1000 620 200 200 808 236 0
h

4000 1500 640 250 330 808 237 0


8,000 2000 800 700 150 100 200 155 808 238 0
H

3000 1000 740 200 285 808 239 0


4000 1500 760 250 400 808 243 0
R L min. 10,000 2000 800 720 150 100 200 175 808 244 0
3000 1000 760 200 300 808 249 0
4000 1500 780 250 500 808 250 0
L max. 15,000 3000 1000 1010 320 155 200 350 808 251 0
ha384v
4000 1500 1030 250 540 808 252 0
5000 2000 1070 300 720 808 253 0
20,000 3000 1000 1170 360 180 200 420 808 254 0
4000 1500 1210 250 610 808 255 0
5000 2000 1250 300 875 808 256 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

STAHLplus Info _ Easily adjustable safety hooks


permit flexible and cost-effective transport of loads.
Please state the size of the crane load hook when
ordering. A table detailing load hooks conforming
to DIN 15400 is to be found on page 140.

TV spreader beam, adjustable

Lifting beam with suspended, easy-to-adjust safety swivel hooks


(cannot be turned under load). The suspension eye is suitable for
hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
load L L min. H h b R
max.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 1000 500 464 115 55 125 40 808 106 0
2000 1000 504 125 60 808 107 0
3000 1000 504 250 85 808 108 0
5000 1000 544 500 150 808 109 0
2,500 2000 1000 634 150 75 125 80 808 114 0
3000 1000 654 250 140 808 115 0
5000 1000 694 500 230 808 116 0
5,000 2000 1000 753 190 90 125 110 808 117 0
3000 1000 803 250 180 808 118 0
5000 1000 753 500 420 808 119 0
7,500 2000 1000 861 240 110 125 180 808 124 0
3000 1000 921 250 280 808 125 0
5000 1000 831 500 550 808 126 0
10,000 2000 1000 931 270 130 125 200 808 127 0
3000 1000 991 250 280 808 128 0
5000 1000 911 500 750 808 129 0
15,000 2000 1000 1130 330 155 125 350 808 134 0
3000 1000 1170 250 850 808 135 0
5000 1000 1090 500 950 808 136 0
20,000 2000 1000 800 370 170 125 350 808 137 0
04_08EN.FM

3000 1000 820 250 1100 808 138 0


5000 1000 900 500 1550 808 139 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

122
STHS spreader beam, rigid

H-shaped lifting beam with 4 safety swivel hooks.


The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working B L H h b No.
load max. max.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 1000 2000 480 90 60 90 808 200 0
3,000 1000 2000 530 120 80 150 808 201 0
2000 3000 550 280 808 202 0
5,000 2000 3000 650 120 80 350 808 203 0
4000 690 500 808 204 0
5000 720 650 808 205 0
8,000 2000 5000 750 150 100 720 808 206 0
3000 6000 780 1000 808 207 0
10,000 2000 4000 850 150 100 800 808 208 0
3000 6000 900 1300 808 209 0
15,000 3000 6000 1200 200 120 1600 808 210 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

Technical features
• STHV/STHS lifting beams feature swivel hooks (mounted in plain bearings), they
cannot be turned under load.
• Standard paint finish: yellow (RAL 1021), alkyd resin based

STHV spreader beam, adjustable

The H-shaped lifting beam is adjustable in length and width.


The 4 safety swivel hooks are connected to the beam in such a way that they can be
moved.
The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working B B L L H h b RB RL No.
load max. min. max. min.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 1000 400 2000 800 560 90 60 100 200 90 808 215 0
3,000 1000 400 2000 800 630 120 80 100 200 150 808 216 0
2000 800 3000 1000 675 200 280 808 217 0
5,000 2000 800 3000 1000 750 120 80 200 200 350 808 218 0
4000 1000 770 250 500 808 219 0
5000 1500 790 250 650 808 220 0
8,000 2000 800 5000 1500 920 150 100 200 250 720 808 221 0
3000 1000 6000 2000 970 1000 808 222 0
10,000 2000 800 4000 1000 1020 150 100 200 250 800 808 223 0
04_08EN.FM

3000 1000 6000 2000 1105 1300 808 224 0


15,000 3000 1000 6000 2000 1265 200 120 200 250 1600 808 225 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

123
Load suspension equipment

SKT cross beam

The SKT cross beam features 4 swivel hooks (cannot be turned under
load).
The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
B L H h b
load
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 1000 1000 400 90 60 50 808 193 0
2,000 1500 1500 450 90 60 70 808 194 0
3,000 1500 1500 480 120 80 80 808 195 0
5,000 2000 2000 550 120 80 160 808 196 0
8,000 2000 2000 600 150 100 200 808 197 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

Rotating cross beam

The rotating cross beam has round ends for accepting web slings
(e.g. when transporting boats). It can be slewed together when not in
use to save space.
The suspension bolt is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 150401.

Safe working Dimensions Weight Item


load No.
L H
[kg] [mm] [kg]
10,000 3500 175 550 806 149 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

SBBT Big Bag beam SBBT-R Big Bag beam, tubular design

The SBBT Big Bag beam features 4 flame-cut hooks for accepting The tubular-design Big Bag beam can accept 60 mm wide Big Bag
60 mm wide Big Bag loops. loops.
The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401. The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No. working No.
B L h b s s1 B L h b
load load
[kg] [mm] [kg] [kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 900 900 90 60 80 60 30 808 187 0 1,000 1000 1000 90 60 35 808 190 0
2,000 90 60 35 808 188 0 1,500 90 60 45 808 191 0
3,000 120 80 40 808 189 0 2,000 90 60 50 808 192 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge. Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.
04_08EN.FM

124
TRB spreader beam with ramshorn hooks, rigid

Lifting beam with welded-on ramshorn hooks at both ends.


The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
load L H h b c
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 1000 190 115 55 33 15 806 271 0
2000 230 38 806 272 0
3000 230 53 806 273 0
5000 270 123 806 274 0
2,500 2000 300 150 75 39 57 806 275 0
3000 320 90 806 276 0
5000 360 203 806 277 0
5,000 2000 375 190 90 49 86 806 278 0
3000 425 160 806 279 0
5000 375 469 806 280 0
7,500 2000 470 240 110 62 131 806 281 0
3000 530 231 806 282 0
5000 440 564 806 283 0
10,000 2000 540 270 130 62 165 806 284 0
3000 600 282 806 285 0
5000 520 721 806 286 0
15,000 2000 640 330 155 69 247 806 287 0
3000 680 359 806 288 0
5000 600 922 806 289 0
20,000 2000 600 370 170 78 440 806 290 0
3000 620 620 806 291 0
5000 700 1132 806 292 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the crane


load hook when ordering. A table detailing load hooks
conforming to DIN 15400 is to be found on page 140.
On page 134 and 135 you will also find a detailed
questionnaire for your individual enquiry.

TRB spreader beam with ramshorn hooks, rigid

Lifting beam with welded-on ramshorn hooks at both ends.


The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
load L L H h b c R
max. min.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 1000 500 190 115 55 33 125 17 806 293 0
2000 1000 230 125 42 806 294 0
3000 1000 230 250 58 806 295 0
5000 1000 270 500 129 806 296 0
2,500 2000 1000 300 150 75 39 125 63 806 297 0
3000 1000 320 250 97 806 298 0
5000 1000 360 500 211 806 299 0
5,000 2000 1000 375 190 90 49 125 100 806 316 0
3000 1000 425 250 178 806 317 0
5000 1000 375 500 491 806 318 0
7,500 2000 1000 470 240 110 62 125 158 806 319 0
3000 1000 530 250 267 806 320 0
5000 1000 440 500 600 806 321 0
10,000 2000 1000 540 270 130 62 125 209 806 322 0
3000 1000 600 250 338 806 323 0
5000 1000 520 500 784 806 324 0
15,000 2000 1000 640 330 155 69 125 321 806 325 0
3000 1000 680 250 442 806 326 0
5000 1000 600 500 1021 806 327 0
20,000 2000 1000 600 370 170 78 125 530 806 328 0
3000 1000 620 250 715 806 329 0
04_08EN.FM

5000 1000 700 500 1246 806 330 0


Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

125
Load suspension equipment

Spreader beam for box pallets


b
Sturdy design in high-grade steel
with suspension eye suitable for
hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

h
With two yokes for lifting individual
box pallets.
One yoke can be swivelled for
H

attachment.
ha023va

The low headroom permits maxi-


mum utilisation of crane capacity.
B
L

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No. STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the
load L B H h b crane load hook when ordering. A table detailing
[kg] [mm] [kg] load hooks conforming to DIN 15400 is to be
1,000 1250 600 405 90 60 40 806 153 0
2,000 435 90 60 45 806 154 0 found on page 140.
3,000 455 120 80 70 806 155 0 On page 134 and 135 you will also find a detailed
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge. questionnaire for your individual enquiry.

Spreader beam with chain suspension

2 designs (both including chain sling)

Rigid: constant length

Telescopic: effective width easy to adjust by means of pins

Both versions feature a 2-leg chain sling for hooks to DIN 15401. Fixed
hooks mounted on each beam end.

Option: design with swivel hooks on request.

Safe Dimensions Rigid Telescopic


working H Weight Item L H Weight Item
load L h b 45° 60° No. min. No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 2000 110 60 1400 1060 10 806 160 0 1500 1000-1300 15 806 175 0
3000 1900 1300 18 806 161 0 2000 1300-1830 23 806 176 0
4000 2400 1600 35 806 162 0 2500 1650-2370 40 806 177 0
2,000 2000 135 75 1450 1050 26 806 163 0 1500 1050-1350 30 806 178 0
3000 75 1950 1350 30 806 164 0 2000 1350-1880 38 806 179 0
4000 70 2450 1650 50 806 165 0 2500 1680-2410 55 806 180 0
3,200 2000 160 90 1480 1080 30 806 166 0 1500 1080-1380 34 806 181 0
3000 1980 1380 48 806 167 0 2000 1380-1910 53 806 182 0
4000 2480 1680 70 806 168 0 2500 1680-2440 75 806 183 0
5,000 2000 180 100 1580 1180 45 806 169 0 1500 1180-1480 50 806 184 0
3000 2080 1480 60 806 170 0 2000 1480-2000 64 806 185 0
4000 2580 1780 80 806 171 0 2500 1780-2540 87 806 186 0
10,000 2000 260 140 1800 1400 70 806 172 0 1500 1400-1700 78 806 187 0
3000 2300 1700 120 806 173 0 2000 1700-2220 134 806 188 0
04_08EN.FM

4000 2800 2000 130 806 174 0 2500 2000-2760 142 806 189 0
Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge.

126
Long hook beam

Long loads can be transported and turned


safely with long hook beams.
Various designs are available:

• Two-crane rotary beam


• Rotary beam with fixed hook
• Rotary beam with adjustable hook
• Rotary beam with fixed long hook
• Rotary beam with adjustable long hook

Combinations of these designs are also possible. It must always be


ensured that the centre of gravity of the load is vertically below the
point of rotation as otherwise there is a danger of the load tilting during
rotation.

If this cannot be guaranteed, a universal joint should be used between


upper and lower beam.

Please enquire.
Transport packing available against surcharge

STAHLplus Info _ Just copy this sketch and fill in the dimensions
required. A detailed questionnaire can also be found on pages 134
and 135.

Examples of more off-standard solutions - please enquire!

Rigidly reeved C-hook for sensitive materials, boom and inside of hook protected by Automatic 6-arm lifting beam for transporting rings with 10,000 mm diameter.
PE. Replaceable boom. Safe working load 6 or 10 t. The arms move into a preset position when lifting. Safe working load 27 t.
04_08EN.FM

Two-crane or two-crab lifting beam with rotating central hook. Safe working load 40 t. Off-standard lifting beam, 12 chain connections on the load side. Safe working laod 50 t.

127
Load suspension equipment

Manual turnover spreader beam

With suspension for single hook to DIN 15401.


With two turning units suitable for web slings.

For transporting and turning goods over manually.


The sheave suspensions can be adjusted to the desired working width.
The sheaves can be equipped with endless webbing slings. With chain
sheaves on request.

When using this beam please ensure that the centre of gravity is in the
centre.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
load L L h b m t
max. min.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 1000 500 80 40 70 260 18 806 259 0
2000 1000 300 43 806 260 0
3000 1500 320 65 806 261 0
1,000 1000 500 90 60 70 280 20 806 262 0
2000 1000 320 45 806 263 0
3000 1500 340 67 806 264 0
2,000 1000 500 90 60 70 350 35 806 265 0
2000 1000 350 55 806 266 0
3000 1500 370 80 806 267 0
3,000 1000 500 120 80 70 390 50 806 268 0
2000 1000 410 70 806 269 0
3000 1500 430 90 806 270 0
Transport packing available against surcharge Price without webbing slings - web slings on request. Subject to technical modifications.

Electromechanically powered turnover spreader beam

For transporting and turning over loads with inherent stability and
symmetrical weight.

Fixed working width. The load is turned by means of endless webbing


slings.

On request we can also supply turnover spreader beams with


adjustable working width for transporting loads with different lengths.

In applications in which the endless sling cannot be looped around the


workpiece, turning is performed by divided slings with an end fixing.

Please send us your enquiry. We will be pleased to send you a specia-


lised non-binding quotation.

Safety Advice _ The high safety standards


comply with currently applicable safety
specifications.
04_08EN.FM

Transport packing available against surcharge

128
Telescopic spreader beam

Hydraulically powered, with weld-on hooks.


Safe working loads from 1,000 to 10,000 kg.
Length from 1000 to 4000 mm.

Please send us your enquiry.


We will be pleased to send you a specifically prepared non-binding
quotation.

Transport packing available against surcharge

STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the crane load hook when
ordering. A table detailing load hooks conforming to DIN 15400 is to be
found on page 140.
On page 134 and 135 you will also find a detailed questionnaire for your
individual enquiry.

Examples of other off-standard solutions - please enquire!


04_08EN.FM

Stainless steel manual turnover spreader beam. Off-standard suspension for lifting magnet. Replaceable chain anchorage, wear protection
for crane hook. Safe working load 30 t.

129
Load suspension equipment

STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

ha025v

Spreader beam with weld-on hooks


ha024v

With suspension for single load hooks to DIN 15401. The weld-on hooks
are welded onto the beam ends. This provides for an extremely low Alignment beam with chain
headroom and optimum utilisation of the whole working width.
With 2-leg chain suspension for single hook to DIN 15401.

Five/seven hooks with chain sheaves are suspended from a conti-


nuous chain to DIN 5687-8, providing for automatic height alignment
and equal load on all hooks. The chain shortener permits the chain to
be adjusted if not all the hooks are attached to the load.

ha026v
Safety Advice _ High standard of safety complying
with currently applicable safety regulations.

Two-crane spreader beam

STAHLplus Info _ If you are not able to ensure


the stable storage of your load suspension
equipment to comply with DIN EN 13155 on
your own responsibility, we will send you our
suggestions on enquiry.

ha030v

ha027v

Adjustable spreader beam

Box construction spreader beam

ha029v

ha028v
04_08EN.FM

C-hook spreader beam Spreader beam with adjustable crane suspension

130
STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Stainless steel Big Bag beam

ST10 (short headroom) electric chain hoist with a Big Bag beam
with extremely short dimensions (risk of tipping when travelling
without load).
Available in various designs: galvanised, stainless steel, painted

Extremely low headroom telescopic spreader beam


(electrohydraulically adjustable) for transporting pressing tools
(S.W.L. of 40 t and above possible).
04_08EN.FM

Frame spreader beam Rail spreader beam

131
Load suspension equipment

STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Aluminium spreader beam H-shaped aluminium spreader beam Aluminium lifting beam with up to 3,000 kg safe
working load. Load hook can swivel under load.

Spreader beam for two-crane application Big Bag beam with weld-on hooks and low Big Bag beam with slots for fork-lift truck forks
headroom

Spreader beam for transporting engine blocks Adjustable spreader beam for lifting radiators, with adjustable turning facility
04_08EN.FM

Double H beam Double H beam with alignment facility for transporting a machine with 8 suspension points

132
STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Spreader beam for transporting steel plates (adjustable) Spreader beam for loading pipes (avoiding damage to edges of pipes)

X beam with loading beam and transport frame H beam with belt loops, with several suspension points

Load suspension equipment for transporting steel coils horizontally Load suspension equipment for transporting shafts
04_08EN.FM

Load suspension equipment for transporting drums Load suspension equipment for transporting differing drums

133
Load suspension equipment

Fax enquiry for spreader beams Simply copy - fill in - fax

If you are still unable to find a solution to your specific transport problems using the beams detailed on pages 119-133, just ask us!

Please photocopy this page and fill in the required data and dimensions, and fax it to us.

We’ll be pleased to advise you and send you a quotation immediately!

Information on load

1. Type of load .......................................................................................................................................................

2. Load data Weight min. ............................ kg max................................. kg


Length min. ..........................mm max...............................mm
Width min. ..........................mm max...............................mm
Height min. ..........................mm max...............................mm
Outside diameter min. ..........................mm max...............................mm
Inside diameter min. ..........................mm max...............................mm

3. Position of load Length/main axis … horizontal … vertical … angled


Type of load attachment … clamping … gripping from below

4. Movement of load … lifting turning horizontally … 90 ° … 180 ° … 320 ° … unlimited


… setting upright, touching ground … 90 ° … 180 °
… turning while suspended … 90 ° … 180 ° … 270 °

5. Stability of load … inherently stable … non-rigid/sagging


… bundled … loosely stacked

6. Surface of load … dry … damp … soiled by lubricant


… pressure-sensitive … pressure-insensitive

7. Temperature of load Room temperature … -20 °C to + 50 °C


Low temperature … min. - ..............°C
High temperature … max. + .............°C

8. Possibility of taking up
load … looping round … gripping from below
… pressing in at sides … clamping

9. Load suspension points..............................................................................................................................................................

Information on existing hoisting equipment

1. Type of crane … overhead travelling crane … portal crane … tower slewing crane
… mobile crane … wharf crane … ...........................crane

2. Crane hook … Single hook No. ........................... DIN 15401, safe working load ....................t.
… Ramshorn hook No. .....................DIN 15402, safe working load ....................t.

3. Height of lift ....................................m


04_08EN.FM

134
Fax enquiry for spreader beams Simply copy - fill in - fax
(continued from page 134)

Information on load suspension equipment

1. Required dimensions Length...............................mm Jaw width...........................................mm


Width.................................mm Inside height......................................mm
Height................................mm

2. Required suspension … Suspension eye … Fixed pin … Cotter pin

3. Desired operating … Lever for holding open … Automatic opener


devices … Attachment aid (for opening and closing)

4. Other … Warning stripes conforing to DIN 15026


… Off-standard paint finish RAL ...................................

5. Please enclose sketch showing direction of force and centre of gravity

Other information .......................................................................................................................................................


.......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................

Information on application

1. Place of use … Under cover … Outdoors

2. Movement of load … Lifting horizontally … Turning by 90 °


… Turning by 180 ° … Turning by 360 °
… Setting upright touching ground

3. Available space … Lateral space restricted...............................mm


… Load stacked with...........................mm interstices
… Load stacked without interstices
… Load lying on ground

Max. possible height of load suspension equipment......................mm

4. Number of cycles … per hour......................... … per day..................... … per month.........................

Date/signature:..................................................................................................................................................................

Name/customer No.
................................................................................................................................
Company
................................................................................................................................................................................................
Street/P.O. Box
................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post code/town
................................................................................................................................................................................................
Who is responsible if we have any questions?
................................................................................................................................................................................................
Department/job title
04_08EN.FM

................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telephone Fax
................................................................................................................................................................................................

135
Load suspension equipment

SCH C-hook

SCH C-hooks effectively lift and transport cylindrical loads such as


rolled sheet metal coils, pipe sections, wire and cable coils. Practical
handles allow for safe and easy use.
The suspension is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401.
Standard paint finish: yellow (RAL 1021), alkyd resin based.
Version with 3/4 tine also available.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
A C D h b
load
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 300 400 80 100 50 25 806 120 0
800 100 65 806 121 0
2,500 300 500 100 130 65 45 806 122 0
800 150 130 806 123 0
5,000 300 500 130 190 95 90 806124 0
800 160 235 806 125 0
7,500 500 550 160 230 115 210 806 126 0
800 200 310 806 127 0
10,000 800 600 200 230 135 405 806 128 0
1000 230 525 806 129 0
15,000 800 650 250 320 155 545 806 130 0
1250 280 935 806 131 0
20,000 800 700 290 360 180 885 806 132 0
1500 360 1410 806 133 0
25,000 1000 750 330 400 200 1065 806 134 0
1500 350 1890 806 135 0
30,000 1250 800 350 450 220 1720 806 136 0
35,000 1500 850 370 450 220 2630 806 137 0

STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the crane load hook when
ordering. A table detailing load hooks conforming to DIN 15400 is to be
found on page 140. You will also find a detailed questionnaire for your
individual enquiry on pages 134 and 135.

Coil turning hook


H
The coil turning hook is an all-purpose C-hook. Thanks to its swivel-
mounted tilting nose it can take up or set down coils both vertically and
G

horizontally.

The tilting nose on the hook allows the coil to be swivelled by 90° in
complete safety.
The gentle rolling action of the tilting nose permits the coil to be lifted
or set down without any jolts and also acts as a safety latch to prevent
E

the coil sliding off inadvertently during transport.


D

A The suspension is suitable for load hooks conforming to DIN 15401.

Other sizes and versions available on request.

Safe Dimensions Weight Item


working No.
A D E G H
ha420v
load
[kg] [mm] [kg]
500 120 330 470 110 60 6.9 806 376 0
200 9.6 806 377 0
1,000 200 460 600 110 60 15.4 806 378 0
300 20.0 806 379 0
2,000 200 420 600 135 75 24.8 806 380 0
300 33.4 806 381 0
3,000 200 610 820 160 90 45.0 806 382 0
300 51.0 806 383 0
04_08EN.FM

136
Additional equipment for C-hooks (coil hooks)

Placement frame suitable for C-hooks made of sturdy, welded


sectional structure, with guide plates and mounting facilities on
bay floor. Just ask us!

Prices on request

Coil hook with counterweight, 3/4 design, safe working load 25 t.

Examples of other load suspension equipment - please enquire!


04_08EN.FM

Coil hook with chain suspension (thus without counterweight). Safe working load 30 t. Roller dismantling hook with counterweight and PU protection. Safe working load 2 t.

137
Load suspension equipment

LT crane pallet loading fork with manual centre of gravity alignment

There are two versions available:


• without height adjustment: LT vm
• with height adjustment: LT vhm

With the LT loading fork, material stored on pallets can be moved above floor level with a crane.
The height adjustment facility ensures that the loading fork can be adapted optimally to suit the
load. The centre of gravity alignment can be altered with the manually adjustable suspension.
The tines are laterally adjustable so that they can be adapted to suit different sized pallets, box
pallets, etc.
Painted to RAL 1004.
Centre of gravity of load: 600 mm.

Ver- Safe Model Dimensions Weight Item


sion working B L a b H h No.
load max. min. max. min.

[kg] [mm] [kg]


1,000 LT 1,0 vm 900 350 1100 60 80 1660 1300 75 808 019 0
adjustment
w/o height

1,500 LT 1,5 vm 350 40 80 1680 115 808 020 0


2,000 LT 2,0 vm 400 40 100 1750 160 808 021 0
2,500 LT 2,5 vm 400 45 100 1750 190 808 022 0
3,000 LT 3,0 vm 450 45 120 1760 200 808 023 0
1,000 LT 1,0 vhm 900 350 1100 60 80 2400 1700 1300 75 808 024 0
with height
adjustment

1,500 LT 1,5 vhm 350 40 80 2380 1680 to 150 808 044 0


2,000 LT 2,0 vhm 400 40 100 2420 1720 2000 200 808 045 0
2,500 LT 2,5 vhm 400 45 100 2440 1740 230 808 046 0
3,000 LT 3,0 vhm 450 45 120 2460 1760 245 808 047 0

Safety Advice _ The loading forks are not suitable for transporting liquid
goods. Take particular care when lifting loads to ensure that the centre of
gravity of the load is under the suspension point of the loading fork
(note the centre of gravity marking.)
The load must not extend beyond the tips of the fork tines.

LT crane pallet loading fork with automatic centre of gravity alignment

There are two versions available:


• without height adjustment: LT va
• with height adjustment: LT vha

With the LT loading fork, material stored on pallets can be moved above floor level with a crane.
The height adjustment facility ensures that the loading fork can be adapted optimally to suit the
load.
The centre of gravity is adjusted automatically, but requires a minimum load of 25% of the rated
load. The tines are laterally adjustable so that they can be adapted to suit different sized pallets,
box pallets, etc.
Painted to RAL 1004.
Centre of gravity of load: 600 mm.

Ver- Safe Model Dimensions Weight Item


sion working B L a b H h No.
load max. min. max. min.

[kg] [mm] [kg]


1,000 LT 1,0 va 900 350 1100 60 80 1850 1300 75 808 048 0
adjustment
w/o height

1,500 LT 1,5 va 350 40 80 1800 115 808 049 0


2,000 LT 2,0 va 400 40 100 1850 150 808 069 0
2,500 LT 2,5 va 400 45 100 1850 190 808 070 0
3,000 LT 3,0 va 450 45 120 1850 230 808 071 0
1,000 LT 1,0 vha 900 350 1100 60 80 2550 1850 1300 100 808 072 0
adjustment
with height

1,500 LT 1,5 vha 350 40 80 2550 1850 to 135 808 073 0


2,000 LT 2,0 vha 400 40 100 2600 1900 2000 180 808 074 0
04_08EN.FM

2,500 LT 2,5 vha 400 45 100 2600 1900 225 808 094 0
3,000 LT 3,0 vha 450 45 120 2600 1900 245 808 095 0

138
Loading fork for EURO pallets and box pallets
Fig. 1 Fig. 1

• Centre of gravity spacing 400 mm


• Centre of gravity adjustment by hand

Safe Model Usable Tine Tine Tine spacing Total Weight Item
working height length height inside outside height No.
load
[kg] [mm] [kg]
700 L9 1000 800 60 550 670 1350 45 808 096 0
900 L 10 1000 800 60 540 700 1360 52 808 097 0
1,200 L 11 1200 800 60 540 700 1580 65 808 098 0

Loading fork for EURO pallets and box pallets


Fig. 2

• Centre of gravity spacing 400 mm, 500 mm, 600 mm


• Centre of gravity adjustment by hand
Safe working load Model Usable Tine Tine Tine spacing Total Weight Item
with height length height height No.
centre of gravity
spacing
Fig. 2
400 500 600 inside outside
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,500 1,500 1,300 L 14 1200 1100 40 390 550 1580 100 808 099 0

Loading fork for EURO pallets and box pallets


Fig. 3

• Centre of gravity spacing 400 mm, 500 mm, 600 mm


• Automatic balancing facility with evenly distributed load
• Automatic balancing effective from approx. 20-25% of rated load

Safe working load Model Usable Tine Tine Tine spacing Total Weight Item
with height length height height No.
centre of gravity
spacing
400 500 600 inside outside
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 1,000 800 L 16 1350 1100 35 390 550 1870 100 808 104 0
1,500 1,500 1,300 L 18 1100 1100 40 390 550 1620 115 808 105 0

Off-standard loading forks on request


Fig. 3
04_08EN.FM

Loading fork for 5 PVC boxes; each box is secured with Loading fork for 3 PVC boxes stacked on top of each
2 take-up tines other

139
Load suspension equipment

Load hooks

Mechanism groups and safe working loads of load hooks conf. to DIN 15400

Property Property
Mechanism group *1
class class
M *1 *1 *1 *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m 5m M
P *1 *1 *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m 5m - P
S *1 *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m 5m - - S
T *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m - - - - T
V 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m - - - - - V
Load hook Load hook
Safe working load in [kg]
No. No.
020 1000 800 630 500 400 320 250 200 160 125 020
025 1250 1000 800 630 500 400 320 250 200 160 025
04 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 500 400 320 250 04
05 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 500 400 320 05
08 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 500 08
1 5000 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 1
1,6 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 1,6
2,5 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 2,5
4 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 2500 4
5 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 5
6 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 6
8 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 8
10 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 10
12 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 12
16 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 16
20 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 20
25 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 25
32 160000 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 32
40 200000 160000 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 40
50 250000 200000 160000 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 50
*1 Lighter duty than mechanism group 1 Bm may not be taken into consideration
= selection for production cranes, e.g. steelwork or rolling mill cranes

Load hooks

Dimensions

RSN DIN 15401 DIN 15402


RS [mm] [mm]
RF

a1 a2 a3 b2 h2 a1 a2 a3 b1 f h
020 34 27 39 18 22 - - - - - -
025 36 26 41 19 24 - - - - - -
04 40 32 45 22 29 - - - - - -
05 43 34 49 24 31 - - - - - -
08 48 38 54 29 37 - - - - - -
1 50 40 57 32 40 - - - - - -
1,6 56 45 64 38 48 - - - - - -
2,5 63 50 72 45 58 50 40 65 40 208 50
4 71 58 80 53 67 56 45 73 48 238 60
5 80 63 90 60 75 63 50 82 53 266 67
6 90 71 101 67 85 71 56 92 60 301 75
8 100 80 113 75 95 80 63 103 67 337 85
10 112 90 127 85 106 90 71 116 75 377 95
12 125 100 143 95 118 100 80 130 85 421 106
16 140 112 160 106 132 112 90 146 95 471 118
20 160 125 180 118 150 125 100 163 106 531 132
25 180 140 202 132 170 140 112 182 118 598 150
32 200 160 225 160 190 160 125 205 132 672 170
04_08EN.FM

40 224 180 252 170 212 180 140 230 150 754 190
50 - - - - - 200 160 260 170 842 212

140
STAHLplus slings make lifting
and transporting easier whenever
more than a hook is required.
They always provide a practical
solution and a secure link between
the hook and the load.

Slings

141
Slings

General information on the use of slings

Definitions Looped loading (choke hitch)


If a sling is looped, an angle of approx. 60° must be
Slings ensured (see illustration) and must not be altered
Load suspension equipment also suitable for use with a choke hitch by any subsequent tautening as otherwise imper-
(forming a loop), e.g. rope slings, chain slings or webbing slings. missible strain could occur in the leg. If looping is
Examples: used, the S.W.L. must be limited to 80% of the
marked S.W.L. or the symbol giving the reduced
S.W.L. for looping may be shown on the tag or label
(e.g. S.W.L. label on textile slings).

If long goods are transported, the load will be


stable if two looped slings are used in parallel. If
two or more single leg looped slings are used in
parallel, the slings must be looped in the same
direction to prevent further detrimental bending at
the load (torque), and in opposite directions to
ensure that the load does not roll when first being lifted and is stable
enough to subsume the torques arising.
Specialist (definition from EN 818-1) Long narrow goods must not be attached with single loops as there is a
A person having specialist knowledge, practical experience and danger of them swinging and slipping. If the inclination angle is wide
training able to perform the required tests after having been suitably and/or the surface of the load is slippery, there is a danger of the slings
instructed. sliding towards one another due to the high transverse forces. In such
cases, spreader beams must be used to maintain a small angle!

Caution! Never put your hand in loops!


1. Determining weight of load

The load on the suspension equipment and the sling must not be Laying around
greater than that stated on the S.W.L. tag for the type of suspension In this case, ideally the sling is run through an
and inclination angle. Delivery papers, information on the load itself, opening in the load and both eyes or loops
weight tables e.g. for steel sections etc., calculation or weighing with suspended directly from the crane hook.
a load cell can be used to determine the weight.
Using two slings under the load with four or more
eyes or loops on the crane hook is to be avoided as
the crane hook is too small for the loops as a rule
2. Determining type of loading or they lie on top of one another (danger of
crushing).
The load must be suspended in such a way that neither the load nor the
sling are damaged. Slings can be attached to the load in various ways: With this type of loading, there is a particularly
high risk of the slings sliding towards one another
Direct loading at slinging points and the load shifting and/or slipping!
The slinging point(s) selected must have sufficient strength to carry the In the case of long, rod-shaped loads, with chok
load safely! If an inclination angle is generated at the legs, the diagonal hitch loading, the risk of the load or parts of the
pull and resulting transverse forces - which are also exerted on the load shooting out e.g. at an accidental impact or
slinging points - must be taken into consideration. sudden braking, can hardly be avoided!
The hook and the slinging point match if the sus-
pension point is in the centre of the bottom of the N.B.:
hook jaw and loading the tip of the hook is avoided. Use spreader beams to prevent too
large an inclination angle and associa-
In the case of multi-leg slings, the load hooks ted transverse forces.
(unless they are especially designed) must point Wrong! Looped slings offer greater safety
outwards to prevent impermissible loading of the against the load slipping or shooting
hook tip or even accidental unloading. Suitable out.
precautions must always be taken to prevent acci-
dental unloading (e.g. safety catch on load hook,
special precautions taken by loader...). Caution: Never put your hand between sling and load!
05_08EN.FM

142
3. Centre of gravity S A leg of multi-leg tackle suspended nearly vertical takes up nearly all
the load. Thus in the case of two-leg tackle with one leg suspended
In order to lift the load without it being twisted or turning over, the nearly vertical (inclination angles up to 7° can be neglected), the S.W.L.
crane hook must be situated above the centre of gravity of the load and of a single leg can be taken. (For a size 10 chain sling this would mean
the following conditions must be met: e.g. 3.15 t instead of halving the S.W.L. of 4.25 t given for the whole
tackle up to 45° inclination angle = 2.12 t).
a) For single-leg slings and endless chain slings,
grommets, round slings, web slings, the slinging In the case of three- and four-leg tackles, for example, the S.W.L. of
point should be vertically above the centre of two legs can be selected taking into consideration the largest
gravity of the load; inclination angle, if the load is evenly distributed between them.

b) For two-leg slings, both slinging points should Caution:


be above the centre of gravity of the load; Also in the case of three- and four leg tackles, only one leg can be
regarded as load-bearing if it is hanging nearly vertical.
c) For three- and four-leg slings, the slinging
points should be distributed evenly on one level
around the load and be above the centre of
gravity of the load.

4. Symmetrical loading = distribution of slinging points with


Fig. Overlapping Fig. Cancelling out
regard to the centre of gravity
In the above example of overlapping, only In the above example of cancelling out, two
one slinging point is on the side with the of the three slinging points are in the region
In the case of multi-leg slings, if the different legs have different heavier loading. The detrimental factors of the heavier loading and carry the main
of eccentric centre of gravity and load with a small inclination angle. The
inclination angles, the greatest load is in the leg with the smallest unfavourable distribution of slinging points eccentric centre of gravity is partially or
inclination angle. In extreme cases, a vertically suspended single leg overlap. even completely cancelled out by the
favourable distribution of the slinging points
will carry the whole load. for this particular case.

If the slinging points of multi-leg slings are not distributed N.B.:


symmetrically, the full S.W.L. cannot be assumed as the load is Take the instability of the load into account in the case of
distributed unevenly over the different legs. asymmetrical load distribution!

The loading can be regarded as still symmetrical (borderline case) if


all the following conditions are met:
5. Inclination angle
• The load is less than 80% of the S.W.L. of the load suspension
equipment or sling (increased safety because of borderline case) When using multi-leg slings, the slinging points and the sling lengths
and must be selected to provide inclination angles in the range of the
specified S.W.L. marking. By preference, all inclination angles should
• the smallest inclination angle of all legs be equal and be at least 15° as the load is then more stable and can be
(ß min) is not less than 15° and better distributed to the two legs.
On no account must the inclination angle exceed 60°.
• the largest (ß max) and smallest (ß min) The load hook from which the sling is suspended should be positioned
inclination angles of all legs in use do not directly above the centre of gravity of the load.
differ by more than 15°. In the case of larger inclination angles, the load to be lifted must
subsume high transverse forces. Both the slinging points and the load
Example: Borderline case of symmetrical distribu- must therefore be stable enough to subsume these forces safely
tion of inclination angles with 15° difference. without damage!
In the case of asymmetrical loading in doubt- Inclination angles greater than 60° are not permissible!
ful cases, the S.W.L. values given on the tags (for the maximum
inclination angle occurring) must be reduced by half by the user An inclination angle of 75° for example would already result in 20 t load
(EN 818 part 6). per leg. This is not economical and is extremely dangerous. Every
Specialists may however determine the permissible S.W.L. on the basis estimated or wrongly estimated degree of the inclination angle used
of the actual conditions. would lead to extreme overloading of the sling!
If both cases apply, i.e. eccentric centre of gravity and unevenly N.B.: Spreader beams can be used to avoid large inclination angles.
distributed slinging points, the load types may overlap or cancel each
other out.
05_08EN.FM

143
Slings

6. Multi-leg slings where not all legs are used

If not all legs of tackle are used, the unused legs must be hung in the Extraordinary inspections
master link to prevent them catching accidentally during lifting. The user must ensure that slings are subjected to an extraordinary
The S.W.L. is then reduced to that of the legs used. inspection by a specialist after any damage or incidents which might
You must either reduce the S.W.L. ratings given on the label by the affect the lifting capacity, and after repairs.
following factors, or determine the permissible S.W.L. for this lifting
procedure on the basis of the effective number of legs using an S.W.L.
table. Cleaning before inspections
(On this subject, see the S.W.L. tables for the individual products). The slings must be thoroughly cleaned before being inspected. Chains
and ropes must be cleaned so that they are free of oil, dirt and corro-
Total number of legs of Number of effective legs Factor for calculating sion. Any method of cleaning is permissible that does not corrode the
tackle S.W.L. base material. Any procedures which might cause hydrogen
Two legs 1 1/2 embrittlement (e.g. stripping), overheating, material erosion or
Three and four legs 2 2/3
material deformation , or disguise cracks or surface damage, must be
Three and four legs 1 1/3
Four legs 3 Full S.W.L. avoided

Notes and inspection records


7. Commissioning load suspension equipment and slings Records must be kept of all inspections and repairs, and filed for the
service life of the sling. The law on protecting employees also
Before commissioning a sling, it must be ensured that prescribes drawing up an inspection plan for all load suspension
a) the sling corresponds to the order; equipment.
b) the declaration of conformity or test certificate is available;
Our inspection service will perform the statutory inspections on your
c) the marking and S.W.L. ratings on the sling correspond to the
behalf.
declaration of conformity or test certificate;
d) the operating instructions have been read carefully.

The slings must be checked for obvious defects before each use!
9. Storage of slings
Obvious defects
are for example bent hooks, cracked or bent chain links, displaced If slings remain on the crane hook without load, the sling hooks or the
connecting bolts in chain connecting links, broken strands of fibre or eyes and links must be hung in the master link to reduce the risk of
wire ropes, cuts in web slings, damage to web sling sleeves. them accidentally hooking onto objects.

Slings should be stored on a special frame. They must not be left lying
on the ground after use where they might be damaged.
8. Prescribed maintenance and inspections
If chain slings and steel wire ropes are likely to be out of use for some
time, they should be protected against corrosion; textile slings should
Slings and load suspension equipment must be maintained in a state of
be cleaned or rinsed with clear water before long storage if they were
safety in use by means of regular maintenance (as per regulations and
exposed to chemicals beforehand.
manufacturer’s instructions).
The user must ensure that load suspension equipment and thus also
slings are inspected by a specialist at intervals of not more than one
year.
10. Obligatory information - residual risks
Depending on the conditions of use, inspections may be necessary at
shorter intervals than one year. This applies e.g. if they are frequently When loads are lifted with slings, the person below or near the load is
used with the maximum permissible load, in the case of increased endangered. As manufacturer, we must advise you as the user that
wear, corrosion or heat, the effect of chemicals, or if increased risk of residual risks remain when using slings, in particular that the
damage is to be expected on the basis of the company’s experiences. connection of sling to load may be insufficiently safe or the load swing
after lifting and endanger the loader. Falling loads may endanger
Inspection records must be filed. If the user has any doubts as to the persons and goods. As user, you should ensure thorough training of
safe condition of the load suspension equipment and slings, he must your loaders and crane operators.
decommission them and have them checked.
05_08EN.FM

144
FlexiLeg highly hardened and tempered chain slings with safety load hooks

The new multifunctional Grade 10 chain sling system for nearly every application.
Prices on request.

FlexiLeg New
The basic package comprises: Advantages of FlexiLeg
MF
- 1x MF suspension ring • 25% more safe working load than Grade 8

- 1x CG single-leg chain • Max. 3 components per chain sling

- 2x CGD double-leg chain CGD CG • Considerable reduction in weight

• Purchasing costs minimised

• Fast assembly on site

• Chain leg safety catch can be


unlocked with QuickPin
open QuickPin locked

Free choice of combinations Other accessories

Version Version Version Version MFS suspension ring


or or or Longer lifetime for
1 2 3 4 suspension ring and
crane hook thanks to
optimised contact
surface.

+ + + + MFX / MTX suspen-


sion head
for oversized crane
hooks.

MIG universal double


shortening clutch
The universal
shortening clutch for
lifting and lashing.

1 x CG 1 x CGD 1 x CG + 1 x CGD 2 x CGD

Nominal Safe working load in [kg]


chain 1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg
Ø

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60°


6-10 1,500 2,120 1,500 3,150 2,240
8-10 2,500 3,500 2,500 5,200 3,700
10-10 4,000 5,600 4,000 8,400 6,000
05_08EN.FM

13-10 6,700 9,500 6,700 14,000 10,000


16-10 10,000 14,000 10,000 21,000 15,000

145
Slings

Winner Pro highly hardened and tempered chain slings with safety load hooks New
The innovation - the first Grade 12 chain sling system. Can be used from -40°C to 300°C. Full rated S.W.L. up to 200°C ambient temperature. Above
200°C to 300°C, reduction to 60%.
Prices on request.

Advantages of Winner Pro

winner PRO • 50% more safe working load


compared with G8, 20% more S.W.L. compared with G10

• Optimised bending rigidity


The resisting torque to bending is 16% higher
than with a round link chain of the same cross-
section. This has been achieved by the particu-
lar profile and material of the chain which also
guarantees a longer service life

• Considerable weight reduction


means greater ease of operation

• Cost-effective
Lower costs and weight from the use of smaller chain dimensions
in comparison with grades G8 and G10

Technical features

• Tensile load:
300 N/mm²
• Proof loaded:
750 N/mm²
• Load at fracture:
1200 N/mm²
• Ductile yield:
min 20%
• Deflection:
0.8 x nominal diameter
• Grade stamp:
12
• Surface finish:
Chain and components
powder-coated
RAL 5012

Nominal Safe working load in [kg]


chain 1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg
Ø

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60°


7 2,360 3,350 2,360 5,000 3,550
8 3,000 4,250 3,000 6,300 4,500
05_08EN.FM

10 5,000 7,100 5,000 10,600 7,500


13 8,000 11,200 8,000 17,00 11,800

146
Hardened and tempered chain slings with sling hooks and safety latches
(EN 818)

Hardened and tempered BluePower chain slings are robust, safe and lightweight lifting tackled designed to suit a wide range of applications,
particularly when lifting angular loads. For nominal safe working loads up to 200°C ambient temperature with a reduction to 90° from 200°C to
300°C and 75% for 300°C to 400°C.

Advantages of BluePower

• 25% more safe working load


enables use of smaller chain diameter, e.g. 3550 kg, 2-leg, previously:
10 mm, BluePower: 8 mm

• Weight saving
and greater ease of operation, e.g. 3550 kg, 2-leg, length 3 m,
previously: 16.2 kg, BluePower: 11 kg

• Low price
Cost savings compared with the traditional Grade 8 range through
the use of smaller chain sizes with the same safe working load
ratings.

STAHLplus Info _ You will find the dimensions of


individual chain components on page 151 ff.

L = effective length

β β

Nominal Effective 1-leg 2-leg 4-leg


chain Ø length
Safe working load Item Safe working load Item Safe working load Item
d L No. β 0-45° β 45-60° No. β 0-45° β 45-60° No.
[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg]
6 1.0 1,400 814 038 0 2,000 1,400 814 055 0 3,000 2,120 814 066 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
8 1.0 2,500 814 045 0 3,550 2,500 814 056 0 5,300 3,750 814 067 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
10 1.0 4,000 814 046 0 5,600 4,000 814 057 0 8,000 6,000 814 068 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
13 1.0 6,700 814 047 0 9,500 6,700 814 058 0 14,000 10,000 814 075 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
16 1.0 10,000 814 048 0 14,000 10,000 814 065 0 21,200 15,000 814 076 0
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m


Hardened and tempered chain slings (BluePower) are available with a nominal chain diameter of up to 26 mm on request.

147
Slings

Hardened and tempered chain slings with sling hooks, safety latches and shortening clutches
(EN 818)

Chain lengths can be effectively adjusted by using shortening clutches. This is particularly useful for loads with abnormal centres of gravity.
The shortening clutches are integrated into a patented suspension system and cannot be mislaid.

Technical features

• Tensile load: 250 N/mm²


• Proof-loaded: 625 N/mm²
• Stress at fracture: 1000 N/mm²
• Ductile yield: min. 20%
• Deflection to EN 818-2:
0.8 x nominal diameter
• Grade stamp: 8W
• Surface finish: Chain spray
painted and components
powder-coated RAL 5015

Safety Advice _ Chain slings are subject to various


regulations such as the accident prevention
regulations BGR 500.

L = effective length

Nominal Effective 1-leg 2-leg 4-leg


chain Ø length
Safe working load Item Safe working load Item Safe working load Item
d L No. β 0-45° β 45-60° No. β 0-45° β 45-60° No.
[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg]
6 1.0 1,400 814 005 0 2,000 1,400 814 016 0 3,000 2,120 814 027 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
8 1.0 2,500 814 006 0 3,550 2,500 814 017 0 5,300 3,750 814 028 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
10 1.0 4,000 814 007 0 5,600 4,000 814 018 0 8,000 6,000 814 035 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
13 1.0 6,700 814 008 0 9,500 6,700 814 025 0 14,000 10,000 814 036 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
16 1.0 10,000 814 015 0 14,000 10,000 814 026 0 21,200 15,000 814 037 0
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m


Hardened and tempered chain slings (BluePower) are available with a nominal chain diameter of up to 5 mm on request.

148
Load tables for chain slings

Hardened and tempered chain slings to EN 818 Part 1, 2, 4

Maximum safe working loads employing different slinging methods

Nominal Safe working load in [kg]


chain 1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg
Ø

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60°


5 1,000 1,400 1,000 2,000 1,500
6 1,400 2,000 1,400 3,000 2,120
8 2,500 3,550 2,500 5,300 3,750
10 4,000 5,600 4,000 8,000 6,000
13 6,700 9,500 6,700 14,000 10,000
16 10,000 14,000 10,000 21,200 15,000
19 14,000 20,000 14,000 30,000 21,200
22 19,000 26,500 19,000 40,000 28,000
26 26,500 37,500 26,500 56,000 40,000

Application examples for chain slings Legend on page 150


Chain elements from page 151

l A8W-HSW l A8W-LHW l A8W-PW l A8W-E l -PW l HSW-HSW l VXKW-KLHW


05_08EN.FM

ll A8W-HSW ll A8W-LHW ll A8W-PW ll A8W-E

149
Slings

Application examples for chain slings

ll VXKW-HSW ll VXKW-KLHW ll A8W-HSW-PW ll A8W-S-PW

lll A8W-HSW lll A8W-LHW lll A8W-PW lll A8W-E

lV VXKW-HSW lV VXKW-KLHW lV A8W-HSW lV A8W-E


Legend

ll A8W - HSW
a b c

a Number of legs
b Suspension head
A8W Master link
HSW Eye hook
VXKW Coupling master link set with
shortening clutch
c End hook
E Master link
HSW Eye hook
KLHW Coupling load hook
LHW Safety load hook with eye
05_08EN.FM

PW Parallel hook
ll A8W-S lV A8W-S S

150
These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

BluePower round steel chain

Spray painted blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain size Dimensions Breaking Weight Item


load d t b1 min load No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kg/m]
1,400 6 6 18 8.7 56.5 0.89 817 502 0
2,500 8 8 24 10.9 100 1.57 817 503 0
4,000 10 10 30 13.5 157 2.46 817 504 0
6,700 13 13 39 17.5 266 4.18 817 505 0
10,000 16 16 48 21.5 402 6.28 817 506 0
14,000 19 19 57 25.6 567 8.90 817 905 0
19,000 22 22 66 29.5 760 11.88 817 906 0
26,500 26 26 78 35.0 1062 16.18 817 548 0

BluePower A8W master link

Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working load Model Master link Dimensions Weight Item


up to 45 °
DIN 15401 for chain size d t w s No.
For single
hooks to

[mm]
1-leg 2-leg
[kg] [mm] [kg]
2,300 A8W 13 2.5 6 6 13 110 60 10 0.34 817 889 0
3,500 A8W 16 2.5 8 - 16 110 60 14 0.53 817 890 0
5,000 A8W 18 5 10 8 18 135 75 14 0.86 817 891 0
7,600 A8W 22 6 13 10 23 160 90 17 1.6 817 892 0
10,000 A8W 26 8 16 13 27 180 100 20 2.46 817 893 0
14,000 A8W 32 10 19 16 33 200 110 26 4.14 817 894 0
25,100 A8W 36 16 22 19 36 260 140 - 6.22 817 895 0
30,800 A8W 45 25 26 22 45 340 180 - 12.82 817 907 0
40,000 A8W 50 32 32 26 50 350 190 - 16.55 817 908 0
60,000 A8W 56 32 - 32 60 400 200 - 27.01 817 549 0

BluePower M8W outsize master link

Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working load Model Master link Dimensions Weight Item


up to 45 ° for chain size d t w s No.
DIN 15401
For single
hooks to

[mm]
1-leg 2-leg
[kg] [mm] [kg]
2,300 M8W 13 4 6 6 14 120 70 10 0.44 817 909 0
3,200 M8W 16 5 8 - 16 140 80 13 0.67 817 910 0
4,200 M8W 18 6 10 8 19 160 95 14 1.09 817 911 0
6,700 M8W 22 10 13 10 23 160 110 17 1.69 817 912 0
10,100 M8W 26 10 16 13 27 190 110 20 2.65 817 913 0
16,000 M8W 32 12 19 16 33 230 130 26 4.78 817 914 0
21,200 M8W 36 20 22 19 38 275 150 29 7.48 817 915 0
40,000 M8W 56 50 32 26 56 350 250 - 21.98 817 577 0

BluePower VW four-leg master link

Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working load Model Chain Dimensions Weight Item


up to 45 ° size e t w No.
DIN 15401
For single
hooks to

[kg] [mm] [kg]


4,200 VW 6 5 6 189 135 75 1.26 817 896 0
7,600 VW 8 6 8 230 160 90 2.32 817 897 0
9,600 VW 10 8 10 265 180 100 3.68 817 898 0
14,000 VW 13 10 13 315 200 110 6.46 817 899 0
21,200 VW 16 16 16 400 260 140 10.06 817 900 0
34,100 VW 19 32 19 500 350 190 22.87 817 916 0
05_08EN.FM

40,000 VW 22 32 22 520 350 190 24.79 817 917 0


56,000 VW 26 32 32 570 400 200 37.75 817 550 0

151
Slings

These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

BluePower VMW outsize four-leg master link

Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working load Model Chain Dimensions Weight Item


up to 45 ° size e t w No.

DIN 15401
For single
hooks to
[kg] [mm] [kg]
4,200 VMW 6 6 6 214 160 95 1.43 817 918 0
6,600 VMW 8 10 8 230 160 110 2.41 817 919 0
10,100 VMW 10 10 10 275 190 110 4.01 817 920 0
15,700 VMW 13 12 13 345 230 130 6.90 817 921 0
21,200 VMW 16 25 16 415 275 150 11.12 817 922 0
34,100 VMW 20 50 19 500 350 250 28.08 817 551 0
40,000 VMW 22 50 22 520 350 250 30.62 817 557 0

STAHLplus Info _ Subject to technical and dimensional


modifications to the chain components (pages 151 - 158).

BluePower VLW outsize coupling master link sets

VLW 1 VLW 2 For building single- and multi-leg tackle. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).
Suitable for use up to crane hook size No. 25 conforming to DIN 15401 (see table on page 140).
Safe working load Chain size Model Dimensions Weight Item
up to 45 ° 1-leg 4-leg d t w e No.
2-leg
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,500 8 - VLW 1 22 340 180 394 3.4 817 558 0
4,000 10 - 27 340 180 410 4.8 817 830 0
6,700 13 - 27 340 180 340 4.4 817 831 0
10,000 16 - 33 340 180 340 6.7 817 832 0
19,000 22 - 40 340 190 340 10.0 817 559 0
3,550 8 6 VLW 2 22 340 180 394 3.5 817 560 0
5,600 10 8 27 340 180 410 5.1 817 833 0
9,500 13 10 33 340 180 425 8 817 834 0
14,000 16 13 40 340 180 455 12.3 817 835 0
21,200 19 16 40 340 180 480 13.8 817 836 0

BluePower KAGW coupling master link set

KAGW 1 KAGW 2 KAGW1 for 1-leg tackle, KAGW2 for 2-leg tackle, KAGW4 for 4-leg tackle, all with welded master
links. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working load Chain Model Dimensions Weight Item


up to 45 ° size d t w e No.
DIN 15401
For single
hook to

[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]


1,400 6 KAGW 1 2.5 13 110 60 141 0.42 817 512 0
2,500 8 2.5 16 110 60 152.5 0.73 817 513 0
4,000 10 5 18 135 75 186 1.44 817 514 0
6,700 13 6 23 160 90 223 2.3 817 515 0
10,000 16 8 27 180 100 254 3.63 817 516 0
14,000 19 10 33 200 110 290 6.2 817 923 0
19,000 22 16 36 260 140 356.5 8.9 817 924 0
KAGW 4 2,000 6 KAGW 2 2.6 13 110 60 141 0.5 817 522 0
3,550 8 5 18 135 75 177.5 1.26 817 523 0
5,600 10 6 23 160 90 211 2.66 817 524 0
9,500 13 8 27 180 100 243 3.86 817 525 0
14,000 16 10 33 200 110 274 6.48 817 526 0
20,000 19 16 36 260 140 350 10.1 817 925 0
26,500 22 25 45 340 180 436.5 17.88 817 926 0
3,000 6 KAGW 4 5 18 135 75 220 1.52 817 532 0
5,300 8 6 23 160 90 272.5 3.12 817 533 0
8,000 10 8 27 180 100 316 6.14 817 534 0
14,000 13 10 33 200 110 378 9.26 817 535 0
21,200 16 16 36 260 140 474 14.74 817 536 0
05_08EN.FM

30,000 19 32 50 350 190 590 30.47 817 927 0


40,000 22 32 50 350 190 617 34.91 817 928 0

152
These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

VXKW 1 VXKW 2 BluePower VXKW coupling master link set with shortening clutch

VXKW 1 for 1-leg tackle, VXKW 2 for 2-leg tackle, VXKW 4 for 4-leg tackle, all with patented
shortener. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working load Chain Model Dimensions Weight Item


up to 45 ° 45° - 60° size d t w e No.

DIN 15401
For single
hooks to
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 - 6 VXKW 1 2.5 13 110 60 194 0.64 817 542 0
2,500 - 8 2.5 16 110 60 232 1.16 817 543 0
4,000 - 10 5 18 135 75 294 2.11 817 544 0
6,700 - 13 6 23 160 90 363 4.30 817 545 0
VXKW 4 10,000 - 16 8 27 180 100 413 7.26 817 546 0
2,000 1,400 6 VXKW 2 2.5 13 110 60 194 0.94 817 552 0
3,550 2,500 8 5 18 135 75 257 2.12 817 553 0
5,600 4,000 10 6 23 160 90 319 4.1 817 554 0
9,500 6,700 13 8 27 180 100 383 7.86 817 555 0
14,000 10,000 16 10 33 200 110 433 13.74 817 556 0
3,000 2,120 6 VXKW 4 5 18 135 75 273 2.4 817 562 0
5,300 3,750 8 6 23 160 90 352 4.84 817 563 0
8,000 6,000 10 8 27 180 100 424 8.82 817 564 0
14,000 10,000 13 10 33 200 110 518 17.26 817 565 0
21,200 15,000 16 16 36 260 140 633 29.26 817 566 0

LXKW 1 LXKW 2
BluePower LXKW outsize coupling master link set with shortening clutch

LXKW1 for 1-leg tackle, LXKW2 for 2-leg tackle, LXKW4 for 4-leg tackle,
all with shortening hook.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working load Chain Model Dimensions Weight Item


up to 45 ° 45° - 60° size d t w e No.
DIN 15401
For single
hooks to

[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]


1,400 - 6 LXKW 1 25 23 340 180 478 3.7 817 252 0
2,500 - 8 23 340 180 516 4 817 253 0
4,000 - 10 27 340 180 569 6 817 254 0
6,700 - 13 27 340 180 629 7.8 817 255 0
LXKW4 10,000 - 16 33 340 180 688 12.7 817 256 0
2,000 1,400 6 LXKW 2 25 23 340 180 478 4.14 817 257 0
3,550 2,500 8 23 340 180 516 4.8 817 258 0
5,600 4,000 10 27 340 180 569 7.6 817 259 0
9,500 6,700 13 33 340 180 629 13.5 817 260 0
14,000 10,000 16 40 340 180 688 21.9 817 261 0
3,000 2,120 6 LXKW 4 25 23 340 180 478 4.7 817 262 0
5,300 3,750 8 27 340 180 532 7.6 817 263 0
8,000 6,000 10 33 340 180 584 13.1 817 264 0
14,000 10,000 13 40 340 180 659 23.1 817 265 0
21,200 15,000 16 40 340 180 713 33.1 817 266 0

BluePower CW Connex coupling link


(EN 1677)
For connecting suspension eye to chain, chain to chain, hook to chain.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).
Non-removable CLW Connex coupling links available on request.
Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item
load size e c s d b g No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 44.4 7.8 11 7.6 39 14.1 0.06 817 267 0
2,500 8 61.4 11.5 15 10 63 18.35 0.18 817 268 0
4,000 10 72 12.6 17.8 12.6 63 23 0.33 817 269 0
6,700 13 88 19 22 16.7 79 27.6 0.7 817 270 0
10,000 16 103 21 29 21 106 33 1.14 817 271 0
16,000 19 115 29.5 34.8 24.5 118 41.7 2.14 817 929 0
05_08EN.FM

19,000 22 135 29 38 27 146.5 48 3.21 817 930 0


26,500 26 170 35 45 31 159 59 6.2 817 547 0

153
Slings

These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

BluePower LHW safety load hook with eye


(EN 1677)
Closes automatically. Large eye, thus also suitable for ropes and web slings.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size e h a b d1 d2 g No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 110 20 16 71 21 11 28 0.5 817 277 0
2,500 8 136 26 20 88 27 12 34 0.9 817 278 0
4,000 10 169 30 25 107 34.5 15 45 1.5 817 279 0
6,700 13 205 40 34 138 40 20 52 2.7 817 280 0
10,000 16 251 50 35 168 50 27 60 5.7 817 281 0
16,000 19 290 62 50 194 60 30 70 7.9 817 931 0
19,000 22 322 65 52 211 70 32 81 11.2 817 932 0

BluePower HSW eye hook


(EN 1677)
For general lifting purposes. All hooks with forged safety latch.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size e h a b d1 d2 g1 No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 84.5 21 16.5 68 20 10 19 0.2 817 935 0
2,500 8 106 27 19 88 25 11 26 0.5 817 936 0
4,000 10 131 33 26 108.5 34 16 31 1.1 817 937 0
6,700 13 164 43.5 33 133.7 43 19 39 2.0 817 938 0
10,000 16 182.5 50 40 154.6 50 24.5 45 3.5 817 939 0
16,000 19 205 55 48 177.5 55 27 53 4.7 817 940 0
19,000 22 225 62 50 196 60 29 62 7.3 817 941 0
26,500 26 257 75 60 236 70 35 73 12.0 817 561 0

BluePower KHSW coupling hook


(EN 1677)
Suitable for use without transition link or coupling link. Forged safety latch mounted with
high-tensile spiral pin. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).
GKHSW larger coupling hooks (considerably wider jaw than KHSW) available on request.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size e h a d g1 b No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 69 20 15 7.4 19 66 0.2 817 572 0
2,500 8 94.5 28 19 10.0 26 90 0.6 817 573 0
4,000 10 109 33 25 12.5 31 108 1.1 817 574 0
6,700 13 136 40 34 16 39 131 2.0 817 575 0
10,000 16 155 49 37 20.0 45 153 3.48 817 576 0
16,000 19 183.5 53 46 24 53 177 5.00 817 933 0
19,000 22 213.5 62 50 27 62 196 12.1 817 934 0

BluePower KLHW safety coupling load hook


(EN 1677)
Closes and locks automatically. Suitable for use without transition link or coupling link.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain size Dimensions Weight Item


load e h a b d g No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 94 20 16 71 7.5 28 0.5 817 272 0
2,500 8 123 26 20 88 10 34 0.9 817 273 0
4,000 10 144 30 25 107 13 45 1.6 817 274 0
05_08EN.FM

6,700 13 180 40 34 138 16 52 2.9 817 275 0


10,000 16 217 50 35 168 21 60 5.8 817 276 0

154
These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

BluePower CARW web sling connector


(EN 1677)
Endless sling connector mounted in one Connex half. The wide contact surface prevents wear
on the sling.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a e c d b g s No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,500 8 29 66 11.5 10 65 18.35 18 0.3 817 942 0
4,000 10 40 81 12.6 12.6 82 23 21 0.5 817 943 0
6,700 13 50 104 19 16.7 100 27.6 27.5 1.1 817 944 0
10,000 16 46.5 112.5 21 21 110 33 40 2.0 817 945 0
19,000 22 109 177.5 29 27 215 48 59 6.5 817 946 0

BluePower WLHW swivel hook


(EN 1677-1)
Standard design, not suitable for rotating under load.
Swivel hook cannot be used for welded systems.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).
Swivel load hook with ball-bearing load hook (can rotate under load) available on request.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b e d2 h g w No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 16 71 160 13 20 28 35 0.6 817 999 0
2,500 8 20 88 181 13 26 34 35 1.1 817 947 0
4,000 10 25 107 218 16 30 45 42 2.0 817 948 0
6,700 13 34 138 269 20 40 52 49 4.0 817 949 0
10,000 16 35 168 319 24 50 60 60 6.8 817 950 0

BluePower KFW wide jaw coupling hook


(EN 1677)
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b d e g h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,500 8 25 118 10 120 64 29 1.00 817 951 0
4,000 10 32 143 12.5 140 76 35 1.78 817 952 0
6,700 13 40 170 16 169.5 89 42 2.96 817 953 0

BluePower FW wide-jaw hook

For applications where the "g" jaw width of HSW is not sufficient, particularly in foundries.
Before using, clarify whether the use of hooks without safety latch is permissible for the
intended application.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b d1 d2 e g h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,500 8 25 118 24 11 131 64 29 0.92 817 954 0
4,000 10 32 143 31 14 158 76 35 1.77 817 955 0
6,700 13 40 170 39 17 190 89 42 2.82 817 956 0
05_08EN.FM

10,000 16 46 200 47 22 224 102 50 5.03 817 957 0


16,000 19 54 231 56 28 260 114 61 7.60 817 958 0

155
Slings

These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

BluePower PW parallel hook


(EN 1677)
For shortening chains and for loops which must not pull tight.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size b d1 d2 e g No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 47.4 12 8.5 51 8 0.18 817 959 0
2,500 8 58 20 11.5 70.5 10.5 0.4 817 960 0
4,000 10 76.98 22 15 88 13 0.9 817 961 0
6,700 13 101 26 18 113 17 1.8 817 962 0
10,000 16 118 32 23.26 129 19 3.6 817 963 0
16,000 19 150 36 27 151 23.6 6.15 817 964 0
19,000 22 165 42 29 170 26 8.27 817 965 0
26,500 26 195 50 36.6 201 30.7 13.6 817 567 0

BluePower PSW parallel hook with safety pin


(EN 1677)
Shortening hook with safety pin to prevent chain slipping out unintentionally.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size b d1 d2 e g No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,500 8 58 20 11.5 70.5 10.5 0.4 817 966 0
4,000 10 76 22 15 88 13 0.9 817 967 0
6,700 13 101 26 18 113 17 1.8 817 968 0
10,000 16 118 32 23 129 19 3.6 817 568 0

BluePower KRW coupling hook


(EN 1677)
Connection piece for coupling master link sets and as chain connector for off-standard
versions. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b d e f s No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 17.5 38 7.4 31 8 7.2 0.08 817 969 0
2,500 8 23.5 54 10 42.5 11 9.5 0.2 817 970 0
4,000 10 28 63 12.5 51 14 12 0.58 817 971 0
6,700 13 33 76 16 63 17 15 0.7 817 972 0
10,000 16 40 88 20 74 20 18 1.17 817 973 0
16,000 19 50 114 24 94 24 23 2.0 817 974 0
19,000 22 50 122 27 101.5 27 24.5 2.6 817 975 0

BluePower XKW fixed hook with coupling connection

Coupling connection permits it to be mounted in the chain legs.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b d1 d2 e g No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 28.5 36.5 18 9 84 7 0.3 817 976 0
2,500 8 39 53 24 12 122 9 0.63 817 977 0
4,000 10 50 69.5 31 14 159 13 1.25 817 978 0
05_08EN.FM

6,700 13 64 92 37 18 203 15 2.7 817 979 0


10,000 16 80 102 48 24 233 18 4.8 817 980 0

156
These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

BluePower KPW parallel coupling hook


(EN 1677)
For shortening chains and for loops which must not pull tight.
Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015).

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size b d e g No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,400 6 47.4 7.4 45 8 0.19 817 981 0
2,500 8 58 10 60.5 10.5 0.38 817 982 0
4,000 10 76 12.5 76 13 0.85 817 983 0
6,700 13 101 16 104 17 1.9 817 984 0
10,000 16 122 20 107 19 3.6 817 985 0
16,000 19 150 24 141 23.6 6.15 817 986 0
19,000 22 165 27.5 158 26 9 817 987 0

RH web sling hook grade 10


(EN 1677)
Simple and fast use for textile slings such as web slings in combination with the high-tensile
sling system.
Colour marking corresponding to the S.W.L.s of the textile slings.

Safe working Model Dimensions Weight Item


load b d g h l m No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 RH-1-8+ 24 35 84 73 116 8 0.4 817 988 0
2,000 RH-2-8+ 28.3 40 96 86 136 10 0.6 817 989 0
3,000 RH-3-8+ 33.6 47 117 108 167 12 1.4 817 997 0
5,000 RH-5-8+ 43.4 73 155 131 222 16.5 3.2 817 998 0

STAHLplus Info _
You will find suitable round slings on pages 174 - 176.

BluePower KSCHW coupling shackle

For connecting directly to the chain. The nut is secured by a cotter.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size e e1 b a d c d1 No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,500 8 75.5 54 28 11.5 10 30.5 16 0.49 817 249 0
4,000 10 104.5 76 34 16 12.5 38.5 20 0.95 817 250 0
6,700 13 113 77 44 20.5 16 50 24 1.89 817 251 0
05_08EN.FM

157
Slings

Spare parts for BluePower

Coupling bolts for BluePower and grade 8 components


Specific coupling bolts must be used for different parts. See table.

Model Dimensions Weight Item

safety coupling safety hooks


with coupling connection
Can be used for all hooks

(except KLHW and HKSB


L d L1 d1 No.
[mm] [kg]
KBSW 6 16.5 7.4 16 2.5 0.006 817 352 0
KBSW 8 23 10 22 3 0.01 817 353 0
KBSW 10 29.5 12.5 28 3.5 0.03 817 354 0
KBSW 13 37 16 36 4 0.06 817 355 0
KBSW 16 52 20 40 4.5 0.1 817 356 0
KBSW 19-20 73 24 50 5 0.2 817 357 0
KBSW 22 71 27 55 5 0.32 817 358 0
For KLHW and HKSB

Model d for accessory Item


safety coupling

No.
load hooks

KBS-KLH PWH 6* 7.5 KLHW 6 817 359 0


KBS-KLH PWH 8* 9 KLHW 8 817 360 0
KBS-KLH PWH 10* 12 KLHW 10 817 361 0
KBS-KLH PWH 13* 16 KLHW 13 817 362 0
KBS-KLH PWH 16* 19.5 KLHW 16 817 363 0
* Please indicate the correct hook model when ordering.

Safety latch sets


For BluePower and Grade 8 hooks.

Model For hook model Item


No.
Forged latch SFG PWH 6 HSW 6, KHSW 6, HKS 6, HS 6 817 122 0
SFG PWH 8 HSW 8, KHSW 8, WS 8, HKS 8, HS 8 817 124 0
SFG PWH 10 HSW 10, KHSW 10, WS 10, HKS 10, HS 10 817 125 0
SFG PWH 13 HSW 13, KHSW 13, WS 13, HKS 13, HS 13 817 126 0
SFG PWH 16 HSW 16, KHSW 16, HKS 16, HS 16 817 127 0
SFG PWH 19-20 HSW 19, KHSW 19, HKS 20, HS 20 817 902 0
SFG PWH 22 HSW 22, KHSW 22, HKS 22, HS 22 817 903 0
SFG PWH 26-32 HSW 26, PWH HSW 32, HS 26, HS 32 817 904 0

Trigger sets
For BluePower and Grade 8 hooks.

Model For hook model Item


No.
VLH PWH 6* LHW 6, KLHW 6, WLHW 5-6 827 066 0
VLH PWH 7-8* LHW 7-8, KLHW 7, KLHW 8, WLHW 7-8 827 067 0
VLH PWH 10* LHW 10, KLHW 10, WLHW 10 827 068 0
VLH PWH 13* LHW 13, KLHW 13, WLHW 13 827 069 0
VLH PWH 16* LHW 16, KLHW 16, WLHW 16 827 070 0
* Please indicate the correct hook model when ordering.

Load tag
Front Back Galvanised.

Required for marking multi-leg chain slings grade 10 (BluePower) in compliance with the current
standard, but also for single-leg chain slings if the safe working load cannot be clearly
determined at the place of use. As it is not inscribed, existing chains can be marked with the
necessary information.
The oval load tag is included in the price of a new chain, however it can also be ordered
separately.
05_08EN.FM

Item No.: 817 995 0

158
SAK chain slings with safety load hooks
(EN 818)

SAK chain slings are proven, robust and safe making them suitable for a great number of applications, particularly where angular loads are
involved. For nominal safe working loads up to 200°C ambient temperature with a reduction to 90% from 200°C to 300°C and 75% from 300°C
to 400°C.

Technical features STAHLplus Info _ The dimensions of the individual


chain components can be found on page 161 ff.
• High tensile load chain
• Grade 8 We are also able to offer you special chains, such
• Sling hook - spray painted red, chain black as stainless steel chains or logging chains.
• Stainless steel chain slings on request Just ask us!

If the sling runs over sharp edges, select the next


higher nominal diameter for the chain.
This will ensure optimum edge protection.

Safety Advice _ Chain slings are subject to various


regulations such as the accident prevention
regulations BGR 500.

L = effective length

β β

Nominal Effective 1-leg 2-leg 4-leg


chain Ø length
Safe working load Item Safe working load Item Safe working load Item
d L No. β 0-45° β 45-60° No. β 0-45° β 45-60° No.
[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg]
6 1.0 1,120 814 077 0 1,600 1,120 814 088 0 2,360 1,700 814 098 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
8 1.0 2,000 814 078 0 2,800 2,000 814 095 0 4,250 3,000 814 105 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
10 1.0 3,150 814 085 0 4,250 3,150 814 096 0 6,700 4,750 814 106 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
13 1.0 5,300 814 086 0 7,500 5,300 814 097 0 11,200 8,000 814 107 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
16 1.0 8,000 814 087 0 11,200 8,000 814 197 0 17,000 11,800 814 208 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
20 * 1.0 12,500 814 187 0 17,000 12,500 814 198 0 26,500 19,000 814 215 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
22 * 2.0 15,000 814 188 0 21,200 15,000 814 205 0 31,500 22,400 814 216 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
26 * 2.0 21,200 814 195 0 30,000 21,200 814 206 0 45,000 31,500 814 217 0
Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m
32 * 2.0 31,500 814 196 0 45,000 31,500 814 207 0 67,000 47,500 814 218 0
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m


* Chain sling version with coupling link eye hook and parallel hook.

159
Slings

Load tables for chain slings


STAHLplus Info _ Lashing chains with tensioning
ratchet (various designs) for securing loads
Chain slings grade 8 to EN 818 Part 1, 2, 4 available on request.

Maximum safe working loads employing different slinging methods

Nominal Safe working load in [kg]


chain 1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg Endless chain slings
Ø

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60°


6 1,120 1,600 1,120 2,360 1,700 1,800
8 2,000 2,800 2,000 4,250 3,000 3,150
10 3,150 4,250 3,150 6,700 4,750 5,000
13 5,300 7,500 5,300 11,200 8,000 8,500
16 8,000 11,200 8,000 17,000 11,800 12,500
20 12,500 17,000 12,500 26,500 19,000 20,000
22 15,000 21,200 15,000 31,500 22,400 23,600
26 21,200 30,000 21,200 45,000 31,500 33,500
32 31,500 45,000 31,500 67,000 47,500 50,000

Special sling chains for hot galvanizing plants


New Chain systems and accessories for forestry applications

• Suitable for salt or sulphuric acid baths up to a concentration of 15% • Grade 10, weight reduction 25% in comparison with Grade 8 and with
and temperatures of up to 30°C higher tensile strength
• Safe working loads from 280 kg to 12,500 kg • Higher resistance to wear and mechanical abrasion when pulled
• Safe working load values based on EN 818-5 T along the ground
• Heat-treated for increased resistance to stress corrosion • Ductile yield is at least 20% thanks to special alloy special steels
• 25% higher minimum breaking force than those demanded in • Handy, convenient design forms, danger of injury is thus reduced
EN 818-5 or-6, which means 25% more sefatey for the user • Chain grips particularly firmly thanks to profile cross-sections,
• Marking "for hot galvanizing plants" important for hardwood, on steep ground, ice
• Flexibility thanks to extensive accessories
05_08EN.FM

Price on request. Price on request.

160
The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

Chain sling
(EN 818-2)
Grade 8, black

Safe working Chain Breaking Dimensions Weight Item


load size load d t a b No.
[kg] [mm] [kN] [mm] [kg/m]
1,120 6 x 18 45.2 6 18 7.8 22.2 0.8 817 002 0
2,000 8 x 24 80.4 8 24 10.4 29.6 1.4 817 004 0
3,150 10 x 30 126.0 10 30 13.0 37.0 2.2 817 005 0
5,300 13 x 39 212.0 13 39 16.9 48.1 3.8 817 006 0
8,000 16 x 48 322.0 16 48 20.8 59.2 5.7 817 007 0
11,200 20 x 60 503.0 20 60 26.0 74.0 9.0 827 000 0
15,000 22 x 66 608.0 22 66 28.6 81.4 10.9 817 321 0
21,200 26 x 78 849.0 26 78 33.8 96.2 15.2 817 322 0
31,500 32 x 96 1290.0 32 96 41.6 118.0 23.0 817 326 0

STAHLplus Info _ Subject to technical and dimensional


modifications to the chain components (pages 161 - 167).

Oval master links type A


(EN 1677)
For 1-2-leg chain suspension tackle. Grade 8, spray painted red.
Oval master links type A

Off-standard oval master links type T


Suitable for the next size of crane hook and off-standard hooks thanks to their larger internal
dimensions.
Grade 8, spray painted red.

Size Master link Dimensions Weight Item


for chain size d t w s No.
[mm]
1-leg 2-leg
[mm] [kg]
A13 6 6 13 110 60 10 0.34 817 021 0
Off-standard oval master links type T A16 8 - 16 110 60 14 0.53 817 022 0
A18 10 8 19 135 75 14 0.86 817 023 0
A22 13 10 23 160 90 17 1.60 817 024 0
A26 16 13 27 180 100 20 2.46 817 025 0
A32 20 16 33 200 110 26 4.14 817 026 0
A36 22 20 36 260 140 - 6.22 817 328 0
A45 26 22 45 340 180 - 12.82 817 329 0
A50 32 26 50 350 190 - 16.55 817 330 0
A56 36 32 60 400 200 - 27.01 817 331 0
T13 8 - 14 120 70 8 0.44 817 411 0
T16 10 8 16.5 140 80 8 0.67 817 412 0
T20 13 10 20 160 95 11.5 1.21 817 415 0
T26 16 13 27 190 110 14 2.65 817 416 0
T32 20 16 33 230 130 18 4.78 817 417 0
T38 22 20 38 275 150 29 7.48 817 418 0
T45 26 22 45 340 180 - 12.82 827 004 0
T50 32 26 50 350 190 - 16.55 827 005 0
T56 36 32 60 400 200 - 27.01 827 006 0

N.B.: On request we can supply tested sling Designation screw-on weld-on thread / weld safe working load
attachment points (VIP) in screw-on or VLBG load ring x M8 - M48 up to 20 t
weld-on design. WBG / WBG-V load ring x M8 - M30 / M36 - M100 up to 35 t
VRS Starpoint eyebolts x M8 - M48 up to 32 t
VRM Starpoint eyenuts x M10 - M24 up to 12 t
RS/RM high-tensile eyebolts/nuts x M6 - M48 up to 32 t
Please ask for detailed dimensions and prices VRBG load ring x M16 - M36 up to 120 t
for the tested sling attachment points. VLBS load ring x HV5 +3 - HV25 +6 up to 16 t
05_08EN.FM

VRBS / VRBSB / VRBSS load ring x HV4 +3 - HV25 +8 up to 50 t


VRBK corner load ring x HV4 + 3 - HV8 +3 up to 10 t

161
Slings

The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

Master links type G


(EN 1677)
For building 3- and 4-leg chain suspension tackle for larger crane hooks. Grade 8, spray painted red.

Off-standard master links type TG


For building 3- and 4-leg chain suspension tackle for larger crane hooks.
Grade 8, spray painted red.

Model Chain Dimensions Weight Item


size No.

e t w
[mm] [mm] [kg]
G 6-8 6 195 135 75 1.32 817 041 0
G 8-8 8 230 160 90 2.32 817 042 0
G 10-8 10 265 180 100 3.52 817 043 0
G 13-8 13 315 200 110 6.26 817 044 0
G 16-8 16 400 260 140 9.86 817 045 0
G 20-8 20 500 350 190 22.65 817 332 0
G 22-8 22 520 350 190 25.19 817 333 0
G 26-8 26 570 400 200 38.01 817 334 0
G 32-8 32 660 460 250 66.60 817 571 0
TG 8-8 8 300 160 110 3.11 817 399 0
TG 10-8 10 350 190 110 5.08 817 400 0
TG 13-8 13 420 230 130 10.09 817 405 0
TG 16-8 16 505 275 150 17.05 817 406 0
TG 20-8 20 615 340 180 27.79 827 001 0
TG 22-8 22 690 350 190 42.19 827 002 0
TG 26-8 26 750 400 200 60.12 827 003 0

V coupling link

For connecting suspension eye to chain, chain to chain, hook to chain.


Grade 8, spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a1 b c d e f No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6 14.1 7.8 18 7.6 44.4 18 0.06 817 062 0
2,000 8 18.35 11.5 25 10 61.5 23 0.18 817 064 0
3,150 10 23 12.6 30 12.6 72 27 0.33 817 065 0
5,300 13 27.6 19 36 16.7 88 34 0.70 817 066 0
8,000 16 33 21 40 21 103 39 1.14 817 067 0
12,500 20 44 23 48 23 116 47 1.70 817 336 0
15,000 22 49 26.5 51 26.5 133 55 2.20 817 337 0
21,200 26 61 32 68 30 164 67 5.10 817 338 0
31,500 32 80 40 80 32 194 85 8.50 817 339 0

HKS coupling hook

With safety latch. Suitable for use without transition link or coupling link.
Grade 8, spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b c d1 e g g1 h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6 15 7.2 8 7.4 69 26 19 20 0.24 817 102 0
2,000 8 19 9.5 10 9 95 34 26 28 0.53 817 104 0
3,150 10 25 12 13.5 12.5 109 40 31 33 0.95 817 105 0
5,300 13 34 15 17 16 136 48 39 40 1.67 817 106 0
8,000 16 37 18 22 20 155 56 45 49 3.20 817 107 0
05_08EN.FM

12,500 20 51 23 26 24 184 62 53 52 4.90 817 342 0


15,000 22 50 24.5 30 27 214 72 62 62 11.44 817 343 0
Sets of safety latches, pins and springs also available separately.

162
The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

HS eye hook

With safety latch. Grade 8, spray painted red.


Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item
load size a d1
d2 e g g1 h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6 16.5 20 10 84.5 25 19 21 0.20 817 202 0
2,000 8 19 25 11 95.5 29.5 24.5 27 0.50 817 204 0
3,150 10 23.5 34 14 120.5 35.7 29 33 1.10 817 205 0
5,300 13 33 43 19 164 48 39 43.5 2.00 817 206 0
8,000 16 40 50 24.5 183 52.5 45 50 3.50 817 207 0
11,200 20 48 65.5 27 205 62.5 53 55 4.70 817 347 0
15,000 22 50 68 29 225 72 62 67 7.30 817 348 0
21,200 26 60 70 35 257 80 73 75 12.00 817 349 0
31,500 32 78 66 39 299 92 87 89 22.40 817 350 0
Sets of safety latch, pin and spring also available separately

HKSB safety coupling load hook

Coupling preventing confusion of tackle. Only the right-sized chain can be fitted. Spray painted red.
Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item
load size a d e g g1 h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6 16 7.5 94 28 28 20 0.50 817 495 0
2,000 8 20 9 123 34 34 26 0.90 817 496 0
3,150 10 25 13 144 45 45 30 1.60 817 497 0
5,300 13 34 16 180 52 52 40 2.90 817 498 0
8,000 16 35 21 217 60 60 50 5.80 817 499 0

HSB sling hook with eye

Spray painted red.


Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item
load size a d1 d2 e g g1 h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6 16 21 11 110 28 28 20 0.50 817 490 0
2,000 8 20 27 12 136 34 34 26 0.90 817 491 0
3,150 10 25 34.5 15 169 45 45 30 1.50 817 492 0
5,300 13 34 40 20 205 52 52 40 2.70 817 493 0
8,000 16 35 50 27 251 60 60 50 5.70 817 494 0
12,500 20 50 60 30 290 70 70 62 7.90 817 569 0
15,000 22 52 70 32 322 81 81 65 11.20 817 570 0

Swivel hook with eye

Friction bearing. Not suitable for rotating under load. Ball-bearing mounted swivel hook also
available on request. Grade 8, spray painted red. Safety swivel hook available on request.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a d1 d2 e g1 h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,000 8 19 33 12 149.5 26 28 0.8 0 817 401 0
3,150 10 25 38 15 185.5 30 33 1.5 0 817 402 0
5,300 13 30 40 16 223 38 40 2.46 817 403 0
8,000 16 41 43 24 253 44 50 5.29 817 404 0

SIKA swivel hook with WHS eye

With ball-bearing hook - can rotate under load.


Load hook with straight pull only.
Grade 8, spray painted red. Safety swivel hook available on request.
Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item
load size a b d1 d2 e g1 h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6-8 21 28 21 10 128 19 27 0.60 827 061 0
2,000 8-8 30 36 32 17 180 28 32 1.40 827 062 0
05_08EN.FM

3,150 10-8 31 38 30 18 201 33 42 2.50 827 063 0


5,300 13-8 42 61 58 28 288 44 48 5.50 827 064 0

163
Slings

The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

P parallel hook with eye


(EN 1677-1)
Can be used as chain shortening hook. Grade 8, spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a d1 d2 e g h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6 24 12 7 51 8 15 0.12 827 071 0
2,000 8 30 16 10 60 10 24 0.23 827 007 0
3,150 10 44 21 11 80 13 31 0.59 827 008 0
5,300 13 53 26 16 104 17 38 1.24 827 009 0
8,000 16 64 30 19 116 20 44 2.01 827 010 0
12,500 20 85 36 22 135 23.5 53 3.75 817 822 0
15,000 22 97 38 25 157 27 62 5.35 817 823 0
21,200 26 85 55 30 210 30 80 9.62 817 824 0
31,500 32 93 60 40 240 39 90 18.60 817 825 0

PK parallel coupling hook


(EN 1677)
For shortening chains and for loops which must not pull tight.
Grade 8, spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b c d e g h No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,000 8 30 9 10 9 50 10 24 0.27 827 011 0
3,150 10 44 13 14 13 72 13 31 0.75 827 012 0
5,300 13 53 17 17 16 88 17 38 1.35 827 013 0
8,000 16 64 21 20 21 102 20 44 2.30 827 014 0
12,500 20 85 23.5 24 24 117 23.5 53 4.10 827 015 0
15,000 22 97 27 26 26 139 27 62 5.65 827 016 0

RSK web sling coupling STAHLplus Info _


(EN 1677) You will find suitable
For connecting web slings. round slings on pages
The broad contact surface prevents wear 174 - 176.
on the sling.
Grade 8, spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b1 c d e g h m1 m2 No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
2,000 8 18 40 11.5 10 66 18.35 12.5 25 29 0.30 827 073 0
3,150 10 21 50 12.6 12.6 81 23 16 30 39 0.50 827 017 0
5,300 13 27.5 60 19 16.7 104 27.6 20 36 52 1.10 827 018 0
8,000 16 40 66.5 21 21 112.5 33 30 40 50 2.00 827 074 0

Wide-jaw hook with clevis


(DIN 5691)
Spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size b c d h l m s t No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,000 6 6.5 32 8 24 122 47 16 85 0.4 817 130 0
2,000 8 9 40 10 29 156 63 21 109 1.0 817 132 0
3,200 10 12 50 12 38 194 76 31 134 2.7 817 133 0
05_08EN.FM

5,000 13 16 60 16 43 233 88 37 161 4.0 817 134 0


8,000 16 18 75 20 53 285 8 42 197 6.4 817 135 0

164
The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

Bolt sets for coupling load hooks


For grade 8 hooks

Chain Model For hook model Item


size No.
[mm]
6 KBG 6 CLH 6-8; HKS 6-8 827 049 0
8 KBG 8 CLH 8-8; PK 8-8; SK 8-8; HKS 8-8; SC 8-8; CH 8-8 827 050 0
10 KBG 10 CLH 10-8; PK 10-8; SK 10-8; HKS 10-8; SC 10-8; CH 10 827 051 0
13 KBG 13 CLH 13-8; PK 13-8; SK 13-8; HKS 13-8; SC 13-8; CH 13 827 052 0
16 KBG 16 CLH 16-8; PK 16-8; HKS 16-8; SC 16-8 827 053 0
22 KBG 22 PK 22-8 827 055 0

Load tag
Front
Galvanised.

Required for marking multi-leg chain slings grade 8 in compliance with the current standard,
but also for single-leg chain slings if the safe working load cannot be clearly determined at the
place of use. As it is not inscribed, existing chains can be marked with the necessary
information.
Back
The octagonal load tag is included in the price of a new chain, however it can also be ordered
separately.

1-leg Item No.: 817 990 0


2-4-leg Item No.: 817 991 0
1-leg 2-4-leg

Test data tag


For grade 8 / 10

We mark our chain slings (on delivery and during the BGR 500 inspection) with a tag giving the
next inspection date so that you do not miss any of these statutory dates.
This test data tag can also be ordered separately.

Item No.: 817 992 0

Safe working load tag


For rope slings and web slings

To prevent accidents caused by overloading, the safe working load of our rope slings and web
slings is marked on the safe working load tag. This gives safety-relevant data.
This safe working load tag can also be ordered separately.

Item No.: 817 993 0

Fix-de-Fix suspension system for


single leg operation

The suspension system is remote controlled


and is suitable for removing loads easily
from the suspension rope. The clevis is auto-
matically opened by the remote control and
releases the sling. Suitable for various slings
(chain, rope, webbing) and loads up to 2 t.

Scope of supply: suspension system, radio


receiver, radio transmitter, 2x rechargeable
batteries for receiver, 2x rechargeable
batteries for transmitter and charger for
transmitter.
05_08EN.FM

Price on request.

165
Slings

The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

Wide jaw hook with eye

Spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size b d h l m s t No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,600 6 18 10 26 132 49 20 96 0.5 817 150 0
2,000 8 25 11.5 26 160 63 21 122 0.8 817 151 0
3,200 10 32 14 37 204 76 31 153 2.0 817 152 0
5,000 13 40 18 42 241 86 37 181 3.5 817 153 0
8,000 16 35 24 50 281 100 45 207 5.5 817 154 0
15,000 22 47 30 72 367 127 65 265 13.8 817 344 0
21,200 26 54 34 80 419 136 72 305 19.2 817 345 0
31,500 32 60 37 93 437 152 83 327 23.0 817 346 0

GHS SIKA sling hook with clevis


With particularly sturdy and safe latch. Advantage: wide jaw.
Spray painted red. Safety latch galvanised.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size b d h l m s t No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,500 6-8 7.5 8 31 143 23 21 100 0.6 817 500 0
2,000 8-8 9 10 36 165 29 30 116 1.0 817 800 0
3,150 10-8 11 12 44 188 34 31 126 1.5 817 801 0
5,300 13-8 15 16 51 248 45 42 175 3.5 817 802 0
8,000 16-8 17 20 58 275 60 38 185 5.2 817 803 0
12,500 19-8 21 24 71 312 56 45 205 7.4 817 804 0

OHS SIKA hook


With particularly sturdy and safe latch. Advantage: wide jaw.
Spray painted red. Safety latch galvanised.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size b d h l m s t No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,500 6-8 24 12 30 143 26 23 103 0.6 817 805 0
2,000 8-8 32 16 34 168 27 31 119 1.1 817 806 0
3,150 10-8 30 18 42 193 33 30 133 1.7 817 807 0
5,300 13-8 39 21 47 258 44 43 192 3.4 817 808 0
8,000 16-8 56 27 55 297 55 40 215 5.5 817 809 0
12,500 19-8 61 33 63 330 60 43 234 8.0 817 810 0
21,200 22/26-8 55 35 75 345 70 62 235 10.5 817 811 0

SIKA spare parts

Latch set Latch set


Original latch for GHS/OHS Original latch for GHS/OHS

Chain size Item Chain size Item


No. No.
6 817 812 0 13 817 815 0
05_08EN.FM

8 817 813 0 16 817 816 0


10 817 814 0 22 817 817 0

166
The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings.

KVS shortening clutch with clevis


(EN 1677)
For securing chains, shortening chains, tying back loops.
Grade 8, spray painted red.

Safe working Chain Dimensions Weight Item


load size a b c No.
[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6 45 36 7.4 0.27 817 082 0
2,000 8 58 44 10 0.5 817 084 0
3,150 10 70 55 12.5 0.8 817 085 0
5,300 13 90 70 16 1.53 817 086 0

Transition tackle for load hooks to DIN 15401

Safe Model Load H Outsize Connex Hook with Weight Item


working hook master link link eye No.
load DIN M or SA C H
* 15401 Code t bi Wt.
d
[kg] [mm] [kg] [kg]
4,000 Ü 32/4 IA8W-HSW Connex up to 769 SA32 540 250 9.25 CW 16 HSW 10 11.5 817 866 0
SA / A 6,700 Ü 32/6,7 IA8W-HSW Connex No. 32 798 HSW 13 12.4 817 867 0
10,000 Ü 32/10 IA8W-HSW Connex 818 HSW 16 13.9 817 868 0
C 16,000 Ü 32/16 IA8W-HSW Connex 714 AW50 300 220 12.3 CW 26 HSW 19-20 26.4 817 869 0
19,000 Ü 32/19 IA8W-HSW Connex 744 CW 26 HSW 22 29 817 870 0
H

26,500 Ü 32/26,5 IA8W-HSW Connex 764 CW 26 HS 26 33.7 817 871 0


6,700 Ü 50/6,7 IA8W-HSW Connex up to 830 SA45 540 250 18.7 CW 22 HSW 13 23.9 817 872 0
H 10,000 Ü 50/10 IA8W-HSW Connex No. 50 850 CW 22 HSW 16 25.4 817 873 0
16,000 Ü 50/16 IA8W-HSW Connex 875 CW 22 HSW 19-20 26.6 817 874 0
ha036v 19,000 Ü 50/19 IA8W-HSW Connex 905 CW 22 HSW 22 29.2 817 875 0
21,200 Ü 50/21,2 IA8W-HSW Connex 954 CW 26 HSW 26 35.8 817 876 0
31,500 Ü 50/31,5 IA-HS Connex 969 A72 350 250 26.0 C 32 HS 32 75.8 817 877 0
26,500 Ü 100/26,5 IA8W-HSW Connex up to 1214 SA60 800 320 48.0 CW 26 HSW 26 65.1 817 878 0
31,500 Ü 100/31,5 IA8W-HS Connex No.100 1309 C 32 HS 32 78.8 817 879 0
* Safe working load = max. permissible load with jolt-free tensile stress.

STAHLplus Info _
Information on the safe
working load of load
hooks can be found on
Transition tackle for ramshorn hooks to DIN 15402 page 140.

Safe Model Rams- HOutsize Master Connex Hook with Weight Item
working horn master link link link eye No.
SA load hook- SA AW
* DIN Code t bi Wt. C H
15402 d
A [kg] [mm] [kg] [kg]
H

4,000 Ü 50/4 IIA8W-HSW Connex up to 1029 SA 540 250 9.2 AW36 CW 16 HSW 10 27 817 880 0
C 6,700 Ü 50/6,7 IIA8W-HSW Connex No. 50 1058 32 CW 16 HSW 13 27.9 817 881 0
10,000 Ü 50/10 IIA8W-HSW Connex 1078 CW 16 HSW 16 29.4 817 882 0
16,000 Ü 50/16 IIA8W-HSW Connex 1115 CW 19 HSW 19-10 31.6 817 883 0
19,000 Ü 50/19 IIA8W-HSW Connex 1165 CW 26 HSW 22 66.4 817 884 0
H 26,500 Ü 50/26,5 IIA8W-HSW Connex 1304 SA 540 250 18.7 AW50 CW 26 HSW 26 71.1 817 885 0
ha037v
31,500 Ü 50/31,5 IIA8W-HS Connex 1399 45 C 32 HS 32 84.8 817 886 0
05_08EN.FM

26,500 Ü 100/26,5 IIA8W-HSW Connex up to 1564 SA 800 320 48 AW50 CW 26 HSW 26 129.7 817 887 0
31,500 Ü 100/31,5 IIA8W-HS Connex No. 100 1659 60 C 32 HS 32 143.4 817 888 0
* Safe working load = max. permissible load with jolt-free tensile stress.

167
Slings

SAK/K endless chain slings


(EN 818)
Loads can be secured safely and easily with an endless chain sling.
Once the sling is tightened, bundled loads are securely held together.

• Welded endless chains


• Grade 8, black

Safe working Chain size Effective length Item


load d L No.
[kg] [mm] [m]
1,800 6 1.0 814 225 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
3,150 8 1.0 814 226 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
5,000 10 1.0 814 227 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
8,500 13 1.0 814 228 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
12,500 16 1.0 814 235 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
20,000 20 1.0 814 236 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
23,600 22 1.0 814 237 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
33,500 26 1.0 814 238 9
Surcharge per metre effective length
50,000 32 1.0 814 240 9
Surcharge per metre effective length

Safety Advice _ Chain slings are subject to various regulations such as the
accident prevention regulations BGR 500.

SAS/K combination rope slings


with high tensile chains

Particularly hard-wearing and suitable for everyday use. High tensile chain at the part of the
sling that is subject to the most wear with wire rope slings at either end. The wire rope slings
can easily be fed underneath the load making these slings particularly easy to use.
d1
Rope length = 2 x 1.5 m, chain length = 1.0 m
L

Safe working load Rope Ø Chain Effective Item


d size length No.
0 - 45° 45 - 60° d1 d L
[kg] [mm] [m]
1,100 800 10 6 4.0 813 995 0
Surcharge per m extra chain 813 995 9
2,200 1,600 14 8 4.0 813 996 0
Surcharge per m extra chain 813 996 9
05_08EN.FM

ha208v 3,600 2,600 18 10 4.0 813 997 0


Surcharge per m extra chain 813 997 9

168
SAS rope slings
1-leg (pr EN 13414/MRL)

SAS rope slings with loop(s) are characterised by their high safe working load and low
deadweight. Manufactured from galvanised wire rope and therefore effectively protected
against corrosion. SAS rope slings can be used in the temperature range from -60°C to +100°C.

A1 SAS rope slings with pressed loops at both ends

B1 SAS rope slings with loop and sling hook with eye

C1 SAS rope slings with loop and BK automatically closing safety hook

SAS rope slings with master link


(pr EN 13414/MRL)

SAS rope slings with master link have a high safe working load. Manufactured from galvanised
wire rope, they are effectively protected against corrosion and can operate in temperatures
ranging from -60°C to +100°C. The master link and the load hook are spray painted.

D1 SAS rope slings with master link and Safety Advice _ Rope slings
sling hook are subject to the accident
STAHLplus Info _ The clear width of the prevention regulations
master link should be at least 20% wider than E1 SAS rope slings with master link and BGR 500.
the profile of the crane hook from which the BK automatically closing safety hook
master link is suspended.

A1 B1 C1 D1 E1

Safe working Rope Ø * Effective Rope slings with loop Rope slings with master link
load length A1 B1 C1 D1 E1
d L
[kg] [mm] [m] Item No. Item No. Item No. Item No. Item No.
700 8 1.0 813 006 9 813 018 9 813 037 9 813 050 9 813 055 9
Surcharge per m
1,000 10 1.0 813 007 9 813 026 9 813 038 9 813 051 9 813 056 9
Surcharge per m
1,500 12 1.0 813 008 9 813 027 9 813 046 9 813 052 9 813 057 9
Surcharge per m
2,000 14 1.0 813 016 9 813 028 9 813 047 9 813 053 9 813 058 9
Surcharge per m
2,700 16 1.0 813 017 9 813 036 9 813 048 9 813 054 9 813 059 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m
* Rope slings are available up to a rope diameter of 36 mm. Price on request.

169
Slings

SAS rope slings


2-leg (pr EN 13414/MRL)

2- and 4-leg SAS rope slings are used for transporting goods with symmetrical load distribution
and with varying sling connection points. High quality paint finish and galvanised surfaces for
extra protection against corrosion.
SAS rope slings can be used in temperatures ranging from -60°C to +100°C without incurring any
loss in safe working load.

A2 SAS rope slings with master link and shackle

B2 SAS rope slings with master link and sling hook

C2 SAS rope slings with master link and BK automatically closing safety
hook

4-leg Safety Advice _ The person


attaching the sling must
STAHLplus Info _ never standard underneath
A4 SAS rope slings with master link and the suspended load, in the
On multi-leg slings, the sling hook
inclination angle must not area where the load may
exceed 60°. swing, between loads which
B4 SAS rope slings with master link and are to be lifted together or
BK automatically closing safety hook next to loads which may tip
over.

A2 B2 C2 A4 B4

β β β

β β

Rope Ø * Effective 2-leg 4-leg


length Safe working A2 B2 C2 Safe working A4 B4
load load
d L b Item Item Item b Item Item
0 - 45° 45 - 60° No. No. No. 0 - 45° 45 - 60° No. No.
[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg]
8 1.0 950 700 813 065 9 813 060 9 813 070 9 1,450 1,050 813 075 9 813 080 9
Surcharge per m
10 1.0 1,400 1,000 813 066 9 813 061 9 813 071 9 2,100 1,500 813 076 9 813 081 9
Surcharge per m
12 1.0 2,100 1,500 813 067 9 813 062 9 813 072 9 3,200 2,300 813 077 9 813 082 9
Surcharge per m
14 1.0 2,800 2,000 813 068 9 813 063 9 813 073 9 4,200 3,000 813 078 9 813 083 9
Surcharge per m
16 1.0 3,800 2,700 813 069 9 813 064 9 813 074 9 5,700 4,000 813 079 9 813 084 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m
* Rope slings are available up to a rope diameter of 36 mm. Price on request.

170
Wire rope reducing tackle (safety hook eyes)
(DIN 3088)

From a large crane hook to a small eye.


Safety hook eyes are for use wherever a crane hook is too large for the eye bolt, lifting eye or shackle.
Safety hook eyes are the ideal aid for such applications.
STAHLplus Info _ Information on
the safe working load of load
Four versions are available:
hooks to DIN 15401 and 15402 can
be found on page 140.

Eye with hook with eye


Length of loop approx. 15 times rope diameter

Safe Rope Ø Length Suitable for eyebolt, nut Item


working DIN 580/582 No.
load L
[kg] [mm]
1,000 10 400 M10 - M20 817 286 0
2,000 12 450 M12 - M24 817 287 0
3,000 16 500 M16 - M24 817 288 0
5,000 20 650 M24 - M36 817 289 0
7,000 24 850 M30 - M48 817 290 0
11,000 28 1000 M36 - M56 -

Eye with BK safety hook


Length of loop approx. 15 times rope diameter.

Safe Rope Ø Length Suitable for eyebolt, nut Item


working DIN 580/582 No.
load L
[kg] [mm]
1,000 10 430 M10 - M36 817 292 0
2,000 12 490 M12 - M42 817 293 0
3,000 16 550 M16 - M56 817 294 0
5,000 20 710 M24 - M64 817 295 0
8,000 26 950 M30 - M72 817 296 0

Eye with swivel hook


Length of loop approx. 15 times rope diameter

Safe Rope Ø Length Suitable for eyebolt, nut Item


working DIN 580/582 No.
load L
[kg] [mm]
1,000 10 430 M10 - M20 817 297 0
2,000 12 500 M12 - M24 817 298 0
3,000 16 540 M16 - M24 817 299 0
5,000 20 690 M24 - M36 817 300 0
7,000 24 910 M30 - M48 817 301 0
11,000 28 1050 M36 - M56 -

Eye with BK safety hook and swivel


Length of loop approx. 15 times rope diameter

Safe Rope Ø Length Suitable for eyebolt, nut Item


working DIN 580/582 No.
load L
[kg] [mm]
1,000 10 470 M10 - M36 817 303 0
2,000 12 530 M12 - M42 817 304 0
3,000 16 600 M16 - M56 817 305 0
05_08EN.FM

5,000 20 780 M24 - M64 817 306 0


8,000 26 1030 M30 - M72 817 307 0

171
Slings

Rope slings with fibre core conforming to DIN EN 13414-1

Maximum safe working load with different slinging methods

Nominal Safe working load in [kg]


rope 1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg Endless
Ø

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60°


8 700 950 700 1,450 1,050 1,400
10 1,000 1,400 1,000 2,100 1,500 2,000
12 1,500 2,100 1,500 3,200 2,300 3,000
14 2,000 2,800 2,000 4,200 3,000 4,000
16 2,700 3,800 2,700 5,700 4,000 5,400
18 3,150 4,400 3,150 6,600 4,700 6,300
20 4,000 5,600 4,000 8,400 6,000 8,000
22 5,000 7,000 5,000 10,500 7,500 10,000
24 6,300 8,800 6,300 13,200 9,400 12,600
26 7,000 9,800 7,000 14,700 10,500 14,000
28 8,000 11,200 8,000 16,800 12,000 16,000
32 11,000 15,400 11,000 23,000 16,500 22,000
36 14,000 19,000 14,000 29,000 21,000 28,000
40 17,000 23,500 17,000 36,000 26,000 34,000

Safety Advice _ Rope slings are Grommet rope available on request.


subject to the accident prevention
regulations BGR 500.

STAHLplus Online _
www.stahlplus.com
stahlplus@stahlcranes.com
05_08EN.FM

172
SRG webbing slings with sling hooks
(EN 1492-2)

SRG webbing slings are made of single-layer polyester round slings (PES) with high-strength fittings. They feature a high safe
working load and low deadweight. They are particularly suitable for handling loads with sensitive surfaces.
The non-conductive polyester material serves as an excellent insulator. (N.B. polyester is only non-conductive when dry.)

Technical features
• Effective combination of load-protecting
round slings and high-strength fittings
• Will not damage the load surface
• Webbing slings with PVC protective sleeve
(blue)
• Lighter than chain or rope slings

Safety Advice _ Only one leg should be assumed


as load-bearing in the case of loads with centre
of gravity greatly offset.

STAHLplus Info _ When dimensioning the sling take note of the


loss of safe working load caused by the inclincation angle. The
inclination angle β must never exceed 60°.

L = "Sheer" length of webbing sling

Length 1-leg 2-leg 4-leg


Safe working load Item Safe working load Item Safe working load Item
No. No. No.
L β 0 - 45° β 45 - 60° β 0 - 45° β 45 - 60°
[m] [kg] [kg] [kg]
1.0 1,000 805 000 9 1,400 1,000 805 004 9 2,100 1,500 805 008 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
1.0 2,000 805 001 9 2,800 2,000 805 005 9 4,200 3,000 805 009 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
1.0 3,000 805 002 9 4,200 3,000 805 006 9 6,300 4,500 805 010 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
1.0 4,000 805 003 9 5,600 4,000 805 007 9 8,400 6,000 805 015 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
1.0 5,000 805 011 9 7,000 5,000 805 012 9 10,500 7,500 805 013 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *


* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

173
Slings

SRS round slings with single protective layer

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-2, equipped with a single


abrasion-resistant protective layer.

The safe working load data are imprinted consecutively in figures and
code strips.
Polyester round slings are suitable for use in acids.
Round slings in other materials such as polyamide and polypropylene
on request.
You will find round sling hooks on page 157 and 164.

Technical features
• Load-bearing elements of a PES round sling are continuously-laid
high-quality polyester fibre strands.
• Protective layer made of special impregnated polyester webbing for
the continuously-laid fibre strands.
• Pemanent identification on the outer layer: A woven ID strip for each
1000 kg safe working load (up to a safe working load of 12 t) and on
the opposite side the printed or woven safe working load values.
• Specially made design for above 100 t on request. • PVC or FPU abrasion protection sleeves protect the round slings
• Heavy duty round slings with velcro attachment on request. from undue wear. If the protective sleeves are in more than one
section, the individual sections are always of the same length.

Abrasion protection sleeves

ARS continuous - Fig. 3 ARS two-piece - Fig. 4 ARS one-piece double - Fig. 5 ARS two-piece double - Fig. 6

With single protective layer Abrasion protection sleeve (ARS)


Safe working load Effective length Item PVC (blue) FPU (red)
L No. Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6
[kg] [m]
1,000 1.0 803 546 9
Surcharge per m *
2,000 1.0 803 547 9
Surcharge per m *
3,000 1.0 803 548 9
L = Effective length Surcharge per m *
4,000 1.0 803 549 9
Surcharge per m *
5,000 1.0 803 550 9
Surcharge per m *
6,000 1.0 803 551 9
Surcharge per m *
8,000 1.0 803 552 9
Surcharge per m *
10,000 1.0 803 560 9
Surcharge per m *
12,000 1.0 803 561 9
Surcharge per m *
15,000 2.0 803 562 9
Surcharge per m *
20,000 2.0 803 563 9
Surcharge per m *
25,000 2.0 803 564 9
Surcharge per m *
30,000 2.0 803 000 9
Surcharge per m *
40,000 2.0 803 001 9
Surcharge per m *
50,000 3.0 803 002 9
Surcharge per m *
60,000 4.0 803 003 9
Surcharge per m *
80,000 5.0 803 004 9
Surcharge per m *
100,000 6.0 803 005 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m *
* Surcharge per metre of effective length ; off-standard lengths on request.

174
SRS round slings with double protective layer

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-2, equipped with a double abrasion-resistant protective layer.

The safe working load data are imprinted consecutively in figures and code strips.
Polyester round slings are suitable for use in acids.
Round slings in other materials such as polyamide and polypropylene (resistant to acids and lyes) on request.
You will find round sling hooks on page 157 and 164.

Technical features
• Load-bearing elements of a PES
round sling are continuously-
laid high-quality polyester fibre
strands.
• Protective layer made of
special impregnated polyester
webbing for the continuously-
laid fibre strands.
• Pemanent identification on the
outer layer: A woven ID strip for
each 1000 kg safe working load
and on the opposite side the
printed or woven safe working
load values.
• PVC or FPU abrasion protection
sleeves protect the round slings
from undue wear. If the protec-
tive sleeves are in more than
one section, the individual sec-
tions are always of the same
length.

STAHLplus Info _
Textile mats up to 40 t safe working load
available on request.

Abrasion protection sleeves

ARS continuous - Fig. 3 ARS two-piece - Fig. 4 ARS one-piece double - Fig. 5 ARS two-piece double - Fig. 6

With double protective layerl Abrasion protection sleeves


L = Effective length Safe working load Effective length Item PVC (blue) FPU (red)
No. Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6
L
[kg] [m]
1,000 1.0 803 553 9
Surcharge per m *
2,000 1.0 803 554 9
Surcharge per m *
3,000 1.0 803 555 9
Surcharge per m *
4,000 1.0 803 556 9
Surcharge per m *
5,000 1.0 803 557 9
Surcharge per m *
6,000 1.0 803 558 9
Surcharge per m *
8,000 1.0 803 559 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m *
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L; off-standard lengths on request.

175
Slings

New
SRS Premium - the "super sling"
SRS plus round slings A new technology - for even greater safety!

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-2, equipped with an abrasion-resistant protective layer. The round sling for extra heavy duty.

SRS plus is a round sling that features optimised abrasion resistance, available widths, tear strength, folding resistance, service life and safety
coding.
In addition to the ID strip (one strip per 1000 kg safe working load,) this sling features permanently woven safe working load values in legible
figures that slide smoothly over even sharp-edged loads. The figures cannot catch or wear.
The particularly thick outer webbing is a considerable improvement for rugged use.

Technical features
• The protective layer of the round sling is heavily impregnated with polyurethane,
is thus extremely abrasion-resistant and prevents damage to the outer layer.
• The sling is stiffer and firmer than conventional slings, however it is light and
extremely flexible in use.
• Abrasion protection sleeves of PVC or FPU protect the round slings from undue
wear. If the protective sleeves are in more than one section, the individual sec-
tions are always of the same length.

Exposure to chemicals!
Textile products made of polyester, polyamide and polypropylene may also be
severely affected depending on concentration, temperature and time of exposure!
If there is any doubt, specify your conditions of use to enable us to recommend the
correct material or calculate the S.W.L. dimension required.

SRS Premium round sling New


SRS Premium is the new top-class round sling, a further development on the basis
of the tried and tested SRS plus.
The improvements at a glance:
• Improved structure of webbing, thus even greater abrasion protection
• Increased thickness of tube, ensuring considerably longer life
• Optimised contact width
• Compact construction and top design You will find round sling hooks on page 157 and 164.

L = Effective length Abrasion protection sleeves

ARS continuous - Fig. 3 ARS two-piece - Fig. 4 ARS one-piece double - Fig. 5 ARS two-piece double - Fig. 6

Polyester round slings Abrasion protection sleeves


Safe working Effective length SRS plus SRS Premium PVC (blue) FPU (red)
load Item Item Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6
L No. No.
[kg] [m]
1,000 1.0 803 565 9 803 006 9
Surcharge per m *
2,000 1.0 803 566 9 803 007 9
Surcharge per m *
3,000 1.0 803 567 9 803 008 9
Surcharge per m *
4,000 1.0 803 568 9 803 010 9
Surcharge per m *
5,000 1.0 803 569 9 803 011 9
Surcharge per m *
6,000 1.0 803 570 9 803 012 9
Surcharge per m *
8,000 1.0 803 571 9 803 013 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m *
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

176
Load tables for webbing slings and endless round slings
STAHLplus Info _ Round slings
are available up to 100 t safe
Endless round slings conforming to EN 1492-2 working load, special versions
also available for higher safe
Maximum safe working load employing different slinging methods working loads. Just ask us!

Safe working load with one endless round sling Safe working load with two endless round slings
in [kg] in [kg]
laid around - inclination angle inclinations angle
straight looped up to 0° * over 7° over 45° up to 45° * over 45° straight looped straight looped
single up to 45° * up to 60° * up to 60° * up to 45° * up to 45° * over 45° over 45°
attachment up to 60° * up to 60° *

1,000 800 2,000 1,400 1,000 700 500 1,400 1,120 1,000 800
2,000 1,600 4,000 2,800 2,000 1,400 1,000 2,800 2,240 2,000 1,600
3,000 2,400 6,000 4,200 3,000 2,100 1,500 4,200 3,360 3,000 2,400
4,000 3,200 8,000 5,600 4,000 2,800 2,000 5,600 4,480 4,000 3,200
5,000 4,000 10,000 7,000 5,000 3,500 2,500 7,000 5,600 5,000 4,000
6,000 4,800 12,000 8,400 6,000 4,200 3,000 8,400 6,720 6,000 4,800
8,000 6,400 16,000 11,200 8,000 5,600 4,000 11,200 8,960 8,000 6,400
10,000 8,000 20,000 14,000 10,000 7,000 5,000 14,000 11,200 10,000 8,000
12,000 9,600 24,000 16,800 12,000 8,400 6,000 16,800 13,440 12,000 9,600
15,000 12,000 30,000 21,000 15,000 10,500 7,500 21,000 16,800 15,000 12,000
20,000 16,000 40,000 28,000 20,000 14,000 10,000 28,000 22,400 20,000 16,000
25,000 20,000 50,000 35,000 25,000 17,500 12,500 35,000 28,000 25,000 20,000
30,000 24,000 60,000 42,000 30,000 21,000 15,000 42,000 33,600 30,000 24,000
40,000 32,000 80,000 56,000 40,000 28,000 20,000 56,000 44,800 40,000 32,000
50,000 40,000 100,000 70,000 50,000 35,000 25,000 70,000 56,000 50,000 40,000
60,000 48,000 120,000 84,000 60,000 42,000 30,000 84,000 67,200 60,000 48,000
80,000 64,000 160,000 112,000 80,000 56,000 40,000 112,000 89,600 80,000 64,000
100,000 80,000 200,000 140,000 100,000 70,000 50,000 140,000 112,000 100,000 80,000
* Handling tolerances for β = 7%

Webbing slings conforming to EN 1492-2

Maximum safe working load employing different slinging methods

Safe working load in [kg]


1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg

STAHLplus Info _ Black round


slings for stage and events are also
available.
Price on request.
up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60°
1,000 1,400 1,000 2,100 1,500
2,000 2,800 2,000 4,200 3,000
3,000 4,200 3,000 6,300 4,500
05_08EN.FM

4,000 5,600 4,000 8,400 6,000


5,000 7,000 5,000 10,500 7,500

177
Slings

Double-layer web slings

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1


Stabilised, drawn, finished and featuring optimised elongation.

These web slings are light and easy to manage. The loops are rein-
forced with coloured, particularly abrasion-resistant webbing and are
thus easy to lay on the hook. The woven loop reinforcement does not
swell when damp.
The loops on layers A and B of the web have proven themselves to be
extremely effective in day-to-day use.

Technical features
• The load-bearing elements of a PES web sling are continuously-laid
high quality polyester fibre strands.
• Permanent identification on the web sling: a woven ID strip for each
1000 kg safe working load.
• Abrasion protection sleeves in PVC or FPU protect the web slings
from undue wear. If the protective sleeves are in more than one sec-
tion, the individual sections are always of the same length.

Formed sleeves
Only sliding formed sleeves make it possible to turn sharp-edged loads
safely: At the moment the load (e.g. coil) is raised, the sleeve grips
firmly at the edge while the web sling can stretch and move freely in
the formed sleeve under the increasing load.
Web slings with permanent coatings are to be found on page 182.

Type A Type B
Loop on web Loop on web with
with full reinforcement standard reinforcement

One-sided formed sleeve - on request Two-sided formed sleeve - see table

Abrasion protection sleeves

ARS continuous - Fig. 1 ARS two-piece - Fig. 2

Safe working load Web width Length of Width of Effective length Type A Type B Abrasion protection sleeves
x thickness loop loop Item Item 2-sided PVC FPU
Single Double No. No. formed (blue) (red)
L sleeve Fig. 1+2 Fig. 1+2
[kg] [mm] [m]
1,000 2,000 30x7 200 15 2.0 803 643 9 803 655 9
Surcharge per m * - -
2,000 4,000 60x7 300 30 2.0 803 646 9 803 658 9
Surcharge per m * - -
3,000 6,000 90x7 350 30 2.0 803 648 9 803 660 9
Surcharge per m * - -
4,000 8,000 120x7 425 40 2.0 803 650 9 803 662 9
Surcharge per m * - -
5,000 10,000 150x7 500 50 2.0 803 651 9 803 663 9
Surcharge per m * - -
6,000 12,000 180x7 550 60 3.0 803 652 9 803 664 9
Surcharge per m * - -
8,000 16,000 240x7 600 80 3.0 803 653 9 803 665 9
Surcharge per m * - -
10,000 20,000 300x10 625 100 3.0 803 654 9 803 666 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m * - -
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

178
Premium double-layer web slings

These web slings have an even longer service life as regards abrasion,
pressure and edge stresses thanks to the optimised design of web and
edge.

Advantages
• Even longer service life thanks to increased safety factor
• Higher temperature resistance up to 150° C
• Optimum web design ensures improved resistance to abrasion

Technical features
• Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1
• Stabilised, drawn, finished and featuring optimised elongation.
• Fully reinforced loop
• Optimum web design ensures improved resistance to abasion
• Higher temperature resistance: The strength does not fall below the
7:1 or 8:1 safety factor at 150°C for continuous use
• Safety factor approx. 10:1

Safety Advice _ The aperture angle of the end loops


must not exceed 20°.

Safe working load Web width x thickness Length of loop Width of loop min. length of loop Price for 1 metre Surcharge
per m *
Single Double Item
[kg] [mm] No.
1,000 2,000 50 x 6 200 25 850 803 184 9
2,000 4,000 75 x 8 300 25 1300 803 185 9
3,000 6,000 100 x 8 350 35 1500 803 186 9
4,000 8,000 125 x 8 425 45 1600 803 187 9
5,000 10,000 150 x 10 500 50 1900 803 188 9
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

Heavy duty pipeline web sling mats

made of polyester (PES) analog to DIN V 61360 prEN 1492-1.

The strongman for pipeline construction:

• up to 900 mm contact surface


• contact side fully coated with an anti-slip plastic coating
• up to 48 t S.W.L. per mat
• the eye beam automatically drops from the hook beam after
unloading - no expenditure of energy and time required

Prices and technical data on request.


05_08EN.FM

179
Slings

Endless web slings

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1

Stabilised, drawn, finished and featuring optimised elongation.

Both single- and double-layer versions available.

Technical features
• Whether single- or double-layer, the load is always carried by 2 legs,
and thus
• higher safe working loads are possible compared with web slings of
equal width with loops or terminal fittings

L = Effective length

STAHLplus Info _ Disposable web


slings manufactured in compli-
ance with the future DIN 60005
are available. Price on request.

Safe working load Web width Effective length Single-layer Safe working load Web width Effective length Double-layer
x thick- Item x thick- Item
Single Double ness No. Single Double ness No.
L L
[kg] [mm] [m] [kg] [mm] [m]
500 1,000 25x4 1.0 803 675 9 1,000 2,000 25x8 1.0 803 606 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
1,000 2,000 30x3,5 1.0 803 676 9 1,500 3,000 35x6 1.0 803 607 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
1,500 3,000 65x3 1.0 803 677 9 2,000 4,000 30x7 1.0 803 608 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
2,000 4,000 60x3,5 1.0 803 678 9 3,000 6,000 65x6 1.0 803 609 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
3,000 6,000 90x3,5 1.0 803 679 9 4,000 8,000 60x7 1.0 803 610 9
Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m *
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request. 5,000 10,000 100x6 1.0 803 612 9
Surcharge per m *
6,000 12,000 90x7 1.0 803 613 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m *
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

180
Web slings with terminal fittings - double-layer

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1, stabilised, drawn, finished and


featuring optimised elongation.

The terminal fittings are easy to hook onto small crane hooks. The
stainless steel terminal fittings are indestructible. The practical
combination sling Type A should be selected for varying applications.

Technical features
• Can also be used with smaller crane hooks
• Particularly suitable for use together with beams as steel terminal
fittings are used at the beam hook in the area most susceptible to
wear.
• With non-rusting terminal fittings also suitable for pickling baths.
Just ask us!
• For safe handling: The safe working load ID coding is indestructible.
• See below for dimensions of terminal fittings
• Web slings with terminal fittings with protective sleeves on request.

Type A Type B

Type A Type B

Safe working load Web width Effective length Type A Type B


x thickness Item Item
Single Double L No. No.
r1 h1 b1 r2 h2 b2
[kg] [mm] [m] [mm] [mm]
1,000 2,000 30x7 2.0 13 80 60 803 633 9 13 145 100 803 573 9
Surcharge per m * - -
2,000 4,000 60x7 2.0 16 90 80 803 635 9 16 165 120 803 575 9
Surcharge per m * - -
3,000 6,000 90x7 2.0 20 110 100 803 637 9 20 195 150 803 577 9
Surcharge per m * - -
4,000 8,000 120x7 2.0 22 130 130 803 639 9 22 230 185 803 579 9
Surcharge per m * - -
5,000 10,000 150x7 2.0 26 160 160 803 640 9 26 295 225 803 580 9
Surcharge per m * - -
6,000 12,000 180x7 2.0 30 210 220 803 641 9 30 325 295 803 581 9
Surcharge per m * - -
8,000 16,000 240x7 2.0 32 210 270 803 642 9 32 330 345 803 582 9
Surcharge per m * - -
10,000 20,000 300x10 2.0 36 278 300 803 572 9 36 428 430 803 583 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m * - -
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

181
Slings

Web slings with permanent coating

Extremely resistant to abrasion and cutting - ideal for use with sharp-edged loads.

Permanent coatings are of advantage if small, narrow, U-shaped loads must be lifted and the
effective length of the web sling is very short.
The permanent coating provides more flexibility than a short and thus relatively stiff protective
sleeve.
Web slings with movable formed sleeves are to be found on page 178.

Technical features
• The permanent coatings are poured onto the web sling and, as specified by the accident
prevention regulations, transparent.
• Permanent coating of 5 mm thick polyurethane (PU) - smooth on one or both sides
• With loops at both ends

Safe working Web dimensions Effective length Coating on Coating on


load width x thickness one side two sides
Single Double Item Item
L No. No.
[kg] [mm] [m]
1,000 2,000 30x7 1.0 803 584 9 803 592 9
Surcharge per m * - -
2,000 4,000 60x7 1.0 803 585 9 803 593 9
Surcharge per m * - -
3,000 6,000 90x7 2.0 803 586 9 803 594 9
Surcharge per m * - -
4,000 8,000 120x7 2.0 803 587 9 803 595 9
Surcharge per m * - -
5,000 10,000 150x7 2.0 803 588 9 803 596 9
Surcharge per m * - -
6,000 12,000 180x7 3.0 803 589 9 803 597 9
Surcharge per m * - -
8,000 16,000 240x7 3.0 803 590 9 803 598 9
Surcharge per m * - -
10,000 20,000 300x10 3.0 803 591 9 803 599 9
Surcharge per m * - -
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

AntiCut slings with loops

With increased work capacity, double-layer, made of polyester


(PES) EN 1492-1.

Drawn and finished, featuring optimised elongation.

Advantages in use
• The woven AntiCut edge protects the edges of the sling from
damage
• The V-shape of the woven edge absorbs transverse stresses
• The loops are reinforced with particularly abrasion-resistant
wear protection right up to the seam overlaps

Safe working load Web width Length of Width of Effective length Item
x thickness loops loops No.
Single Double L
[kg] [mm] [m]
2,000 4,000 60x7 200 15 2.0 803 601 9
Surcharge per m *
3,000 6,000 90x7 350 30 2.0 803 602 9
Surcharge per m *
4,000 8,000 120x7 425 40 2.0 803 603 9
05_08EN.FM

Surcharge per m *
* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request.

182
Load tables for web slings to EN 1492-2
Safety Advice _Textile slings are subject to the
accident prevention regulations BGR 500.
Endless slings and web slings without a manufac-
Maximum safe working load employing different slinging methods turer’s label must not be used!

Safe working load with one web sling Safe working load with two web slings
in [kg] in [kg]
laid around - inclination angle inclination angle
straight, looped up to 0° * up to 45° * over 45° straight looped straight looped
single up to 60° * up to 45° * up to 45° * over 45° over 45°
attachment up to 60° * up to 60° *

1,000 800 2,000 1,400 1,000 1,400 1,120 1,000 800


2,000 1,600 4,000 2,800 2,000 2,800 2,240 2,000 1,600
3,000 2,400 6,000 4,200 3,000 4,200 3,360 3,000 2,400
4,000 3,200 8,000 5,600 4,000 5,600 4,480 4,000 3,200
5,000 4,000 10,000 7,000 5,000 7,000 5,600 5,000 4,000
6,000 4,800 12,000 8,400 6,000 8,400 6,720 6,000 4,800
8,000 6,400 16,000 11,200 8,000 11,200 8,960 8,000 6,400
10,000 8,000 20,000 14,000 10,000 14,000 11,200 10,000 8,000
* Handling tolerances for β = 7%

STAHLplus Online _
www.stahlplus.com
stahlplus@stahlcranes.com

Sling rack New


Free-standing rack for central storage of slings.

The stored slings are clearly visible, and cannot become knotted. The sling required is always
ready to hand.
Price on request.

Technical features
• Sturdy free-standing steel construction,
steel shot derusted
• No floor mounting necessary
• Spray-painted RAL 5015 (sky blue),
D.F.T. min. 70 μm
• Suspension hooks welded on
• Suitable for ropes, chains, webbing slings,
round slings and cargo gear
• Safe working load max. 1000 kg
• Deadweight
AG 1500: approx. 80 kg
AG 2000: approx. 90 kg
1520 mm / 2020 mm
05_08EN.FM

AG 1500 / AG 2000

183
Slings

Abrasion protection sleeve with PuR coating

Abrasion protection sleeves of suitable dimensions for web slings, round slings and lashing
straps increase their service life and provide protection against mechanical abrasion, sharp
edges and ultraviolet light.

For sling width For safe Item


working load No.
[mm] [kg]
25 500 805 510 0
30 1,000 805 511 0
60 2,000 805 512 0
90 3,000 805 513 0
120 4,000 805 514 0
150 5,000 805 515 0
180 6,000 805 516 0

Edge protector bracket for web slings and lashing straps

With their wide contact area, edge protector brackets made of sturdy plastic ensure even and
thus protective distribution of pressure. Suitable for web widths up to 100 mm.

Web width Item


No.
[mm]
up to 50 805 507 0
50 - 100 805 508 0

Edge protectors in polyurethane (PU) For sling Without magnet With magnet
width Item Item
Edge protector brackets in polyurethane are No. No.
[mm]
available in 5 sizes up to a sling width of 65 817 314 0 817 309 0
300 mm, with or without magnet. 100 817 315 0 817 310 0
125 817 316 0 817 311 0
200 817 317 0 817 312 0
300 817 318 0 817 313 0

Edge protector plates for web slings and lashing straps

We recommend the use of edge protector plates to avoid possible damage to your web
slings caused by sharp edges or mechanical abrasion.
Optimally shaped entry slots enable easy fitting and prevent slipping on web slings when
under load.

For use with Web width Item


No.
[mm]
Web slings up to 35 805 500 0
up to 60 805 501 0
Lashing straps up to 50 805 505 0
05_08EN.FM

184
The accessories for our slings
provide a secure link to the load.
Differences in level in multi-leg lifting
configurations or twisted chains
and wire ropes are things of the past.

Sling accessories

185
Sling accessories

Lifting accessories Dangerous conditions

Instructions for use The safe working loads given assume that no particularly dangerous
conditions are prevalent. Applications such as lifting persons,
Please read also our general instructions for the use of load particularly dangerous loads such as e.g. molten metals, corrosive
suspension equipment and slings on pages 120-121 and 142 to 144. materials, nuclear material etc. must be assessed by an expert and the
safe working loads reduced accordingly, or particular precautions be
These instructions for use provide only general information on the use taken for these lifting procedures.
of lifting accessories and do not take the place of the operating
instructions provided by the manufacturer for individual pieces of
equipment! Chemicals

Lifting accessories which have been exposed to acids, lyes or their


vapours must be decommissioned and returned to us for assessment.

Modifications to state of delivery


Instructions for use
The form and construction of lifting accessories must not be modified
by e.g. bending, grinding, removing parts, drilling holes, etc. Only undamaged lifting accessories with legible S.W.L. markings may
Welding is only permissible on products intended for this purpose and be used.
in accordance with instructions. Inspection for obvious defects must be performed before each use,
Surface coatings such as hot-dip galvanising or electrogalvanising e.g. serious corrosion, wear, cracks in welds, deformation, firm seating
may not be applied to high-tensile lifting accessories. Stripping is also of screws, etc. Lifting accessories which have been known to have
a dangerous process and may only be performed after consulting the been overloaded or otherwise exposed to damaging influences must
manufacturer. no longer be used until they have been inspected and repaired if
necessary.

• The link must have sufficient room in the load hook and move freely.

Restrictions of use • The lifting accessories must be attached in such a way that they are
easily accessible for attaching and removing slings. They must not
Temperature be hindered by other elements. They must not be reversed or run
over sharp edges.
> -40°C ≤ 200°C = 100% S.W.L.
> 200°C ≤ 300°C = 90% S.W.L. • Lifting accessories must be attached in such a way that no sources
> 300°C ≤ 400°C = 75% S.W.L. * of danger for the loader arise (crushing, cutting ...). They must not
project and hinder transportation.
* Applies only to swivel transport rings: before using, please consult
manufacturer stating application! The S.W.L. reduction for high • The number and distribution of the slinging points must be selected
temperatures applies only until the lifting accessory has cooled so that the load’s position does not change inadvertently during
down to ambient temperature again. transportation.
If the maximum permissible temperature of 400° is exceeded,
permanent damage will occur and the lifting accessory must be • Through holes must be provided with nuts in acc. with EN ISO 4032
decommissioned. (minimum grade 12).

• The position of the slinging point must permit contact of the whole
Impact loading support surface of the swivel.

The safe working loads stated apply for loading the lifting accessories • Put the link in the correct position before attaching the load.
without any impact.
The full safe working load can be utilised in the case of slight impacts
such as arise from lifting and lowering or moving the load on the crane.
High impacts such as the load falling onto the suspension equipment
are not permissible!

correct use incorrect use


Edge loading

Damage to the lifting accessories caused by sharp-edged loads must


be prevented.
06_08EN.FM

186
AWH weld-on hook
(DIN 5691)
Safety hook for welding onto dredging shovels. Complies with safety regulations.
Observe welding specifications.
The shape of the safety latch facilitates handling.
Further weld-on hooks up to 15 t safe working load available on request.
Weld-on hook Safety latch
set
Safe work- Model Dimensions Weight Item Item
ing load L H G B C approx. No. No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,300 AWH 1,3 95 71 25 25 34 0.6 801 150 0 817 600 0
3,800 AWH 3,8 132 105 29 35 40 1.3 801 151 0 817 601 0
6,300 AWH 6,3 167 130 34 45 49 2.8 801 152 0 817 602 0
10,000 AWH 10 175 133 34 50 49 3.7 801 153 0 817 602 0

NG transport ring
Weld-on transport ring (DIN 5691). Complies with safety regulations.
Observe welding specifications.
Transport ring up to nominal chain size 40 and version with spring available on request.
Safe work- Nominal Chain Dimensions Identifi- Weight Item
ing load size size E* F* C L H D B cation to approx. No.
DSK-N
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6-8 6 59 31 32 32 28 12 36 1 0.30 801 160 0
2,000 8-8 8 69 37 38 38 33 14 42 2 0.50 801 161 0
3,150 10-8 10 84 46 45 44 38 18 48 3 0.70 801 162 0
5,300 13-8 13 120 69 60 60 51 24 66 5 1.90 801 163 0
8,000 16-8 16 127 66 68 65 61 28 72 8 2.70 801 164 0
15,500 22-8 22 178 98 96 109 80 39 120 15 8.10 801 165 0
* Dimensions E and F vertical with respect to welding plane

Swivel transport ring


Swivel screw-on transport ring (DIN 5691).
Complies with safety regulations.
Safe work- Nom. Chain Dimensions Identifi- Weight Item
ing load size size E Fmax. A C H Bmax. D NG cation to approx. No.
DSK-N
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,120 6-8 6 65 30 61 65 38 22 12 M16 1 0.70 801 166 0
2,000 8-8 8 85 40 79 82 49 28 15 M20 2 1.50 801 167 0
3,150 10-8 10 98 45 92 101 59 33 19 M24 3 2.60 801 168 0
5,300 13-8 13 120 53 113 125 72 45 25 M30 5 4.60 801 169 0

Transport ring
Screw-on transport ring (DIN 5691). Complies with safety regulations.
Transport ring up to nominal chain size 34 available on request.
Safe work- Nom. Chain Dimensions Identifi- Weight Item
ing load size size E F A C L D B NG cation to approx. No.
DSK-N
[kg] [mm] [kg]
3,150 10-8 10 112 57 90 38 130 18 40 M16 3 1.50 801 170 0
5,300 13-8 13 149 79 115 48 165 22 50 M20 5 3.10 801 171 0
8,000 16-8 16 183 93 150 62 212 26 65 M30 8 6.40 801 172 0
15,000 22-8 22 226 114 175 72 255 36 75 M36 15 12.20 801 173 0

High-tensile threaded sling attachment points with RLP thread


with 25% higher S.W.L. provide versatile solutions for the safe movement of loads.
Can be rotated by 360° and swivelled by 180°. The clevis can easily be dismantled.
B Sling attachment points with longer threads and inch threads on request.
Safe working load *1 Model Dimensions Weight Item
D

B D G H L M approx. No.
G

[kg] [mm] [kg]


H

600 300 RLP M8 42 12 35 60 15 M8 0.3 801 037 0


1,000 500 RLP M10 42 12 34 60 20 M10 0.3 801 038 0
1,500 750 RLP M12 57 19 46.5 85 19 M12 0.9 801 039 0
3,000 1,500 RLP M16 57 19 44 85 24 M16 0.9 801 040 0
L

ha002v

5,000 2,500 RLP M20 83 28 56 111 32 M20 2.8 801 041 0


M 7,000 3,500 RLP M24 83 28 53 111 37 M24 2.8 801 042 0
12,000 6,000 RLP M30 114 34 69.5 144 49.5 M30 7.0 801 180 0
14,000 8,000 RLP M36 114 34 65.5 144 61 M36 7.3 801 181 0
06_08EN.FM

16,000 14,000 RLP M42 149 40 90 185 65 M42 14.0 801 182 0
20,000 16,000 RLP M48 149 40 86 185 75 M48 14.9 801 183 0
*1 Safe working load for one attachment point and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request.

187
Sling accessories

TP screw-on rotating sling attachment collar


Compact and light construction. Safety factor 4:1 against breakage in all load directions.
With ball bearings, can be rotated by 360°. Max. permissible swivelling range of the take-up link 180°.
Painted aqua-blue. Grade 10. Rotating sling attachment points up to 40 t on request.

Safe working load *1 Model Thread Dimensions Master link Weight Item
dxe b g SW t f x t1 x bi No.
*
[kg] [mm] [kg]
1,000 500 TP 0,7 M10x18 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.42 801 255 0
1,400 700 M12x18 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.43 801 247 0
1,400 700 M12x25 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.43 801 250 0
2,000 1,000 M14x20 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.43 801 249 0
2,800 1,400 TP 1,4 M16x20 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.44 801 252 0
2,800 1,400 M16x30 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.45 801 248 0
3,400 1,700 M20x30 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.48 801 251 0
3,400 1,700 M24x30 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.50 801 254 0
5,000 2,500 TP 2,5 M20x30 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 0.95 801 256 0
5,000 2,500 M20x40 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 0.97 801 257 0
5,000 2,500 M20x50 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 0.99 801 253 0
5,000 2,500 M20x70 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 1.05 801 258 0
8,000 4,000 TP 4,0 M24x30 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.36 801 259 0
8,000 4,000 M24x45 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.41 801 260 0
8,000 4,000 M24x50 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.42 801 261 0
8,000 4,000 M30x35 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.45 801 262 0
12,000 6,700 TP 6,7 M30x35 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.33 801 246 0
12,000 6,700 M30x45 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.37 801 263 0
12,000 6,700 M30x50 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.40 801 264 0
12,000 6,700 M30x60 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.45 801 265 0
12,000 8,000 TP 8,0 M30x35 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.59 801 273 0
12,000 8,000 M30x45 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.64 801 266 0
15,000 10,000 TP 10,0 M36x50 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.76 801 267 0
15,000 10,000 M36x54 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.79 801 269 0
15,000 12,500 TP 12,5 M42x50 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.56 801 270 0
15,000 12,500 M42x60 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.63 801 271 0
15,000 12,500 M42x63 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.68 801 268 0
15,000 12,500 M48x72 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 4.23 801 272 0
22,400 15,000 TP 15,0 M42x60 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.19 801 282 0
22,400 15,000 M45x60 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.31 801 283 0
22,400 15,000 M48x60 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.37 801 284 0
22,400 15,000 M56x78 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.98 801 285 0
22,400 15,000 M64x96 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 8.86 801 286 0
* Width across flats
*1 Safe working load for one rotating sling attachment collar and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request.

TP-S weld-on rotating sling attachment collar


Safety factor against breakage 4:1 in all load directions; with ball bearings, can be rotated
by 360°. Max. permissible swivelling range of the take-up link 180°. Painted aqua-blue. Grade 10.
Material of the element to be welded 1.6758.
Safe working load *1 Model Dimensions Master link Weight Item
a b g t f x t1 x bi approx. No.

[kg] [mm] [kg]


5,000 2,500 TP-S 2,5 5.5x45° 52 68 57 16x70x34 0.95 801 274 0
8,000 4,000 TP-S 4,0 7.0x45° 57 74 62 18x85x45 1.30 801 275 0
12,000 6,700 TP-S 6,7 8.5x45° 70 95 78 20x85x45 2.20 801 276 0
15,000 10,000 TP-S 10,0 10x45° 80 106 86 23x115x60 3.80 801 277 0
22,400 15,000 TP-S 15,0 12x45° 100 128 106 28x140x70 7.40 801 278 0
*1 Safe working load for one rotating sling attachment collar and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request.

FP screw-on sling attachment point


The take-up link can be rotated by 360° and swivelled by 180°. Can be locked in position; flat construction,
variable thread design, simple assembly. Painted aqua-blue. Grade 10.
Safe working load *1 Model Thread Dimensions Weight Item
a b c d e f g l S No.

[kg] [mm] [kg]


500 700 FP 0,5 M10x40 69 50 48 13 28 100 12 52 34 0.70 801 159 0
800 1,250 FP 0,8 M12x45 17 51 0.71 801 174 0
1,500 2,120 FP 1,5 M16x55 27 49 0.72 801 175 0
2,500 3,550 FP 2,5 M20x70 42 46 0.73 801 176 0
4,000 5,600 FP 4,0 M24x80 104 76 72 18 39 147 41 74 58 2.60 801 279 0
5,300 7,100 FP 5,0 M27x90 51 72 2.70 801 280 0
06_08EN.FM

6,000 8,000 FP 6,0 M30x90 51 70 2.75 801 281 0


*1 Safe working load for one attachment point and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request.

188
Eye bolts
(DIN 580 - ed. 2003-08).
Galvanised, die forged. Material and thread: C15 E / DIN 13 / DIN 267
Eye bolts in acc. with DIN 580 - ed. 1972-03 available on request.

Safe working load Dimensions Weight Item


d1 d2 d3 d4 h k l No.

90° 45°
[kg] [mm] [kg/%]
140 100 M6 20 36 20 36 8 13 5.0 801 184 0
140 100 M8 20 36 20 36 8 13 6.0 801 185 0
230 170 M10 25 45 25 45 10 17 11.0 801 186 0
360 240 M12 30 54 30 53 12 20.5 18.0 801 187 0
700 500 M16 35 63 35 62 14 27 28.0 801 188 0
1,200 860 M20 40 72 40 71 16 30 45.0 801 189 0
1,800 1,290 M24 50 90 50 90 20 36 87.0 801 190 0
3,200 2,300 M30 65 108 60 109 24 45 166.0 801 191 0
4,600 3,300 M36 75 126 70 128 28 54 265.0 801 192 0
6,300 4,500 M42 85 144 80 147 32 63 403.0 801 193 0
8,600 6,100 M48 100 166 90 168 38 68 638.0 801 194 0
STAHLplus Info _ 11,500 8,200 M56 110 184 100 187 42 78 880.0 801 195 0
Eye bolts and nuts in 16,000 11,000 M64 120 206 110 208 48 90 1240.0 801 196 0
stainless steel in acc. with
DIN 580/582 - ed. 2003-08 are
available.
Please enquire! Lifting eye nuts
(DIN 582 - ed. 2003-08)
Galvanised, die forged. Material and thread: C15 E / DIN 13 / DIN 267.
Diagonal pull permissible only at angles from 0 - 45°. Caution: reduced safe working load.
Lifting eye nuts in acc. with DIN 582 - ed. 1972-03 available on request.

Safe working load Dimensions Weight Item


d1 d2 d3 d4 h k No.

90° 45°
[kg] [mm] [kg/%]
140 100 M6 20 36 20 36 8 4.8 801 197 0
140 100 M8 20 36 20 36 8 5.0 801 198 0
230 170 M10 25 45 25 45 10 9.0 801 199 0
340 240 M12 30 54 30 53 12 16.0 801 200 0
700 500 M16 35 63 35 62 14 24.0 801 201 0
1,200 860 M20 40 72 40 71 16 36.0 801 202 0
1,800 1,290 M24 50 90 50 90 20 72.0 801 203 0
3,200 2,300 M30 65 108 60 109 24 132.0 801 204 0
4,600 3,300 M36 75 126 70 128 28 208.0 801 205 0
6,300 4,500 M42 85 144 80 147 32 311.0 801 206 0
8,600 6,100 M48 100 166 90 168 38 502.0 801 207 0
11,500 8,200 M56 110 184 100 187 42 669.0 801 208 0
16,000 11,000 M64 120 206 110 208 48 930.0 801 209 0

ELP eye bolts, grade 8

• Compact construction with flat area


• Simple to fit and to handle
• Flat area permits combination with other high-tensile
components
• Safety factor 4:1
• Tested on the basis of up-to-date standards and the test
principles of the Employers’ Liability Insurance Association

Safe working load Dimensions Weight Item


d1 d3 d4 h k l No.

[kg] [mm] [kg]


4,000 1,000 M16 72 42 56 16 24 0.38 801 118 0
6,000 1,500 M20 72 42 58 16 30 0.43 801 119 0
8,000 2,000 M24 88 48 69 19 36 0.85 801 124 0
06_08EN.FM

12,000 3,000 M30 106 60 84 22 45 1.4 801 128 0


16,000 4,000 M36 127 72 100 26 54 2.3 801 131 0

189
Sling accessories

Dee shackle, galvanised


equivalent to DIN 82101. Type A, with eye bolt.

Safe working load Dimensions Item


d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 b1 h1 No.
[kg] [mm]
100 4 5 10 M5 5 7 15.5 800 000 0
160 5 6 12 M6 6 8 18 800 001 0
250 7 8 16 M8 8 11 24 800 002 0
400 8 10 20 M10 10 14 30 800 003 0
630 10 12 24 M12 12 17 36 800 004 0
1,000 13 15 32 M16 15 21 49 800 005 0
1,600 17 19 40 M20 19 27 61 800 006 0
2,000 19 21 44 M22 21 30 67 800 007 0
2,500 21 23 48 M24 23 33 73 800 008 0
3,150 24 26 54 M27 26 38 83.5 800 009 0
4,000 27 29 60 M30 29 42 91 800 010 0
STAHLplus Info _ 5,000 30 33 72 M36 33 47 111 800 011 0
High tensile shackles 6,300 34 37 78 M39 37 53 119.5 800 012 0
feature smaller dimensions 8,000 38 41 90 M45 41 60 139.5 800 013 0
10,000 42 45 96 M48 45 66 147 800 014 0
and lighter weight 12,500 47 50 104 M52 50 73 158 800 015 0
compared to those of 16,000 52 55 120 M60 55 81 185 800 016 0
DIN 82101. This makes them 20,000 58 61 136 M68 61 90 211 800 017 0
easier to use. 25,000 63 67 144 M72 67 100 221 800 018 0
The safe working load indicated on the shackles must not be exceeded.

Straight Dee shackle, high-tensile


US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with eyebolt. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B if desired.
Clevis galvanised, pin spray-painted blue. Stamped with safe working load and nominal size.
Safety factor 6:1.
Safe working load Dimensions Item
d1 d2 d3 b1 h1 No.
[kg] [mm]
750 8 10 21 13 26 800 100 0
1,000 10 12 26 16 31 800 101 0
1,500 11 14 28 18 36 800 102 0
2,000 13 16 30 21 41 800 103 0
3,250 16 20 42 27 51 800 104 0
4,750 19 22 48 32 60 800 105 0
6,500 22 27 57 36 71 800 106 0
8,500 25 28 62 43 81 800 107 0
9,500 29 33 69 46 90 800 108 0
12,000 32 36 78 52 100 800 109 0
13,500 35 39 86 57 113 800 110 0
17,000 38 42 94 60 124 800 111 0
25,000 44 52 112 73 146 800 019 0
35,000 51 60 135 83 171 800 020 0
55,000 63 72 158 106 203 800 021 0
The safe working load indicated on the shackles must not be exceeded.

Bow shackle, high-tensile


US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with eyebolt. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B if desired.
Clevis galvanised, pin spray-painted blue. Stamped with safe working load and nominal size.

Safe working load Dimensions Item


d1 d2 d3 b1 b2 h2 No.
[kg] [mm]
500 6 8 17 12 19 28 800 200 0
750 8 10 21 13 21 31 800 201 0
1,000 10 12 26 16 26 36 800 202 0
1,500 11 14 28 18 29 42 800 203 0
2,000 13 16 30 21 33 48 800 204 0
3,250 16 20 42 27 43 60 800 205 0
4,750 19 22 48 32 51 71 800 206 0
6,500 22 27 57 36 58 84 800 207 0
8,500 25 28 62 43 68 95 800 208 0
STAHLplus Info _ 9,500 29 33 69 46 74 103 800 209 0
We recommend the use of 12,000 32 36 78 52 82 119 800 210 0
bow shackles to extend web 13,500 35 39 86 57 92 133 800 211 0
17,000 38 42 94 60 98 146 800 212 0
slings and round slings. 25,000 44 52 112 73 127 178 800 213 0
35,000 51 60 135 83 146 197 800 214 0
06_08EN.FM

55,000 63 72 158 106 184 267 800 022 0


The safe working load indicated on the shackles must not be exceeded.

190
High tensile Dee shackle E type pin, with cotter
US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with extended pin, nut and cotter. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B
if desired. High tensile forged steel, galvanised clevis, pin spray-painted blue.
Stamped with safe working load and nominal size. Safety factor 6:1.
Safe working load Dimensions Item
b1 b2 d1 d3 d4 h1 No.
[kg] [mm]
500 12 26 6 17 8 22 800 041 0
750 13 29 8 21 10 26 800 042 0
1,000 16 36 10 26 12 31 800 043 0
1,500 18 40 11 28 14 36 800 044 0
2,000 21 47 13 30 16 41 800 120 0
3,200 27 59 16 42 19 51 800 121 0
4,750 32 70 19 48 22 60 800 122 0
6,500 36 80 22 57 25 71 800 123 0
8,500 43 93 25 62 28 81 800 124 0
9,500 46 104 29 69 32 90 800 125 0
12,000 52 116 32 78 35 100 800 126 0
13,500 57 127 35 86 38 113 800 127 0
17,000 60 136 38 94 42 124 800 128 0
25,000 73 161 44 112 50 146 800 033 0
STAHLplus Info _ 35,000 83 185 51 127 55 171 800 034 0
Shackles with cotters can 55,000 105 232 64 152 70 203 800 035 0
be used wherever a 85,000 127 279 76 200 82 216 800 045 0
120,000 133 317 89 203 95 253 800 046 0
permanent connection 150,000 140 348 102 226 107 250 800 047 0
is required. The safe working load indicated on the shackles must not be exceeded.

High tensile bow shackle E type pin, with cotter


US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with extended pin, nut and cotter. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B
if desired. High tensile forged steel, galvanised clevis, pin spray-painted blue.
Stamped with safe working load and nominal size. Safety factor 6:1.
Safe working load Dimensions Item
b1 b2 b3 d1 d3 d4 h1 No.
[kg] [mm]
500 12 26 19 6 17 8 28 800 048 0
750 13 29 21 8 21 10 31 800 049 0
1,000 16 36 26 10 26 12 36 800 050 0
1,500 18 40 29 11 28 14 42 800 051 0
2,000 21 47 33 13 30 16 48 800 220 0
3,250 27 59 43 16 42 20 60 800 221 0
4,750 32 70 51 19 48 22 71 800 222 0
6,500 36 80 58 22 57 27 84 800 223 0
8,500 43 93 68 25 62 28 95 800 224 0
9,500 46 104 74 29 69 33 109 800 225 0
12,000 52 116 82 32 78 36 119 800 226 0
13,500 57 127 92 35 86 39 133 800 227 0
17,000 60 136 98 38 94 42 146 800 228 0
25,000 73 161 127 44 112 52 178 800 036 0
35,000 83 185 146 51 127 55 197 800 037 0
55,000 105 232 184 64 152 70 267 800 038 0
85,000 127 279 200 76 200 82 330 800 052 0
120,000 137 321 232 92 220 95 374 800 053 0
The safe working load indicated on the shackles must not be exceeded.

Shackle, stainless steel


Stainless steel, material A4, rust-free, forged
Version Safe working load Dimensions Item
b1 b2 d4 h1 No.
[kg] [mm]
Straight D shape 160 8 - M4 16 800 039 0
250 10 - M5 18 800 300 0
375 12 - M6 24 800 301 0
625 16 - M8 32 800 302 0
1,000 20 - M10 40 800 303 0
1,500 25 - M12 48 800 304 0
2,750 32 - M16 64 800 305 0
3,750 38 - M20 76 800 306 0
4,750 44 - M22 88 800 307 0
5,750 50 - M24 100 800 308 0
Bow shape 160 8 12 M4 16 800 023 0
250 10 15 M5 20 800 024 0
375 12 18 M6 24 800 025 0
625 16 24 M8 32 800 026 0
1,000 20 30 M10 40 800 027 0
1,500 25 36 M12 48 800 028 0
2,750 32 48 M16 64 800 029 0
3,750 38 60 M20 80 800 030 0
06_08EN.FM

4,750 44 66 M22 88 800 031 0


5,750 50 75 M24 100 800 032 0

191
Sling accessories

Insulated anti-twist guard


Fig. 1 For insulating hoists when welding on suspended hook. Insulation up to max. 1000 V.
Connection with high-tensile chains and wire ropes ensures twist-free operation and prevents
damage to sling equipment.
With axial roller bearing, dust-protected and watertight; can be used in all areas without
restrictions. Please consult the supplier for off-standard operating conditions.
Spray-painted yellow.

Fig. 2 Fig. 3
a
H

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5

Version Safe working load Dimensions Weight Item


H a b g No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
ha003v
With 2 SKT 2,000 131 22 - - 0.9 801 084 0
b link sections 3,150 164 26 - - 1.8 801 085 0
Fig. 1 5,300 208 33 - - 2.9 801 086 0
8,000 241 40 - - 5.2 801 087 0
12,500 285 48 - - 8.6 801 088 0
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 With SKT link 2,000 193 22 - 27 1.1 801 089 0
section and 3,150 245 26 - 34 2.3 801 090 0
SKN hook 5,300 305 33 - 42 4.3 801 091 0
Fig. 2 8,000 354 40 - 49 7.7 801 092 0
12,500 411 48 - 59 12.6 801 093 0
With SKT link 2,000 202 22 50 - 1.0 801 094 0
section and 3,150 257 26 66 - 2.0 801 095 0
SKG master link 5,300 309 33 72 - 3.6 801 096 0
Fig. 3 8,000 364 40 82 - 6.2 801 097 0
12,500 426 48 105 - 10.3 801 098 0
With 2 SKG 2,000 273 - 50 - 1.2 801 099 0
master links 3,150 350 - 66 - 2.4 801 104 0
Fig. 4 5,300 410 - 72 - 4.3 801 108 0
8,000 487 - 82 - 7.2 801 111 0
12,500 567 - 105 - 12.0 801 112 0
With SKG master 2,000 264 - 50 27 1.3 801 113 0
link and 3,150 338 - 66 34 2.7 801 114 0
SKN load hook 5,300 406 - 72 42 5.0 801 115 0
Fig. 5 8,000 477 - 82 49 8.7 801 116 0
12,500 552 - 105 59 14.3 801 117 0

Safety Advice _ The particular benefits of the insulated anti-twist guard


Special tools are required in • Welding on the suspended load - safe and economical with the insulated anti-twist guard.
some cases for the accident • The current flow between sling equipment and hoist is interrupted by the insulated anti-twist
prevention regulation test of guard. Thus the crane rope and the crane electrics are protected from the high currents
insulated anti-twist guards. occurring during welding.
For this reason, these tests • Personnel and material have optimum protection.
and repairs may only be performed by
authorised personnel and the manufacturer.

GH / GHW clevis hook


For lifting large stacks of sheet metal and large slabs. Use only in pairs.
Recommended angle of inclination of sling: 30-45°.

Safe working load Dimensions Weight Item


s b g d e B- No.
[kg] [mm] link [kg]
1,400 100 190 65 23 203 B8W 13 2.08 801 031 0
2,500 150 254 100 30 300 B8W 16 5.4 801 032 0
4,000 200 380 130 40 402 B8W 22 16.1 801 033 0
06_08EN.FM

5,300 300 500 195 50 592 B8W 26 31.5 801 034 0


8,000 400 600 250 60 781 B8W 26 63.4 801 035 0

192
When working with different types
of goods you need to keep an eye on
the loads. Our robust load cells
with integrated electronics will make
your material handling still safer and
more efficient.

Weighing and
measuring

193
Weighing and measuring

Load cells Technical features:


• Data hold function: the weight display can
The practical small CH load cell offering a be "frozen" by pressing the hold button for
scale range up to 50 kg is always at hand. The 5 seconds.
built-in 100 cm tape measure is extremely • Automatic switch-off function to save wear
useful. on the battery: the load cell switches off
after 3 minutes without use
The compact HCB load cell offering a a scale • Stainless steel load hook, HCB model aper-
range up to 200 kg is attached by means of the ture: 25 mm
stainless steel snap hook included in the deli- • LCD display, digit height 11 m (CH model),
very, aperture: 15 mm. 12 mm (HCB model)
• Suspension eye made of nickel-coated
forged steel (non-rotating)
• Stainless steel version available on request
Scale Model Display Dimensions Height Batteries Weight Item
range graduation (W x D x H) incl. hook No.
CH [kg] [g] [mm] [g]
0 - 15 CH 15 K 20 20 90x30x175 270 9V approx. 811 044 0
0 - 50 CH 50 K 50 50 block- 250 811 046 0
0 - 50 CH 50 K 100 100 battery 811 047 0
0 - 20 HCB 20 K 10 10 80x45x150 290 3x 1.5 V approx. 811 159 0
0 - 20 HCB 20 K 50 50 AA 400 811 048 0
0 - 50 HCB 50 K 20 20 811 160 0
0 - 50 HCB 50 K 100 100 811 049 0
HCB 0 - 100 HCB 100 K 200 200 811 050 0
0 - 200 HCB 200 K 100 100 811 161 0
0 - 200 HCB 200 K 500 500 811 051 0
HCB load cell also available with fine display. Price on request.

HUS load cells Technical features:


• Data hold function: the weight display is
With infrared remote control. frozen by means of the HOLD button until
another button is pressed
Lightweight load cell with illuminated LCD • CAL calibrating programme to adjust the
display. Digit height 23 mm. accuracy (on surcharge)
• Built-in accumulator, approx. 120 hours
The range of the infrared remote control is operating time, LED charge display, char-
approx. 2.5 m. All functions can be selected ging time approx. 8 hours via mains adapter
with the remote control. (9 V). Mains adapter for all countries availa-
ble without surcharge
• Hook with safety latch, nickel-plated forged
steel, rotatable

HUS

HUM load cells Technical features:


• Data hold function: the weight display is
With radio remote control. frozen by means of the HOLD button until
another button is pressed
Load cell with luminous LED digits, 25 mm high. • Tare clearance possible under load
• Built-in accumulator, approx. 80 hours
The range of the radio remote control is operating time. Charging time approx.
approx. 25 m. All functions can be selected 8 hours via mains adapter (15 V). Mains
with the remote control. adapter for all countries available without
surcharge
• Load hook made of nickel-coated forged
steel on HUM 1000 and HUM 3000 (rotating)

Scale Model Display Dimensions Height incl. Weight Item


range graduation (W x D x H) hook and eye No.
[kg] [g] [mm] [kg]
0 - 60 HUS 60 K 20 20 150x140x150 350 4 811 036 0
0 - 150 HUS 150 K 50 50 350 4 811 037 0
0 - 300 HUS 300 K 100 100 350 4 811 038 0
HUM 0 - 600 HUS 600 K 200 200 380 4 811 039 0
07_08EN.FM

0 - 1,000 HUM 1000 K 500 500 210x228x180 620 17 811 040 0


0 - 3,000 HUM 3000 K 1000 1000 210x228x180 650 18 811 041 0

194
Electronic load cells conf. to DIN 102 TSG

Compact, easy-to-use load cell with electronic Technical features


dynamometer based on DIN 1502 TSL, • Accurate to ± 0.1% safe working load
however with integrated load hook mounted in • Electronic strain gauge made of high-alloy
ball bearing. Permissible overload: 20%. Safety steel
factor: 5:1. • Functions: tare clearance, peak value and
With infrared remote control. selection of measuring unit (kg, daN, Lb, ton)
These load cells cannot be calibrated. • 5-digit LED display with 2 brightness
settings, height 25 mm
• Rechargeable battery for approx. 36 hours
continuous operation, charger
• Automatic stand-by and switch-off facility
• IP 55 protection
• Operating temperature range -10° to +55°C
• Housing made of fibreglass reinforced
nylon, suitable for aggressive ambiences
• The radio version is equipped with a
read-out, the weighing data are transmitted
without cables

N.B.: Scale range Display graduation Height A Weight Standard Radio


Calibratable version type MCW/MCWL up to Item Item
6 t available on request [kg] [kg] [mm] [kg] No. No.
0 - 500 0.2 330 2.0 811 096 0 811 156 0
0 - 1,000 0.5 330 2.5 811 097 0 811 157 0
0 - 2,000 1.0 360 3.0 811 098 0 811 158 0

STAHLplus Info _ In order to make our


loads cells easier to use, the DIN 1502 TSG
and SKW 02 loads cells come with infrared
remote control as standard.
Battery charger, rechargeable batteries
and infrared remote control included in the
scope of delivery!

Read-out for radio version Remote control Charger

SKW 02 load cells, 2,000 - 20,000 kg

This electronic load cell quickly and Technical features


accurately determines weight during crane • Accurate to ± 0.1% safe working load
operation. • Tare range = scale measuring range
The large-format display ensures the weight is • Operating temperature range -10 to +55°C
easy to read off. • Operating time per charge approx. 36 hours
The suspension eye is suitable for load hooks (standard operation)
conforming to DIN 15401. The safety hook • LED display, digit height 25 mm, red
features a universal joint suspension. • IP 55 protection
These load cells cannot be calibrated. • Safety factor 5:1
STAHLplus Info _ • The radio version is equipped with a
Hydraulic bent-lever balance read-out, the weighing data are transmitted
type HZKW up to 85 t availa- without cables
ble on request.

Scale Display Dimensions Weight* Standard Radio


range graduation A B C D E F Item Item
No. No.
[kg] [kg] [mm] [kg]
0 - 2,000 1 206 68 166 306 25 459 4.2 811 010 0 811 152 0
0 - 5,000 2 224 78 166 360 34 548 9.9 811 012 0 811 153 0
07_08EN.FM

0 - 10,000 5 272 98 188 462 49 744 21.5 811 014 0 811 154 0
0 - 20,000 10 370 98 257 665 70 1085 52.0 811 016 0 811 155 0
* Weight including shackle and load hook

195
Weighing and measuring

HTS load cells Technical features


• Data hold function: the weight display is
Crane load cell for inudstrial use with integra- "frozen" by a pressing the button twice until
ted ball-bearing load hook. the "C" button is pressed
With infrared remote control. • Integrated rechargeable battery with
The range of the infrared remote control is charge display. Operating time approx.
approx. 15 m. All functions can be selected. 150 hours, charging time approx. 15 hours
(mains adapter or charger)
• LED display with 2 illumination levels, height
of digits 25 mm (< 1500 kg), 30 mm (> 3000 kg)
A
• Standby function after 5 minutes
• Display: gross, tare, net
• Functions: tare, cumulative memory,
C D highest value, 10 free memory locations
B
N.B.: The standard version cannot be
calibrated. Version which can be calibrated
ha031v
available on request (e.g.: HTS 3T1 IPM).
Scale Model Display Minimum Case Dimensions Weight Standard version Calibrated version
range graduation load (W x D x H) A B C D Item Item
[kg] [kg] [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] No. No.
0 - 150 HTS 150K50 IP 0.05 1 200x204x160 45 30 435 480 14 811 138 0 811 145 0
0 - 300 HTS 300K100 IP 0.1 2 45 30 435 480 14 811 139 0 811 146 0
0 - 600 HTS 600K200 IP 0.2 4 45 30 435 480 14 811 140 0 811 147 0
0 - 1,500 HTS 1.5T0.5 IP 0.5 10 60 28 443 505 14 811 141 0 811 148 0
0 - 3,000 HTS 3T1 IP 1 20 279x254x381 90 45 735 815 40 * 811 142 0 811 149 0
0 - 6,000 HTS 6T2 IP 2 40 100 67 900 1040 65 * 811 143 0 811 150 0
0 - 10,000 HTS 10T5 IP 5 100 100 67 900 1040 65 * 811 144 0 811 151 0
Please note dimensions of balance when ordering! HTS 3 - 10 t are delivered by haulier.

TKZ and TZF load indicators Technical features


• Accurate to ±0.2% of rated load
Mechanical load indicator with electronic LCD • Operating time at 20°C: approx. 200 working
display, 20.5 mm high. hours
Can be set to "0" and switched from net to • Display: LCD, 20.5 mm high, 4 1/2 figure
gross load via a keypad. • Operating temperature range -10° to +50° C,
The scope of delivery includes the load 100% rated load value
indicator, the mains charger (3 V, 700 mA) and • Overload warning: value displayed flashes
a storage box. • Integrated accumulator with charge warning
Suitable shackles or load hooks for attaching • IP 54 protection
the load directly can be seen from the table. • TZF with radio transmission and RS 232
interface. Weighing data can be read from
the remote control

Scale Display Dimensions Weight Load inidcator Load indicator Shackle Hook
range gradua- * TKZ TZF
tion A ØC D J K L N Q Item Item Item Item
[kg] [kg] [mm] [kg] No. No. No. No.
0 - 2,500 1 247 22 179 610 34 38 15 315 2.8 811 104 0 811 125 0 811 111 0 811 118 0
0 - 5,000 1 250 27 180 610 50 44 32 350 3.4 811 105 0 811 126 0 811 112 0 811 119 0
0 - 10,000 10 325 48 213 690 105 95 50 535 4.4 811 106 0 811 127 0 811 113 0 811 120 0
0 - 20,000 10 378 55 233 780 92 95 70 562 7.6 811 107 0 811 128 0 811 114 0 811 121 0
0 - 35,000 10 405 64 245 1000 130 114 110 665 10 811 108 0 811 129 0 811 115 0 811 122 0
07_08EN.FM

0 - 50,000 10 450 76 264 1170 140 132 115 730 25 811 109 0 811 130 0 811 116 0 811 123 0
0 - 100,000 50 640 100 380 - 300 238 - 1240 41 811 110 0 - 811 117 0 -
* Without shackle and hook

196
LK digital load cells

The LK digital load cells are designed to cope


with tough industrial operating conditions.
Accuracy class II, EC design approval to
PTB-OIML R 76, up to 2500 calibration values.
Model LKe is calibrated, model LK cannot be
calibrated.

Technical features
• Extreme accuracy to 0.03% of end reading
• Incremental strain gauge load cell,
stainless steel design
• Digital display: LED 7-segment, 1 display
cycle per second, digit height 50 mm, red
• Switches off automatically
• Ram guard fitted as standed
• Voltage supply: 12 V maintenance-free
rechargeable batteries
• Operating temperature range -20°C to
+90°C
• Optional / retrofittable: radio transfer of
weighing data
• Compound load cell for 2 hoists on request

Scale Display Model Deadweight Item


range graduation No.

[kg] [kg] [kg]


Calibration 0 - 1,000 0.5 LK 1 50 811 099 0
not possible 0 - 2,000 1.0 LK 2 50 811 100 0
0 - 5,000 2.0 LK 5 50 811 101 0
0 - 10,000 5.0 LK 10 64 811 102 0
Calibrated 0 - 1,000 0.5 LKe 1 50 811 020 0
0 - 2,000 1.0 LKe 2 50 811 021 0
0 - 5,000 2.0 LKe 5 50 811 022 0
0 - 10,000 5.0 LKe 10 64 811 023 0
LKe 1-2: calibrated for 2 years from delivery date / LKE 5-10: calibrated for 3 years from delivery date

LKe/LK 1-5 LKe/LK 10


07_08EN.FM

197
Weighing and measuring

LDN calibrated digital load cell Technical features


• Large 40 mm 7-segment LED display, easily
This calibrated digital load cell is specially legible from a distance of at least 35 m.
designed for industrial use. • Extreme accuracy to 0.04% of end reading
Accuracy class III with EC design approval in (note display steps)
acc. with PTB-OIML R76 up to 2500 calibration • Measuring principle: incremental strain
values. gauge load cell
Optional/retrofittable: radio transmission of • Fast readings
weighing data to additional equipment. • Switches off automatically
3 year warranty on accuracy and function of • Including ram guard for 10 t / 20 t
the load cell. (0.5 t to 5 t without ram guard)
• Voltage supply: 6 V maintenance-free
rechargeable batteries, for at least 80 hours’
operation
• IP 54 protection

LDN 0,5 - 2 LDN 5 LDN 10


(LDN 20)

STAHLplus Info _ Other Scale range Model Display graduation Weight Item
types of load cell on [kg] [kg] [kg] No.
request. 0 - 500 LDN 0,5 0.2 12 811 131 0
0 - 1,000 LDN 1 0.5 12 811 132 0
0 - 2,000 LDN 2 1.0 12 811 133 0
0 - 5,000 LDN 5 2.0 18 811 134 0
0 - 10,000 LDN 10 5.0 35 811 135 0
0 - 20,000 LDN 20 10.0 48.5 811 136 0
LDN 0,5 - LDN 2 calibrated for 2 years from delivery date, LDN 5 - LDN 20 for 3 years.

Off-standard designs on request

STAHLplus Info _ Please


state size of crane load hook
when ordering. You will find
a summary of load hooks in
acc. with DIN 15400 on
page 140.
07_08EN.FM

198
STAHLplus material conveying
equipment is ideal whenever loads
need to be transported between
locations. Whether the goods are
small or large, it goes without saying
that we will provide an economical
and convenient solution.

Material conveying
equipment

199
Material conveying equipment

MKS...P DW workshop crane, collapsible

Collapsible and thus suitable for occasional use.

Technical features
• Parallel chassis for fitting round Euro pallets
• Telescopic jib adjustable to 4 positions
• Fast lifting thanks to double-action hydraulic pump
• Robust hydraulics, lowering can be precisely adjusted
• Ball bearing steered wheels and large wheels for easy manoeuvring.
All wheels with foot protection
• Models 1500 and 2000 with pushbar and tandem wheels

Model MKS 500 MKS 1000 MKS 1500 MKS 2000


P DW P DW P DW P DW
Safe working load [kg] / 500 / 1030 1,000 / 1085 1,500 / 1130 2,000 / 1310
at jib length [mm] 420 / 1130 830 / 1210 1,250 / 1330 1,650 / 1520
360 / 1220 670 / 1335 1,000 / 1530 1,400 / 1720
300 / 1320 500 / 1460 750 / 1730 1,200 / 1920
La / Lb jib length [mm] 1030-1320 1085-1460 1130-1730 1310-1920
S max. lifting height [mm] 2400 2450 3100 3150
S1 lowest lifting height [mm] 570 210 300 300
L chassis length [mm] 1250 1742 2200 2200
B1 / B chassis width [mm] 830 / 970 1000 / 1140 1000 / 1190 1000 / 1190
Weight [kg] 73 121 230 250
MKS 1500 P DW Item No. 810 841 0 810 842 0 810 843 0 810 844 0
Unit price

Lb B1 B1
La MKS 500 PDW MKS 500 DW-S
MKS 1000 PDW B MKS 1000 DW-S B
MKS 1500 PDW
MKS 2000 PDW
S
S1

L
ha007v

MKS...DW-S workshop crane, folding


folded Can be folded up in no time, thus space-saving and particularly
suitable for occasional use.

Technical features
• Spread chassis
• Telescopic jib adjustable to 4 positions
• Fast lifting thanks to double-action hydraulic pump
• Robust hydraulics, lowering can be precisely adjusted
• Ball bearing steered wheels and large wheels for easy manoeuvring.
All wheels with foot protection

Model MKS 500 DW-S MKS 1000 DW-S


Safe working load [kg] / 500 / 950 1,000 / 1090
at jib length [mm] 420 / 1070 830 / 1210
360 / 1190 670 / 1330
300 / 1310 500 / 1450
La / Lb jib length [mm] 950-1310 1090-1450
S max. lifting height [mm] 2100 2500
S1 lowest lifting height [mm] 310 300
L chassis length [mm] 1420 1720
B1 / B chassis width [mm] 940 / 1095 790 / 950
Weight [kg] 73 108
08_08EN.FM

MKS 500 DW-S Item No. 810 845 0 810 846 0


Unit price

200
SITI small counterbalanced crane

The SITI small counterbalanced crane is impressive with the wide free
working range in front of the wheels. Ideal for working in inaccessible
places or with loads it cannot travel under or around.

Technical features
• All models with 1500 mm wheelbase and counterbalance filling
• Easy lifting with double hydraulic pump with extra long pump handle
• Precise lowering to the millimetre by means of drain valve
• Travel by pulling or pushing on the steering handle, can also be
moved under load. Steering radius approx. 180°
• Automatic braking by raising the steering handle
• Collapsible: pillar, hydraulics and jib are folded down onto the
chassis by removing the pins
• Modern design
• Foot protection
• Tested with 125% overload

Model SITI 250 N SITI 350 N SITI 500 N


Max. safe working load
for jib length 925 mm [kg] 250 350 500
for jib length 1215 mm 165 230 360
for jib length 1505 mm 120 170 265
for jib length 1795 mm 95 135 210
STAHLplus Info _ We would be pleased to quote you for jib length 2085 mm 80 110 175
battery-powered devices and off-standard solutions Max. lifting height [mm] 2800 2800 2800
Overall width [mm] 800 800 800
outside our standard range. Just copy page 203 and Chassis length (wheelbase) [mm] 1500 1500 1500
answer the questions. We will work out a crane just Overall length [mm] 1775 1775 1775
for you. Working range in front of hydraulics [mm] 465-1625 465-1625 465-1625
Height when folded, without steering handle [mm] 1020 1020 1020
4 plastic wheels [mm] Ø150 Ø150 Ø150
Weight incl. counterbalance [kg] 400 435 470
Item No. 810 496 0 810 497 0 810 498 0
Unit price

SHB industrial crane


New Technical features
• Parallel chassis for moving around Europallets and box pallets
• Fast-acting 4-speed precision pump: fast lifting without load, easy
New! with mechanical travel positionerer!
Extremely robust and long-lasting. Able to withstand constant use in a lifting with load
production plant. • The load can be held for days in any position
• Jib adjustable to 13 positions
• Precise lowering to the millimetre by means of drain valve
• Travel by pulling or pushing on the steering handle, can also be moved
under load. Steering radius approx. 180°. The mechanical travel drive
helps when being moved by a single person even under full load.
SHB 2000FaPo Forwards and backwards with millimetre accuracy.
• Good running characteristics
Model SHB .... 1000FaPo 2000FaPo 3000FaPo
S.W.L. max. kg / with pins set in front of I 1,000/700 2,000/1100 3,000/1100
hydraulics mm) II 820/850 1,600/1275 2,700/1275
III 660/1000 1,200/1450 1,900/1450
IV 460/1150 800/1625 1,350/1625
SHB 1000FaPo V 355/1300 600/1800 1,000/1800
VI 280/1450 450/1975 830/1975
VII 240/1600 400/2150 700/2150
VIII 180/1750 300/2325 500/2325
IX 150/1930 250/2500 400/2500
X 130/2030 220/2675 330/2675
XI 150/1900 200/2850 270/2850
XII 100/2350 170/3025 230/3025
XIII 90/2500 155/3200 200/3200
Lifting height max./min. [mm] 3750/800 4900/500 4900/500
Chassis width outside/inside [mm] 970/830 1250/1050 1600/1400
Overall height [mm] 1625 2000 2000
Chassis length with wheels and handle [mm] 2000 2450 2500
Working range in front of wheels [mm] 0-1488 0-1730 0-1635
Plastic wheels, 4 pcs [mm] Ø125/200 Ø200 Ø250
Weight [kg] 310 550 810
08_08EN.FM

Item No. 810 802 0 810 803 0 810 804 0


Unit price

201
Material conveying equipment

STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions

Off-standard solutions with workshop cranes

Workshop cranes for off-standard tasks and requirements


Tell us what your task is - we will advise you and together we will work
out the optimum solution!
Please note also our enquiry sheet on page 203.

Counterbalanced crane (500 kg S.W.L.) with winch for vertical lift.


Special characteristic: extreme retraction to permit transportation in a lift

Industrial crane (500 kg S.W.L.) with winch and 270° slewing range for replacing tools in
narrow aisles

08_08EN.FM

Absolutely off-standard solution for removing and adjusting car engines in an Industrial crane with 1,500 kg S.W.L. and 360° slewing range
R&D department. Pillar height can be adjusted electrically, telescopic jib, slewing, folding,
tray can be rotated, extremely narrow

202
Fax enquiry for workshop cranes Simply copy - fill in - fax back

If you are unable to solve your particular transport task Please answer the following questions:
with the workshop cranes illustrated here we can still
help you find the right solution.
The most important question:
Photocopy this page and fill in the details and Is it possible to move (drive) under or around the load? … Yes … No
dimensions you require.
(if "yes" please enter the required dimensions in sketch A,
Then simply fax it back to us and we’ll immediately pre- if "no" enter the dimensions in sketch B).
pare a quote!
c What safe working load is required? ........................................... kg

Sketch A d To what height do you need to lift this load


(= safe working load)? .........................................mm

e At what working range? .........................................mm

What is the inner chassis width? .........................................mm

What is the outer chassis width? .........................................mm

What passage width do you have available? ........................................... m

What is the nature of the floor? … rough … smooth

… indoors … assembly bay

Should the crane also be able to swivel? … Yes … 90°


… 180°
… 270°
… 360°

Description of application:
Sketch B .............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

Name/customer No.
................................................................................................................................
Company
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Street/P.O. Box
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post code/town
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Who is to be contacted if there are questions?
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Department/job title
08_08EN.FM

.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telephone Fax
.................................................................................................................................................................................................

203
Material conveying equipment

An excerpt from our supply programme

This excerpt illustrates a selection of material conveying and handling


equipment and lifting systems.

Are you interested!

Then just ask us!

08_08EN.FM

204
Our hydraulic products are indis-
pensable aids wherever heavy loads
need to be lifted, levelled off,
equalised, inserted or balanced.

Hydraulics

205
Hydraulics

An excerpt from our supply programme

This excerpt illustrates a selection of hydraulic products.

Are you interested!

Then just ask us!

09_08EN.FM

206
Our fork-lift truck attachments turn
every fork-lift truck into a multi-
functional appliance – everything is
possible from dump container to
working platform. And transporting
production waste or hazardous
materials is no problem.

Fork-lift truck
attachments

207
Fork-lift truck attachments

MB/MB-F working platforms

MB working platforms are tested and approved in compliance with


accident prevention regulations in various countries (MB-D, MB-CH,
MB-A, MB-NL). They provide maximum safety for repair and
maintenance work.
The MB-F folding working platform is ready for use in next to no time.
It takes up very little space when it is not in use.

Technical features
• 2 persons permissible
• Work load limit 300 kg
• Fork sleeves with anti-slip device
• Model MB-F: folding design, headroom when folded: 300 m
• Surface spray painted blue, RAL 5012 (orange, RAL 2000)
• Protective grating on truck side

Accessories
• 2 steered + 2 fixed polyamide wheels Ø180 mm, one steered wheel
with parking brake, height 220 mm. Item No.: 818 174 0
• For MB-F: tool rest 745 x 150 x 100 mm (standard on MB).
Item No.: 818 342 0

Model Outside dimensions Floor Weight Item


LxWxH area No.
Model MB-D, in compliance with accident prevention regulations [mm] [kg]
MB-D 1115x1200x1890 800x1200 120 818 027 0
MB-D/L 1290x 800x1890 1200x800 120 818 340 0
MB-CH 1115x1200x2090 800x1200 125 818 028 0
MB-CH/L 1290x1000x2090 1200x800 125 818 341 0
MB-A 1115x1200x2090 800x1200 132 818 029 0
MB-NL 1115x1200x1890 800x1200 130 818 037 0
MB-F 1090x1200x1890 1000x1200 120 818 039 0
Please indicate colour when ordering!

Inside dimensions of fork sleeves


Model B A C
[mm]
MB-D, MB-CH, MB-A, MB-NL, MB-F 600 200 80
MB-D/L 160 200 80
Model MB-F: folding design MB-CH/L 160 220 85

MB-K working platforms

The tried and tested crane working platform

Technical features
• 2 persons permissible
• Work load limit 300 kg
• Fork sleeves with anti-slip device
• Sling supplied as standard
• Surface spray painted,
Aufnahme mit Vierstrangkette
blue RAL 5012
orange RAL 2000 4-leg sling attachment

Accessories Inside dimensions of fork sleeves


• 2 steered + 2 fixed polyamide wheels MB-K
Ø180 mm, one steered wheel with parking A B C
brake, height 220 mm. [mm]
Item No.: 818 174 0 600 200 80
• Tool rest 745 x 150 x 100 mm
Item No.: 818 342 0

Model Outside dimensions Floor Attachments for Weight Item


LxWxH area No.
[mm] [kg]
10_08EN.FM

MB-K IV 800x1200x2250 800x1200 Fork-lift truck + crane 200 818 038 0


Model MB-K IV Please indicate colour when ordering!

208
Flex drum tipper

Transporting, controlled emptying, turning and setting down steel and plastic drums
of 60-220 l capacity, canisters and refuse containers of 120/240 l capacity

Technical features
• Sturdy frame with fork sleeves
• Prism with tenter-belt and double worm gear
• With crank handle or endless chain
• Can be secured to prevent slipping
• Safe working load 300 kg
• 360° range of rotation
• Pick-up attachments for fork-lift truck, wheel loader and crane
• Spray painted blue, RAL 5012 (orange,
RAL 2000) or hot-dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461
• Explosion-protected version on request
Model FLEX-HK with crank handle Model FLEX-K with endless chain on crane
Model Safe Tipping Outside Fork Fork Weight Spray painted Galvanised
working with dimensions spacing cross- Item Item
FLEX-.. load LxWxH section No. No.
[kg] [mm] [kg]
HK 300 Crank handle 1000x1000x430 650 150x60 70 818 199 0 818 200 0
K 300 Chain 1000x1000x430 650 150x60 75 818 201 0 818 202 0
Please indicate colour when ordering!

Liftomat model L

Controlled drum emptying with a range of rotation of up to 270°.

Technical features
• For 200 l steel and plastic drums such as rolling hoop and tension ring drums, plastic drums
with lids, L-ring drums etc.
• Model L/E: electrohydraulic design complete with maintenance-free 12 V/88 Ah battery and
charger for 230 V connection
• Model L/M: hydraulic design with hand pump
• 2 steered + 2 fixed wheels made of solid rubber, both steered wheels with parking brake
• Safe pick-up ensured by clamp at front and spindle holder at top
• With crank handle or endless chain on a self-braking worm gear
• Spray painted orange, RAL 2000
• Explosion-protected design on request

Model Version Safe work- per Lifting Empty. Range of Steer.- Fixed- Wt. Item
ing load stroke height height rotation wheel-Ø No.
[kg] [mm] [degree] [mm] [kg]
L/M 1300 Hydraulic 350 18 1100 1300 270 Ø175 Ø200 192 818 203 0
L/E 1300 Electro- 350 - 1100 1300 270 Ø175 Ø200 220 818 204 0
hydraulic
Model L/E electro-hydraul. operated lift, tipping by crank handle
FHR drum jack roller

For lifting and transporting drums safely.

Technical features
• Regardless of drum diameter and height, the gripper picks up nearly all steel and plastic
drums, including open drums, safely at the rim
• Suitable for charging collection troughs, hazardous materials depots, drum stacking pallets,
etc.
• Rubber guard to avoid damage to drums
• Steered wheels Ø180, fixed wheels Ø80 mm
• Spray painted orange, RAL 2000
• Explosion-protected version on request

Model Safe work- Length Width Height Lifting Weight Item


ing load Outside Inside height No.
10_08EN.FM

[kg] [mm] [kg]


FHR 600 G 300 950 1125 850 1310 600 94 818 206 0
Model FHR 600 G
209
Fork-lift truck attachments

An excerpt from our supply programme

This excerpt illustrates a selection of fork-lift


truck attachments and storage systems

Are you interested!

Then just ask us!

10_08EN.FM

210
Information
Slings
Chain slings, chain sling components,
endless chain slings, chain sling accessories,
rope slings, round and web slings, wear protectors, chain slings
r forestry application, chain slings for hot dip galvanising plants,
nsion systems, sling rack Sling accessories Weld-on hooks,
ransport slingeye bolts, lifting eye nuts, transport ring, carbine hooks,
anti-twist guard, clevis hook, sling attachment points Weighing and
Load cells, calibrated load cells, load indicators, digital load cells Material
uipment KranTrolleys, scissor-type lifting tables, flat lifting tables, pallet lifting
r-type pallet liftingtrucks, machinery lifters, shifting skates, workshop cranes
draulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps, toe jacks, hydraulic lifters, spreaders,
truck attachments Dump and stacking dump containers, working platforms, hinged
lescopic crane jibs, Big Bag transport equipment, gas cylinder cabinets, collection
transport equipment Crane technology Crane systems, jib cranes, gantry and
small crane technology, radio remote controls, runway endstops,suspension,
andling equipment, wheel blocks Hoists Chain hoists, wire rope hoists, winch,
push trolleys, reel-type trolleys,adjustable beam clamps, cable winches,
rope sheaves, balancers, cable reeling drums, cable pullers Explosion protec-
electric chain hoists, Ex wire rope hoists, Ex crane technology, Ex crane
onents, Ex manual chain hoists, Ex pneumatic chain hoists, Ex crane load
ls, Ex manual cranes, Ex manual winches, Ex pneumatic winches,
Ex balancers, Ex mini-manipulator, Ex small crane systems Load
211
suspensionequipment Grabs, clamps, barrel tongs, suc-
Information

A C
Accident prevention regulations: Cable lay rope:
Collection of accident prevention regula- Cable lay ropes are highly flexible rope
tions of the main employers’ liability slings consisting of several stranded ropes.
insurance association.
Cable sling:
Air gap: Cable slings are made up of several highly
Non-magnetic gap between the pole sur- flexible stranded cable cores.
face of a lifting magnet and the workpiece.
This gap forms a resistance in the mag- CE :
netic circuit and reduces the number of Symbol indicating the conformity of a pro-
force lines. duct to EC Machinery Directives.

Ambient influences: CEN :


Glossary

Ambient influences, such as e.g. tempera- Communauté Européenne Normative,


ture variations, high humidity and sub- European Standards Institute.
stances promoting corrosion (e.g. acidic
vapours) may have a detrimental effect Coating (textile):
on the service life and safe working load Surface sealing of webbing to improve
of a sling. resistance to abrasion or cutting; mainly
with polyurethane.
Anti-derail device:
Safety device on trolleys to prevent the Coil:
trolley and thus the load falling if a wheel Sheet metal wound in the form of a hollow
should break. cylinder.

Attachment method: Collecting capacity:


Different techniques (direct, looped, laid A collection device (collection trough)
around) for using slings to lift loads. must be able to hold 10 % of the total quan-
tity stored, however at least the contents
of the largest container stored in it. National
B regulations may specify differently.
Bottom hook block:
Multi-fall suspension of a suspension ele- Colour coding:
ment (rope, chain…), usually via sheaves Web slings and round slings conforming to
or chain sprockets with a load hook for DIN 61360 (EN 1492) are identified with a
suspending the load. Europe-wide standardised colour code for
faster recognition of the safe working load
Breaking load: (e.g. violet = 1000 kg).
The theoretical breaking load comprises
the nominal strength of the selected Corrosion protection:
material and the individual load-bearing Corrosion protection measures contribute
cross-sections. to improving the actual service life of
a piece of material handling equipment.
The base material is protected by a
high grade coating (galvanised, powder-
coated…).

212
All around the load hook

from A--F
F
Crack testing: DIN: Fibre core:
Chain slings conforming to EN 818 must be Deutsches Institut für Normung, Fibre cores are stranded natural or synthe-
examined as part of every third German Standards Institute. tic fibre yarns and form the basis for manu-
operational safety test to ensure they are facturing wire ropes.
free of cracks. This crack test must Direct lashing:
be documented. Lashing method in which the lashing equip- Finishing:
ment is attached directly to rigid parts of Chemical surface treatment of textiles to
Cross lay: the load or attachment points provided for protect them from abrasion and damp.
A stranded rope in which the wires in the this purpose.
outer strands run in the opposite direction Fitting:
to the direction of lay of the strands in Dynamic friction coefficient: High-tensile terminal connection which
the rope. Coefficient for the friction between the can be laid on the hoist hook (web slings
load and the contact surface of the vehicle with terminal fittings).
during movement of the load (previously
D sliding friction coefficient). Fixed end:
daN: The fixed end of a lashing strap consists
Designation of an occurring force of belt, tensioning and connecting element
(decanewton). 1 daN = 10 N corresponds E (ratchet and hook).
approximately to the force generated by Elasticity:
a suspended load of 1 kg. The precise Ability of a material to expand to its appa- Flemish eye:
conversion factor between mass and force rent yielding point under load and spring The Flemish eye conforming to DIN 3095
is 9.80665. back without loss in strength. is a positive rope end link consisting
of wire ropes with steel core and conical
Danger zone: Expansion: steel pressed clamp.
Danger zones are working areas that must Ability of a material to behave elastically
be identified as such, in which a source of under load without loss in strength. On Freewheeling:
danger poses a risk to life and limb as well exceeding the elastic expansion range, Permits the unloaded hoist chain to be
as property. In compliance with accident the material can no longer assume its pulled through the applicance in both
prevention regulations, the boundaries of original condition and remains plastically directions (lifting and lowering) to position
the zones must be delimited with safety, deformed. the hook.
warning and direction signs. Once a year
companies must correspondingly instruct Explosion protection: Fzul:
the personnel employed in such zones. Electrical systems in atmospheres with Permissible lashing force (LC).
easily ignitable gas-air mixtures must be
Declaration of conformity: manufactured and tested in accordance
The manufacturer or his agent established with a special explosion protection prin-
in the Community must issue en EC decla- ciple. The basis principle of explosion pro-
ration of conformity for each machine or tection is based on flameproof encapsula-
safety component manufactured, to certify tion of the electrical switchgear from the
that the machines and safety components outer, easily ignitable atmosphere such
are in accordance with the stipulations of that a switching spark or an explosion
the EC Machinery Directive. pressure wave cannot emerge from the
encapsulated explosion-protected switch-
gear.

213
Information

Glossary
G I
Grade: Identification tag (label): Insulation:
Materials for round steel chains are Marking conforming to standards showing An example of electrical insulation is
classed according to grade indicating the permissible safe working load(s) and other the separating layer between the current-
actual rated tensile stress in abbreviated product-specific information for slings carrying electric motor winding and a
form (e.g. Grade 8 corresponds to a mate- and lashing equipment... Must be present machine housing.
rial with a tensile strength of 800 N/mm). and easily legible.
IP rating:
Grommet: Inclination angle: This rating describes the protection class
A cable lay grommet is an endlessly laid Inclination angles occur between the load- and group for machine housings and is
rope sling consisting of one or two con- bearing legs of sling tackle and an imagi- made up of code digits corresponding to
tinuous ropes forming a bond of six ropes nary vertical line through the attachment requirements with regard to contact pro-
around a rope core. The rope ends are points on the load to be transported. They tection, the penetration of dust, moisture
pushed into the core so that the insertion serve as the basis for calculating the per- and water (e.g. IP 54: 1st digit “5” stands
point and the splice point are on opposite missible safe working load of slings. for dust-protected, 2nd digit “4” stands for
sides. The splice point marked in red must splash-water protected).
not be loaded over hooks or edges as the Initial stressing force:
rope ends might push out of the rope bond. To prevent a load slipping on the cargo ISO:
area of a vehicle lashing straps must International Security Organisation.
GS: fix the load to the cargo area with defined
Geprüfte Sicherheit. Tested safety. Safety forces.
tested by a neutral testing institute (TÜV- L
CERT, technical committees of employers’ Initial stressing force of lashing Lashing down:
liability insurance associations). equipment: Lashing method in which the friction force
Stressing force generated in lashing equip- is increased by initial stressing forces
ment by means of a tensioning device. in the lashing equipment in addition to the
H weight of the load. This method of securing
Hardening and tempering: Initial stressing force (normed) STF: loads is non-positive. Due to the number
Hardening and tempering is a heat treat- Residual force after the handle of of parameters involved (initial stressing
ment process serving the purpose of the tensioning device has been released. force, sliding friction coefficient, inclination
improving material properties with regard This value is specified on the lashing angle), it is difficult to calculate.
to tensile stress. equipment.
Lashing force LC:
Hoist: Inox: Maximum force in direct pull which lashing
A machine serving to lift and lower freely Brand name for stainless steel; also a equipment must withstand in use.
suspended (not guided) loads. This colloquial designation for stainless steel
machine can be manually, electrically or (generic name). Lashing point:
pneumatically driven. Device on a road vehicle to which lashing
equipment can be directly attached.
Hoisting speed: A lashing point may be in the form of e.g.
The speed with which the hoist hook with an oval link, hook, eye, lashing rail.
the load moves upwards.
LC:
See lashing force.

214
Accessories direct from the hoist and crane manufacturer

from G--P
M O
Loader: Magnetic field: Operating coefficient:
The man at the load responsible for atta- Occurs at the pole surfaces when the Arithmetical ratio between the maximum
ching it correctly. Is one of a team together lifting magnet is switched on. load supported and the lifting capacity
with the crane operator and directs him if (safety factor).
necessary using standardised hand sig- Magnetic force lines:
nals. In the case of floor-controlled cranes, Imaginary lines between the north and
the two jobs are usually performed by a south poles of a magnet. Together P
single person. they form the magnetic field and flow Polyamide (PA):
through the workpiece. The greater Polyamide synthetic fibres (nylon, perlon)
Loading: the number of force lines, the greater the are characterised by a high degree
Attaching the load to the crane or hoist clamping force. of expansion under load and offer good
hook. resistance to alkalinen solutions.
Mechanism group: The high moisture absorption rate results
Load suspension equipment: The classification of a hoist in a mecha- in a reduction of the safe working load.
Devices for suspending loads, e.g. lifting nism group in accordance with FEM
clamps, tongs, grabs and lifting beams. is calculated from the average operating Polyester (PES):
time, the load and the hoisting path per Fibres made of polyester (Hostalen, Diolen)
Long lay: day and specifies the maximum operating have a linear force-expansion ratio and
A stranded rope in which the wires in the time under full load. offer good resistance to acids.
outer strands run in the same direction
as the strand in the rope. Powder-coating:
N High-quality surface treatment. Colour
Loose end: Niro: pigments are transferred to the surface in
The loose end of a lashing strap consists Stainless steel. powder form by means of electrostatics.
of the strap and a connecting element.
Non-twisting: Pretension:
Low-tension (low-torsion): Wire ropes are considered to be non- To prevent a load slipping on the cargo
A wire rope is low-tension if its strands twisting when they do not rotate about area of a vehicle lashing straps must
and wires project from the rope body their own longitudinal axis on application fix the load to the cargo area with defined
only slightly or not at all. The individual of an arbitrary tensile force acting on forces.
wires are pre-shaped and thus lie in the rope axis.
the rope body practically without tension. PuR coatings:
Polyurethane coatings on round woven
Low-torsion: fabric hoses. They serve as abrasion
See low-tension. protection facilities for web slings and
round slings.
Low-twisting:
Wire ropes are considered to be low-twis-
ting when they rotate only slightly about
their own longitudinal axis on application
of an arbitrary tensile force acting on the
rope axis.

215
Information

Glossary
R S
RAL: Safe working load: Spiral rope:
Designation for standardised colour The safe working load specifies the rated Structure consisting of two or more layers
shades (e.g. RAL 3020 traffic signal red, load bearing capacity of a load suspension of shaped or round wires laid spirally over
RAL 6018 yellow/green). device or sling, taking into consideration a core wire (see also strand).
the attachment method and the correspon-
Ratchet: ding inclination angle. Spiral round strand rope:
A tensioning element serving to generate Is a multi-layer round strand rope, in some
initial stressing force in lashing straps. Safe working load label: cases with changing directions of lay in
Manual force is applied by means of a A safe working load label must be affixed the individual layers. Used e.g. as a lifting
lever and transmitted to the winding shaft to every item of standardised sling equip- rope on cranes.
or the strap by a gearwheel. ment. It serve the purpose of quickly
identifying and recognising the maximum Splice:
Rated strength: permissible safe working load. Splices complying with DIN 3089 are
The rated strength is the tensile strength frictionally engaged rope terminal
of a material determined by way of calcu- Sharp edge: connections made by resplicing the loose
lation. An edge is deemed to be sharp for a sling rope strands into the composite rope
when the edge radius of a load to be system.
Replacement state of wear: lifted is smaller than the rope diameter of
The replacement state of wear describes a rope sling, the chain diameter of a Spread angle:
the technical condition of a sing such chain sling or the thickness of a web sling. The spread angle occurs between the
that operational safety in accordance with The sling must be equipped with edge load-bearing legs of sling tackle and must
applicable strength (DIN, EN) and regu- protectors when lifting loads with sharp not be used as the basis for calculating
lations (BGR 500) can no longer be guaran- edges. the permissible safe working load ratings
teed. as there is no corresponding reference
Single-leg loading: element.
Rope wire: Single-leg loading is the result of asym-
Rope wires for slings conforming to metrically slung loads as each leg must Steel core:
EN 13414 must have a minimum strength take up the entire load. (CW) core of a steel wire rope – consiting
of 1770 N/mm and are twisted to form of steel wires (strand).
strands. Sliding friction coefficient:
See dynamic friction coefficient. STF:
Round strand rope: See initial stressing force (normed).
Round strand ropes are helical structures Sling expert:
consiting of several wire strands about a A sling expert is a person who, based on Stranded rope:
fibre or steel core. his specialist training and experience, Structure consisting of several strands laid
has sufficient knowledge of slings and is helically in one or more layers over a core.
familiar with applicable standards,
technical codes and regulations.

Slings:
Ropes, chains, webs and endless slings
by means of which the load is directly
connected to the lifting equipment (crane
or hoist).

216
All around the load hook

from R--V
V
Strands: Test logbook: Vacuum:
Cable strands consist of multi-layer, In acc. with BGV D6, the operator of mate- Acc. to DIN 28400, vacuum is the state of
helically twisted rope wires. rial handling equipment must ensure that a gas whose pressure is lower than the
the results of the prescribed annual tests state of the atmosphere. For a vacuum of
Suspended load: are recorded in a test logbook. 760 to 100 torr, the measure of underpres-
Raised goods to be transported are refer- sure achieved is usually given in %.
red to as suspended loads in compliance Thimbles: Example: vacuum lifter with 250 kg S.W.L.
with the Accident Prevention Regulation Sheet metal or solid steel thimbles are at 60 % vacuum, i.e. when underpressure
BGR 500 (VBG 9a). No persons are permit- integrated into wire rope terminal links of 60 % is reached, the equipment has an
ted under suspended loads. to protect the cable structure at the point S.W.L. of 250 kg.
of load application.
Suspension elements: VbF classes:
Devices permanently connected to the TÜV: VbF – Decree on Combustible Liquids.
hoist (e.g. hoist chain, crane rope, Technical Inspectorate (German institute). The VbF class of the medium to be stored
bottom hook block, crane hook...) for can be found on the manufacturer’s safety
taking up load suspension equipment, information card. A means non-water-
slings or loads. U soluble, B water-soluble
Use for intended purpose: VbF A I (flashpoint < 21°C)
The use for which the equipment (machine) VbF A II (flashpoint 21– 55 °C)
T is suitable according to the manufacturer’s VbF A III (flashpoint > 55 °C)
Tare range: specifications (operating instructions), or VbF B (flashpoint < 21°C, water-soluble).
Electronic and mechanical measuring which is regarded as usual on the basis of
systems can be reset to zero in the tare its design, construction and function. VBG:
range in order to be able to indicate Verband der Berufsgenossenschaften.
an absolute change in the measured value Use value: Association of Employers’ Liability
based on this point. The use value indicates the calculated Insurers. Designation for an individual
safety factor of a load suspension device accident prevention regulation (e.g.
Test: or sling (e.g. specified safe working load VBG 14 lifting platforms).
Accident Prevention Regulation BGR 500 1000 kg, actual safe working laod without
(VBG 9a §39 ff.) stipulates that the operator reserve 4000 kg with use value 4). Visual inspection:
of load suspension equipment and slings Essentially, visual inspections are function
is obliged to conduct regular tests and and condition checks with regard to the
inspections and that the operator is solely operational safety of slings conducted in
responsible for conducting these tests and accordance with standardised procedures
inspections at least once a year. BGR 500 (VBG 9a).

Test force:
Test forces refer to the forces specified
by the relevant standard and must be
absorbed by a test object without problems
during production testing.

217
Information

Glossary W
W
Water hazard classes: Wire rope diameter:
A substance is a water hazard if it causes The wire rope diameter is the basis for
lasting detrimental changes to the ground determining the safe working load
water. The water hazard class is to and calculating the breaking load of a
be found on the manufacturer’s safety wire rope.
information card:
WGK0 (generally not water-hazardous) Wire ropes:
WGK1 (slightly water-hazardous) Wire ropes consist of strands and a
WGK2 (water-hazardous) core and are manufactured in compliance
WGK3 (extremely water-hazardous). with standardised design principles.

Wear zone: WLL:


Sections of a sling subject to high mecha- Work load limit, maximum safe working
nical material abriasion due to friction, load of load suspension equipment and/or
bending or load dynamics are defined as slings.
wear zones.
See also “sharp edge”.

Wheel arresters:
Safety feature on trolleys/crabs, preventing
it and thus the load from falling if a wheel
should break.

Wedge socket fitting:


Wedge socket fittings are positively locked
wire rope links made up of the rope socket
and rope wedge. The wedge effect of
the rope wedge initiates selflocking power
flow between the rope and rope socket.
The unloaded end of the wire rope is fitted
with a grip to serve as a slip-through
safeguard.

Wire rope clamp:


Wire rope clamps conforming to DIN 3093
are positively locked rope terminal links
made up of aluminium press sleeves sub-
ject to stringent safety directives.

218
Accessories direct from the hoist and crane manufacturer

from A--C
A
Abrasion protection sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Calibrated load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196--198
Adjustable beam clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Cast metal lever hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Alignment beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Centre-hole cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Aluminium Chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42--45
_ derrick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Chain hoists (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Alphabetical index

_ gantry cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28--29 Chain hoists with radio control . . . . . . . . 32


_ gantry cranes with power supply . . . . . 29 Chain sling accessories . . 151--157, 161--167
_ gantry cranes with trolley . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Chain slings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 145--150, 159--160
_ lever hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Chain spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
_ light crane system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--21 CLAD Boy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
_ manual chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104--107
_ manual chain hoists with trolley . . . . . . 56 Clevis hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Anti-cut slings with loops . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Coil turning hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Anti-twist guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Concrete pipe clamp lifting tackle . . . . . 103
Application examples for Conductor lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
chain slings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149--150 Connex coupling links. . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 162
Articulated trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Control pendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ATEX (explanations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Coupling
Automatic brake cable winches . . . . 68--69 _ bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
_ hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151--153, 161--162
_ hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 162
B _ links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 162
Balancers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77--78 _ load hooks with safety latch . . . . 154,163
Balancers (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 _ master link sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152--153
Barrel grab with tipping device . . . . . . . 101 _ rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Barrel rim clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 _ shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Battery-operated vacuum lifters. . . . . . . 114 Crane catwalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Beam clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Crane components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Big Bag spreader beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Crane components (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Big Bag transport device (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . 96 Crane control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Big Bag transport device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Crane electrics (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Block grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Crane endcarriages (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
BluePower chain slings . . . . . . . . . . 147--148 Crane equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Bolt sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Crane eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Bottom hook blocks (rotating) . . . . . . . . . . 34 Crane kit for manual crane (Ex) . . . . . . . . 94
Buffer endstop, clamp-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Crane technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--34
Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Crane technology (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Crane travel drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Crane weighers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194--198
C Cranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--26
C hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136--137 Crate grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cable drum end clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Crate grab with tipping device . . . . . . . . 101
Cable pullers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Cross beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cable reeling drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Cutaway picture of SH wire rope hoist . . 37
Cable winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68--69, 71--72 Cutaway picture of ST chain hoist . . . . . . 43
Cabling for aluminium gantry cranes . . . . 29

219
Information

Alphabetical index
D G I
Derrick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Galvanised chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220--223
Digital load cell (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Galvanised manual hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Industrial cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Digital load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197--198 Galvanised manual hoists with trolleys . . 55 Information for use
Double end board trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Galvanised pallet lifting truck . . . . . . . . . 204 _ explosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80--81
Double girder overhead travelling crane . . 8 Galvanised push/reel-type _ of hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47--48
Double girder suspension crane. . . . . 21, 23 trolleys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60--62 _ of lifting clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98--99
Double scissor-type lifting table . . . . . . . 204 Galvanised shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 _ of lifting magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Drum grippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 210 Gantry cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 _ of load suspension equipment . . 120--121
Drum jack roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 General terms of delivery . . . . . . . . 218--219 _ of sling accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Dump containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Girder profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 _ of slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142--144
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212--217 Information plates for cranes . . . . . . . . . . 33
Grabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100--109 Innovative crane technology. . . . . . . . . . . . 5
E Grabs (off-standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108--109 INOX manual winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Edge protector brackets (magnetic) . . . 184 Grip-O-Matic hydraulic puller . . . . . . . . 206 INOX push trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Edge protector plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Grommets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 INOX reel-type trolleys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Electric chain hoists . . . . . . . . . 32, 42--45, 85 Inside grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electric cable winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Insulated anti-twist guard . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Electric scissor-type pallet lifting truck 204 H
Electro-hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 H spreader beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Electronic load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Handling equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 J
Endcarriages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Heavy duty pipeline web sling mats . . . 179 Jib cranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--19
Endless chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 High-tensile shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . 190--191
Endless web slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Hinged bottom skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Enquiry form for Hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35--78 K
_ jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Hook dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 KT2000 small crane technology. . . . . . 22--24
_ light cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154--157, 162--164, 166 KTlight small crane technology. . . . . . 20--21
_ load suspension equipment . . . . . 134--135 Hydraulic cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
_ suction lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Hydraulic hand pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Explosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79--96 Hydraulic jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 L
Eye bolts -- grade 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Hydraulic lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Lever hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64--66
Eye bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Hydraulic machine lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Lifting clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104--107
Eye hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 163 Hydraulic mini-lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Lifting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Hydraulic pump sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Lifting trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Hydraulic spreaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Liftomat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
F Hydraulic toe jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Light crane systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--24
Festoon cable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205--206 Lightweight cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fix-de-Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Load display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fixed hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Load handling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Flat cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Load hook selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Flat scissor lifting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Load hook table (DIN 15400) . . . . . . . . . . 140
Flex drum tipper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Load hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Flexi-Leg chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Load indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Forestry chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Load suspension equipment . . . . . . . 97--140
Fork-lift truck attachments. . . . . . . . 207--210 Load suspension equipment (Ex) . . . . 95, 119
Four-leg master links. . . . . . . . . . . . . 151--152 Load tables . . . . . . . . . . 149, 160, 172, 177, 183
Frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fundamentals of explosion protection . . 80

220
All around the load hook

from D--S
R
Load tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 165 Off-standard solutions, Radio control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32
Loading forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138--139 small crane technology . . . . . . . . . . 20--21 Radio receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32
Loading tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Off-standard solutions, Radio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 workshop cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202--203 Radio transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32
Off-standard spreader beams . 127, 129--133 Ratchet hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64--66
Off-standard wire rope hoists . . . . . . . . . . 41 Reel-type trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61--63
M Order form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Ring nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Machinery shifting skates . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Outsize master link sets . . . . . . . . . . 151--153 Rolling clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Magnetic carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Oval master link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Rope slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168--171
Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117--118 Overhead travelling and Rotary trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Maintenance-free suspension . . . . . . . . . 34 suspension cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Rotating bottom hook block . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Manual chain hoist with trolley. . . 49, 54--59 Rotating cross beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Manual chain hoist with trolley (Ex) . . 91--93 Rotating suction lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Manual chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50--59 P Round slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174--176
Manual chain hoists (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . 89--90 Pallet lifting truck with weighing scales 204 Round steel chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161
Manual chain hoists (off-standard) . . . . . 49 Pallet lifting trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Round stock grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Manual chain hoists Pancake gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Runway endstops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
(short headroom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 58--59 Parallel coupling hook . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 164
Manual crane (Ex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Parallel hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 164
Manual pallet lifting truck . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Permanent lifting magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 S
Manual stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Pillar jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--14 S.W.L. diagrams (magnets) . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Manual winches . . . . . . . . . . . . 68--69, 71--72 Pipe clamp tackle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 S.W.L. tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manual winches (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Pipe hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Safety latch sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Master link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Placement frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Safety load hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 163
Material handling and conveying Plate clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Scissor-type lifting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199--204 Plate lifting clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Scissor-type lifting trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Monorail conveyors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 22 Plate pliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104, 106 Screw clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Mounting kit for chain hoists (radio) . . . . 32 Pneumatic chain hoist (Ex) . . . . . . 86--88, 96 Screw-on sling attachment collar
MOVEit handling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Pneumatic winches (Ex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 (GK10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Multi-purpose grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Pocket transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Self-acting vacuum lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Power supply system for aluminium SH/AS wire rope hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . 36--41
gantry crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 SH/AS wire rope hoists (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . 84
N Power supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190--191
Non-marring grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Profile steel grab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Sheaves with supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73--74
Profile specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Short stroke cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Protector plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Shortening clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
O PU abrasion protection sleeves . . . 174--178 SHW 8 winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Off-standard chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . 44--45 Puller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 SIKA hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Off-standard cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 SIKA spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Off-standard jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Push trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 62--63 Single girder suspension crane . . . 6, 21, 23
Off-standard master links . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 PVC abrasion protection sleeves . . 174--178 Single girder overhead travelling crane . . 7
Off-standard small crane Single-acting cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--21 Sling accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185--192
Off-standard solutions . 29, 41--45, 49, 69--70,
75, 108--109, 113, 118, 129--133, 137, 139,198

221
Information

from S--W
V
Sling equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141--184 VacuBoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110--113
Sling hook with clevis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Vacuum lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110--115
Sling rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Vario chain hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Slings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174--176
Small counterweight cranes . . . . . . . . . . 201
Small crane technology . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--24 W
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 165 Walking crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--17
Spreader beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121--135 Wall-mounted jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . 15--16
Spreader beam for box pallets . . . . . . . . 126 Web sling coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
Spreader beam with chain suspension . 126 Web sling hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Spreader beam with ramshorn hooks . . 125 Web slings with loops . . . . . . . . 178--179,182
Spreader beams (off-standard) . . . . 130--133 Web slings with terminal fittings . . . . . . 181
Spreader beams with long/short hooks . 127 Webbing slings with sling hooks . . . . . . 173
Spreader beams with weld-on hooks . . 130 Weighing and measuring . . . . . . . . . 193--198
Spring balancers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76--77 Weld-on hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Spur drive manual winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Weld-on sling attachment collar (GK10) 188
Stacking dump container . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Wheel block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Stainless steel pallet lifting truck . . . . . . 204 Wide-jaw coupling hooks . . . . . . . . 155, 164
Stainless steel shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Wide-jaw hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,164, 166
Steel winches (DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 WinnerPro chain sling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Storage container system . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Wire rope blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Supply programme of fork-lift truck Wire rope guide sheaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Wire rope hoist/winch tables . . . . . . . . . . 40
Supply programme of hydraulics . . . . . . 206 Wire rope reducing tackle . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Supply programme of material handling Working platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
and conveying equipment. . . . . . . . . . . 204 Workshop cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200--203
Suspension cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21--23 Workshop trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Swarf container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Worm drive manual winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Swivel load hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 163
Swivel load hooks with eye . . . . . . . . . . . 163

T
Table trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Telescopic loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Telescopic spreader beam . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Terms of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218--219
Test data tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Thin wall magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Transition tackle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Transport rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187--188
Travel drives (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Trigger sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Trolley for aluminium gantry crane . . . . . 28
Turnover spreader beams . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
TwinDriveConcept TDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

222
Fax order form
Copy _ fill in _ fax

Customer No.

Company Internet
www.stahlplus.com
Name
stahlplus@stahlcranes.com
Department /job title

Street /P.O. Box

Post code/town

Telephone Fax
All around the load hook

Place /date Signature

The STAHLplus delivery service: Fast and inexpensive. We deliver virtually all items from stock within 48 hours.
We hereby order the following in accordance with the terms of delivery and payment given on the cover page.

Item No. Length/m Qty. Item Price per item Total price

STAHLplus catalogue free of charge

All prices net not including VAT. For orders totalling less than 50.– EUR, we reserve the right to add a handling charge of 25.– EUR.
Fax order form
Copy _ fill in _ fax

Customer No.

Company Internet
www.stahlplus.com
Name
stahlplus@stahlcranes.com
Department /job title

Street /P.O. Box

Post code/town

Telephone Fax
All around the load hook

Place /date Signature

The STAHLplus delivery service: Fast and inexpensive. We deliver virtually all items from stock within 48 hours.
We hereby order the following in accordance with the terms of delivery and payment given on the cover page.

Item No. Length/m Qty. Item Price per item Total price

STAHLplus catalogue free of charge

All prices net not including VAT. For orders totalling less than 50.– EUR, we reserve the right to add a handling charge of 25.– EUR.
General Terms of Sale and Delivery
1.0. Scope of application, offers, confirmation of orders, scope Supplier become incapable of the contractual delivery, such
of deliveries circumstances shall be deemed equivalent to an impossibility.
1.1. Any offer, sale or delivery effected by Supplier shall be Should Purchaser claim compensation for loss arising from
governed by these General Terms and Conditions of Sale and such impossibility, liability shall be governed by Section 5.
Delivery. Any diverging terms and conditions of Purchaser
shall be deemed accepted only and only insofar as expressly 2.5. If shipment is delayed for reasons which are the respon-
accepted and confirmed in writing by Supplier. sibility of Purchaser, Purchaser will be charged for any cost
and expenses arising from storage beginning 10 days after
1.2. Contents and scope of any offer shall be construed solely notification of readiness for dispatch; in case of storage at
in accordance with the model description. In particular, Supplier’s plant a minimum amount of 0,5% of the invoice
any documentation, illustration, drawing, specifications of value shall be charged for each month. Following the ineffec-
weights or measurements and of similar data forming part of tive expiry of a reasonable deadline set by Supplier, Supplier
an offer shall constitute mere guidelines, except where is, however, entitled to otherwise dispose of the goods
expressly declared binding. Supplier retains all titles, copy- for delivery and to supply Purchaser within an appropriately
right, other industrial property rights and know-how regarding extended delivery period with the ordered goods or with
any documentation provided in conjunction with an offer; such goods of the same generic product group.
documentation shall not be made available to third parties,
unless Supplier consents, and may only be used by offeree as 3.0. Dispatch, passing of risk, acceptance of delivery
permitted. 3.1. Delivery shall be effected ex works (EXW Incoterms 2000)
unless otherwise expressly agreed. If Supplier has to dispatch
1.3. The scope of a delivery shall be construed in accordance the goods, Supplier is entitled to choose the means and route
with Supplier’s written confirmation of the order, in the of transportation. Supplier is a SLVS/no-client. This means
absence of such with Supplier’s order. This provision shall not that in such a case the risk of transport always is insured by
affect Supplier’s right to carry out technical modifications to Supplier.
the delivery item, provided that its technical function is not
impaired as a result. 3.2. Risk shall – even in cases of partial delivery – pass to
Purchaser no later than upon dispatch or collection of the
1.4. In case of an ongoing business relationship, the current goods, even if Supplier agreed on additional services such as
version of Supplier’s General Terms and Conditions forms part payment of the costs of transport, delivery or assembly.
of the agreement even if express reference has not been
made any more. 3.3. Should dispatch be delayed due to circumstances,
Supplier is not responsible for, risk shall pass to Purchaser
2.0. Delivery period, delay, impossibility 10 days after notification of readiness for dispatch; Supplier,
2.1. Compliance with delivery periods is conditional upon however, has to take out the insurance cover as requested
Purchaser’s performance of its own contractual obligations. by Purchaser at Purchaser’s expense.
Delivery periods commence upon dispatch of the confirmation
of the order, but not before all of the details concerning 3.4. Without prejudice to any claims to warranty, Purchaser
the execution of the order have been clarified, not before has to accept the goods delivered, even if they evidence
Purchaser has supplied all documents, permissions and insignificant defects.
releases, not before Supplier has received any down pay-
ments agreed upon and not before any other requirements 3.5. Supplier may carry out partial deliveries.
agreed upon by the parties in the individual contract for the
seamless execution of the order have been complied with. 3.6. Unless otherwise agreed, packaging is arranged for
Otherwise the time for delivery shall be reasonably extended by Supplier and not requested from Purchaser. Therefore,
except where Supplier is responsible for the delay. it is transport packaging. Place of performance for the return
of transport packaging is at Supplier’s registered office.
2.2. The agreed delivery dates shall be considered as fulfilled, Purchaser shall bear the costs of the returning of the transport
should the goods for delivery have left Supplier’s plant prior to packaging as well as the costs of collection incurred by
its expiry or should Purchaser have been given notice that the Supplier. Furthermore, Purchaser has to keep the transport
goods are ready for shipment. Correct and punctual supply packaging clean and to return it during Supplier’s regular
to Supplier by its own auxiliary Suppliers is reserved. Should business hours without it being intermingled with other com-
delivery be delayed due to the occurrence of unforeseeable ponents.
and/or unusual circumstances on the part of Supplier, which
could not be avoided with due care, the delivery deadlines 4.0. Warranty
shall be extended accordingly. The aforesaid applies irre- 4.1. For defects of goods delivered or of services rendered,
spective of whether such delay occurs in the plant of Supplier including the absence of warranted qualities, Supplier shall be
or in one of its auxiliary supplier’s plants. Such delaying liable as follows:
circumstances are, for example, sanctions and intervention by Only reasonably substantial impairments of the work and
governmental authorities, delayed delivery of parts from deliveries regarding their quality or contractual use shall
auxiliary Suppliers, difficulties in power supply or other kinds constitute a defect. All parts that prove to be defective, due to
of operational disturbances. These provisions shall apply a cause set prior to the passing of risk – in particular on
mutatis mutandis in cases of strike and/or lockout. Should account of defective engineering, poor construction material
such delay continue for more than two months, Purchaser or faulty workmanship –, within twelve months of the passing
shall be entitled to cancel the contract with respect to the part of risk shall be, at Supplier’s discretion, either repaired
of the contract not yet performed. Any claims for damages or replaced free of charge. Notice of the discovery of such
on the grounds of an extension of the delivery period or due to defects after delivery shall be given without delay and in
a release and discharge from the obligation to deliver shall be writing. Any parts replaced become the property of Supplier.
determined solely in accordance with Section 5. Supplier may Minor impairments within the meaning hereof do not form an
only invoke the aforementioned circumstances, if Supplier has obstacle for performance of the contract.
notified Purchaser thereof without delay.
4.2. In particular, the warranty does not cover damages arising
2.3. Should Supplier be responsible for delayed delivery from the following:
and should Purchaser suffer a loss as a result, Purchaser incorrect or negligent use, faulty assembly and/or faulty instal-
may claim a compensation for each full week of delay in the lation respectively putting into operation, either by Purchaser or
amount of 0.5%, not exceeding, however, a total of 5% of by third parties, natural wear, defective or negligent handling,
the value of that part of the total delivery which, due to the inappropriate production equipment and facilities or inappropri-
delay, could not be used on time or not in conformity with ate operating supply items, faulty construction work, inappro-
the contract. Any claims for compensation apart from this priate foundation soil, chemical, electrochemical or electrical
shall be governed solely by Section 5. The right to terminate influences, as long as Supplier is not liable for such reason.
the contract after ineffective expiry of a reasonable period
of grace granted by Purchaser, or where the law does 4.3. Purchaser shall, after consulting with Supplier, provide
not require such period of grace, shall remain unaffected. Supplier with the necessary time and opportunity to carry out
any repair work or replacement delivery, that seems neces-
2.4. Should the entire delivery or performance of the contract sary to Supplier in its own discretion. Otherwise, Supplier shall
become finally impossible for Supplier prior to the passing be released from liability. Should industrial safety or the pre-
of risk, Purchaser may rescind the contract. Should delivery vention of disproportionately high damages require to urgently
only become partly impossible and should Purchaser have remedy such defect, Purchaser shall advise so immediately
a justified interest in refusing a partial delivery, or should indicating the relevant circumstances, whereupon Supplier
shall grant Purchaser permission in good time according to 6.3. Should Purchaser fall into arrears with payments, is obliged to surrender possession. The recovery by
the circumstances, but at any event after three working interest at a rate 8 percentage points above the respective Supplier of the goods delivered does not constitute rescis-
days, to remedy the defect itself or have it remedied by base interest rate shall be charged. Interest on arrears sion of the contract.
third parties and to demand from Supplier compensation is to be charged at a higher rate should Supplier prove
for the necessary costs. If Supplier should be in default in further legal entitlement for higher interest rates. 7.6. In cases of seizure or other interventions by third par-
remedying the defect, Purchaser shall have the same ties, Purchaser shall inform Supplier in writing immediately
right irrespective of such separate permission. In case of 6.4. Purchaser may not exercise a right of retention and/or in order to enable Supplier to file legal action in accor-
unjustified denial of such permission, Supplier undertakes set off counterclaims, unless such counterclaim is un- dance with Section 771 of the German Code of Civil
to compensate for any damage ensuing as a result. disputed or has been adjudicated by non-appealable Procedure (ZPO). Should such third party be unable to
judgement. Furthermore, the said shall not apply to claims reimburse Supplier including its in and out of court costs
4.4. In so far as the notification of defects proves justified, based on defective delivery. If the delivery is divisible, the of such action pursuant to Section 771 ZPO, Purchaser is
Supplier shall pay the following direct costs arising in latter exception only relates to the part of the partial liable to Supplier for the respective costs and expenses.
conjunction with the repair work or replacement delivery: performance affected. In the case of a minor impairment,
The costs of the replacement part including its shipping this exception does not apply, however, to that part of the 7.7. Supplier undertakes to release, at the request of
and the adequate costs of removal and installation, fur- payment exceeding the amount representing the loss of Purchaser, its securities insofar as their value in terms of
thermore the costs of providing mechanics and auxiliary value of the goods delivered. collection of such exceeds the secured claim by more
personnel, as may be necessary. All other costs are to be than 10%.
borne by Purchaser. In particular, the latter includes any 6.5. Supplier may suspend performance of delivery and
costs arising from the fact that the goods delivered have service, should after formation of the contract it transpires 7.8. During the duration of the retention of title, Supplier
been moved to a different location. that Purchaser will not fulfil a considerable part of its may insure the goods delivered at Purchaser’s expense
obligation due to its considerably impaired credit- against theft, breakage, fire, water and other damage,
4.5. This warranty shall not cover defects resulting from a worthiness. Should Supplier suspend the performance of unless Purchaser proves to have taken out sufficient
faulty modification or repair work effected by Purchaser or the contract, Supplier shall communicate so to Purchaser insurance cover to such effect itself. At Supplier’s request,
third parties without the prior written consent of Supplier. immediately and continue the performance, should Purchaser shall provide such prove by producing the
Purchaser provide adequate security for the performance actual insurance policy to Supplier.
4.6. Should the repair work proof unsuccessful despite of its own obligations.
a reasonable period of grace having been granted, 7.9. In case of a delivery to a foreign Purchaser, the foreign
or should Supplier refuse to remedy the defect although 6.6. With regard to business transacted overseas, Supplier Purchaser shall secure Supplier’s ownership of the goods
Purchaser is entitled to such and/or should a replacement may also suspend performance of delivery, should foreign to be delivered in accordance with the statutory provisions
not be delivered, Purchaser may reduce the purchase exchange turbulences result in currency disadvantages for of the delivery country and shall also assist where and
price or cancel the contract using its own discretion. Supplier of more than 10%. Such currency disadvantage to what extend may be necessary to secure Supplier’s
shall only have occurred after formation of the contract retention of ownership. In addition, such foreign purchaser
4.7. The warranty period concerning repair work carried and before the first contractual delivery. shall also comply with German Law.
out and replacements delivered is six months and begins
after the finishing of the repair work or the delivery of 7.0. Retention of Ownership 8.0. Place of performance, applicable law, venue, data
the replacement. The warranty period shall, however, end 7.1. Ownership of the goods delivered, that is title to and protection, confidentiality, written form and partial
no later than upon expiry of the initial warranty period right of disposal of, does not pass onto Purchaser until invalidity
applicable in relation to the original goods delivered. each and every claim of Supplier against Purchaser on the 8.1. Place of performance both regarding payment and
basis of the delivery contract have been duly fulfilled. delivery is at the registered office of Supplier.
5.0. Liability Supplier also claims the extended reservation of title under
5.1. Purchaser shall not be entitled to assert any claims for German law. Should the parties have agreed on the drafts 8.2. These General Terms of Sale and Delivery and the
damages or for compensation of expenses (hereinafter: and cheques payment procedure and should Supplier be entire legal relationships between Supplier and Purchaser
claims for damages) arising from a breach of contractual liable to third parties, in particular to a bank, due to such shall be governed solely by German law with the appli-
duties or tort, save as otherwise provided herein below. bill of exchange, Purchaser’s obligations shall not be con- cation of the UN Convention on the International Sale of
sidered fulfilled until such liability of Supplier out of said Goods (CISG) excluded.
5.2. Purchaser shall be entitled to claims for damages on bill of exchange has finally ceased.
the grounds of mandatory liability (in particular under 8.3. In the event of any dispute arising from the contractual
the German Product Liability Act), in cases of death, injury 7.2. Pending final and due fulfilment of each and every relationships between the parties, venue shall be Stuttgart.
or detriment of health, in cases of wilful damage or gross claim of Supplier against Purchaser on the basis of the However, Supplier may choose to bring an action against
negligence, in conjunction with breaches of cardinal obli- delivery contract, Purchaser shall not give the goods Purchaser at the statutory venue of Purchaser.
gations also in cases of ordinary negligence, in cases of delivered in pledge or as security, resell these goods or
malicious non-disclosure of defects and on the grounds of assign rights to third parties that relate to these goods. 8.4. The following provisions shall apply to the contractual
a guarantee. In such cases Supplier is liable for its legal relationships in the following priority:
representatives and executive employees and in conjunc- 7.3. Should Purchaser resell the goods delivered in violation
tion with breaches of cardinal obligations also for other of this agreement or with the consent of Supplier, Purchaser a) Individual contractual Agreements entered into
persons employed in performing its obligation. Apart from now already assigns to Supplier each and every claim between the parties.
liability on grounds of intent/gross negligence or cases of arising from such sale. Supplier accepts this assignment. b) These General Terms of Sale and Delivery.
death, injury or detriment of health, liability in conjunction Supplier may collect such claim against such third party c) Statutory law, in particular the German Commercial
with breaches of cardinal obligations is limited to the fore- directly. Supplier may also invoke its extended reservation Code (HGB) and the German Civil Code (BGB).
seeable damage typical of the type of contract. of title to the goods delivered. In such a case, Purchaser
shall inform Supplier of the claim assigned to Supplier and 8.5. Purchaser is advised, in accordance with Section 33
5.3. Supplier has taken out sufficient worldwide insurance of the debtor, provide all information necessary for the of the German Federal Data Protection Act (BDSG), that
for third party product liability to cover for personal injury collection of such claim, deliver to Supplier all of the Supplier saves the contractual data in machine-readable
and property damage. Claims for compensation of property respective documentation and inform the debtor of such form and processes these data as required according
damage based on product liability are therefore limited assignment. to the purpose of the contractual relationship. All data
to the amounts owned by the insurance. As far as legally shall be kept in confidence. Both Purchaser and Supplier
possible, Supplier assigns these insurance claims to 7.4. Any mixture, combination or adjunction of the goods shall keep in confidence any information, of which it
Purchaser. delivered with other goods, shall always only be effected becomes aware of in the course of carrying out this
in the name of Supplier. Should the goods delivered contract, that is not known to the public and emanates
5.4. These provisions shall not affect the distribution of the be connected in such way with goods not belonging from the other party’s sphere.
burden of proof in legal action. to Purchaser, Supplier shall be entitled to joint ownership
in the new product in the ratio of the value of the goods 8.6. Additional agreements, provisos, amendments and
5.5. Purchaser’s claims for damages shall elapse after delivered and the other goods’ value. Should, due supplements require written confirmation by Supplier in
12 months. Liability under the Product Liability Act or on to such processing, mixing or combination, Supplier’s order to be effective.
grounds of intent or fraudulent misrepresentation shall be ownership cease and Purchaser’s new product be the
time-barred in accordance with the statutory period of principal product, it shall be deemed agreed that 8.7. Should any of the provisions of these General Terms
limitation. Purchaser assigns to Supplier proportionate joint owner- of Sale and Delivery or any other provision in connection
ship in this product. Should the goods delivered be with other stipulations be invalid or become invalid, the
6.0. Prices and payment permanently connected with land and/or buildings, validity of all other provisions or stipulations shall remain
6.1. Unless otherwise agreed, prices shall be ex works Purchaser also assigns to Supplier the claim(s) arising unaffected.
(EXW Incoterms 2000) plus the statutory value added tax from or in connection with such connection as a further
payable at the time. Additional costs such as packaging, security for Supplier’s claims against Purchaser.
freight, insurance, customs duties and the installation
costs shall be charged separately. 7.5. If the behaviour of Purchaser is in breach of contract,
in particular in case of not inconsiderably delayed
6.2. Unless otherwise agreed, payments shall be made payment, pledging or assigning the goods delivered as
in cash within ten days of the date of invoice without any security or other assignment to third parties, Supplier
deductions, free at Supplier’s payment office. has the right to recover the goods delivered; Purchaser
Tradition and innovation _ Over 130 years of tradition, over 130 years of practical approach, com-
petence and experience, always flexible and market-orientated. Profit from our expertise as one of
the world’s leading manufacturers of crane components for overhead transport. STAHL CraneSystems
offers you the most comprehensive product spectrum of wire rope and chain hoists covering all
load ranges and heights of lift. Drive technology to meet the highest requirements and technically
mature electronics complete our portfolio. We look forward to answering your questions. STAHL
CraneSystems GmbH, 74653 Künzelsau, Germany, +49 7940 128-0 or marketing@stahlcranes.com

Lifting technology | Drive technology | Control technology


Internet
www.stahlplus.com
stahlplus@stahlcranes.com

STAHL CraneSystems GmbH


Daimlerstr. 6, 74653 Künzelsau
F-KA-10-EN-02.09-vis ID-Nr. 990 037 0

You might also like